Full text of "Graduate catalog"

See other formats

z
o

z
>

Z I
Z I

Z .

CO (

-< ■

r-
<

o
en

■0

{/)

3
IS

•

-0

</<

-j^^gV^.

Graduate School Catalog

1983-1985

lUP IS ACCREDITED BY THE MIDDLE STATES ASSOCIATION OF
COLLEGES AND SECONDARY SCHOOLS, THE NATIONAL
COUNCIL FOR ACCREDITATION OF TEACHER EDUCATION, AND,
FOR ITS MUSIC CURRICULA, THE NATIONAL ASSOCIATION OF
SCHOOLS OF MUSIC. THE UNIVERSITY IS A MEMBER OF THE
COUNCIL OF GRADUATE SCHOOLS IN THE UNITED STATES AND
OF THE NORTHEAST, AND PENNSYLVANIA ASSOCIATIONS OF
GRADUATE SCHOOLS.

lUP IS COMMITTED TO PROVIDING LEADERSHIP IN TAKING
AFFIRMATIVE ACTION TO ATTAIN EOUAL EDUCATIONAL AND
EMPLOYMENT RIGHTS FOR ALL PERSONS, WITHOUT REGARD
TO SEX, HANDICAP, OR OTHER LEGALLY PROTECTED CLASSIFI-
CATION. THIS POLICY IS PLACED IN THIS DOCUMENT IN
ACCORDANCE WITH STATE AND FEDERAL LAWS INCLUDING
TITLE IX OF THE EDUCATIONAL AMENDMENT OF 1972 AND
SECTION 503 AND SECTION 504 OF THE REHABILITATION ACT
OF 1973. THIS POLICY EXTENDS TO DISABLED VETERANS AND
VETERANS OF THE VIETNAM ERA. PLEASE DIRECT EOUAL
OPPORTUNITY INOUIRIES TO: AFFIRMATIVE ACTION OFFICE,
349 JOHN SUTTON HALL, lUP, INDIANA, PA 15705.

lUP RESERVES THE RIGHT TO REPEAL, CHANGE, OR AMENDTHE
POLICIES, REGULATIONS, AND COURSES CONTAINED IN THIS
CATALOG AT ANY TIME. TUITION AND FEES ARE ALSO SUBJECT
TO CHANGE,

PRESS DATE: MAY, 1983

Indiana University

of Pennsylvania

1983-1985

The Graduate School

Catalog

INDIANA, PENNSYLVANIA 15705

TELEPHONE: (412) 357-2222

Table of Contents

TABLE OF CONTENTS

The Graduate School Calendar 5

Tuition and Fees 8

University Refund Policy 8

lUP 11

Location 11

Library 11

Computer Center 12

Testing Services 12

Financial Aid 13

Career Services 14

The Graduate School at lUP 15

General Information 15

Admission 16

Programming and Registration 19

Specialist Certification Programs 19

Financial Aid 20

Insurance 22

Procedures and Regulations 22

Academic Credits and Student Status 25

Residency 25

Degree Candidacy 25

Grading System 26

Course Abbreviation Key 28

Doctoral Degree Programs 31

Master's Degree Programs 34

Master of Education Curriculum Requirements 38

Certification Programs 38

General Service Courses 41

Research 41

Statistics 42

Other 42

Supervised Laboratory Experience 43

Graduate Programs and Courses 45

Adult and Community Education 45

Anthropology 46

Art and Art Education 47

Biology 54

Business 59

Business Administration 59

Chemistry 72

Communications Media 78

Computer Science 83

Consumer Services 84

Counselor Education 86

Criminology 91

Indiana University of Pennsylvania

Economics 94

Educational Psychology 96

Elementary Education 99

English 105

Food and Nutrition 110

Foreign Languages 112

Foundations of Education 118

Geography and Regional Planning 119

Geoscience 123

Health and Physical Education 125

History 1 27

Home Economics Education 132

Labor Relations 135

Mathematics 137

Mathematics for Elementary School Teachers 141

Music and Music Education 144

Philosophy 150

Physics 151

Political Science 157

Professional Growth 161

Psychology 161

Reading 166

Science for the Elementary School Teacher 169

Social Science 171

Sociology 172

Special Education and Clinical Services 175

Sport Sciences 125

Student Personnel Services 87

Theater 1 83

Directory 1 85

Trustees 1 85

Administrative Officers 185

Index 1 86

Campus Map 1 90

Application Requests 1 93

The Graduate School Calendar

THE GRADUATE
SCHOOL CALENDAR

SUMMER SESSION 1983

April 1 Students who plan to take graduate work during the 1983

Sunnmer Sessions must have an application for graduate
study approved on or before this date,

June 1 Final date to submit thesis proposal to the School Dean in

order to complete requirements for the degree in Summer
1983.

June 1 Prospective August 1983 graduates must have filed an

application for graduation.

July 1 Final date for presentation of completed thesis to major

professor in order to complete requirements for the degree in
the Summer 1983.

August 1 Completed and corrected thesis must be on file with the

School Dean for Summer 1983 degree

FALL SEMESTER 1983

July 1 Students who plan to take graduate work during the fall

semester must have an application for graduate study
approved on or before this date.

October 1 Final date to submit thesis proposal to the School Dean in

order to complete requirements for the degree in the Fall
Semester 1983.

October 1 Prospective December 1983 graduates must have filed an

application for graduation.

November 1 Final date for presentation of completed thesis to major
professor in order to complete requirements for the degree in
the Fall Semester 1983.

December 1 Completed and corrected thesis to be filed with the School
Dean for degree in Fall Semester 1983.

Indiana University of Pennsylvania

SPRING SEMESTER 1984

November 1 Students who plan to take graduate work during the Spring
Semester must have an application for graduate study
approved on or before this date.

March 1 Final date to submit thesis proposal to the School Dean in

order to complete requirements for the degree in the Spring
Semester 1984.

March 1 Prospective May 1984 graduates must have filed an appli-

cation for graduation.

April 1 Final date for presentation of completed thesis to major

professor in order to complete requirements for the degree in
the Spring 1984

May 1 Completed and corrected thesis must be on file with the

School Dean for degree in Spring Semester.

SUMMER SESSION 1984

Dates for 1 984 Summer Session have not been set as of this printing. Please
contact The Graduate School for further information.

April 1 Students who plan to take graduate work during 1984

Summer Sessions must have an application for graduate
study approved on or before this date.

June 1 Final date to submit thesis proposal to the School Dean in

order to complete requirements for the degree in Summer
1984

June 1 Prospective August 1984 graduates must have filed an

application for graduation.

July 1 Final date for presentation of completed thesis to major

professor in order to complete requirements for the degree in
the Summer 1984,

August 1 Completed and corrected thesis must be on file with the

School Dean for Summer 1984 degree.

FALL SEMESTER 1984

July 1 Students who plan to take graduate work during the Fall

Semester must have an application for graduate study
approved on or before this date

October 1 Final date to submit thesis proposal to the School Dean in

order to complete requirements for the degree m the Fall
Semester 1984.

The Graduate School Calendar

October 1 Prospective December 1984 graduates must have filed an

application for graduation.

November 1 Final date for presentation of completed thesis to major
professor in order to complete requirements for the degree in
the Fail Semester 1984.

December 1 Completed and corrected thesis to be filed with the School
Dean for degree in Fall Semester 1984.

SPRING SEMESTER 1985

November 1

March 1

April 1

May 1

Students who plan to take graduate work during the Spring
Semester must have an application for graduate study
approved on or before this date.

Final date to submit thesis proposal to the School Dean in
order to complete requirements for the degree in the Spring
Semester 1985.

Prospective May 1985 graduates must have filed an appli-
cation for graduation.

Final date for presentation of completed thesis to major
professor in order to complete requirements for the degree in
the Spring 1985.

Completed and corrected thesis must be on file with the
School Dean for degree in Spring Semester.

SUMMER SESSION 1985

Dates for 1 985 Summer Session have not been set as of this printing Please
contact The Graduate School for further information.

April 1 Students who plan to take graduate work during 1985

Summer Sessions must have an application for graduate
study approved on or before this date.

June 1 Final date to submit thesis proposal to the School Dean in

order to complete requirements for the degree in Summer
1985.

June 1 Prospective August 1985 graduates must have filed an

application for graduation.

July 1 Final date for presentation of completed thesis to major

professor in order to complete requirements for the
degree in the Summer 1985.

August 1 Completed and corrected thesis must be on file with the

School Dean for Summer 1985 degree

8 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

TUITION AND FEES

Full-Time Tuition

$740 for 9 to 15 semester hours (s.h.), then $82 for each additional s.h.

Part-Time Tuition

$82 per semester hour (s.h.) for less than 9 s.h.

Summer Session Tuition

Per semester hour (s.h.) $82.00

Application Fee (Must accompany application form) $10.00

Activity Fee — Semester Full-Time Students

(9 semester hours or more) $22.00

Semester Part-Time Students

(8 semester hours or less) $ 8.00

Main Summer Session —

All Graduate Students $16.00

Pre and Post Summer Session —

All Graduate Students $ 7.00

Health Fee — Semester Full-Time $30.00

Pre Session $ 6.00

Mam Session $1 2.00

Post Session $ 6.00

Late Fee $10.00/day up to $20.00

Applied Music Fee per private instruction $50.00

Auditors Fee (Same as Tuition)

Graduation Fee.:. $20.00

Master's Cap, Hood and Gown Fee Nominal

All fees are subject to change without notice.

Grades and transcripts may be withheld by lUP if a student is delinquent in
paying any bill owed the University. Payment of the bill or establishment of a
payment plan satisfactory to the University will be required for release of
grades and/or transcripts.

University Refund Policy

The University must engage its faculty, assign Residence Hall space and
arrange for meal contracts in advance of each term in accordance with the
number of students who expressed their intent to be enrolled. When students
withdraw from the University, they create vacancies which cannot be filled and
financial commitments for salaries and services by the University must be
honored. The refund policy at lUP applies to all students enrolled in credit
producing programs at the University either full-time or part-time.

Graduate students withdrawing from the University must process such with-
drawal through the Graduate School Office. The official withdrawal date will be
established by the Graduate School Office.

Tuition and Fees

Students totally withdrawing from courses, Residence Halls and/or meal
contracts upon receiving approval from the Graduate School will forfeit a
portion of the semester charges in accordance with the following schedule.

From the first full day of semester
classes to and including the four-
teenth (14th) calendar day following
the start of classes

Forfeit twenty (20) percent of the stu-
dent's total semester charges.

From the fifteenth (15th) calendar
day following the start of classes to
and including the twenty-first (21st)
calendar day following the start of
classes

Forfeit thirty (30) percent of the stu-
dent's total semester charges.

From the twenty-second (22nd) cal-
endar day to and including the twenty-
eighth (28th) calendar day following
the start of classes

Forfeit forty (40) percent of the stu-
dent's total semester charges.

From the twenty-ninth (29th) calen-
dar day to and including the thirty-
fifth (35th) calendar day following the
start of classes

Forfeit fifty (50) percent of the stu-
dent's total semester charges.

After the thirty-fifth (35th) calendar
day following the start of classes

No refund will be granted and al
semester fees forfeited

The start of days defined as the first day of classes to begin as scheduled on
the University calendar.

Refunds for students receiving financial assistance from scholarships and/or
grants will be returned to the source of aid in an appropriate proportion, except
in those cases in which a full refund to the source is required.

Refunds made during summer sessions will be governed by the following
schedule. Students totally withdrawing from courses, resident halls and/or
meal contracts upon receiving approval from the dean's office will forfeit a
portion of the total session charges in accordance with the following schedule:

From the first day of arena registra-
tion through the fourth (4th) calendar
day following arena registration for
Pre, Mam, and Post Sessions.

Forfeit fifty (50) percent of the stu-
dent's total session charges.

After the fourth (4th) calendar day

No refunds will be granted and all
semester fees forfeited.

Once a student registers for a course, the maximum refund wil Ibe 50 percent
regardless of when the class(es) begin.

10 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

No refunds will be granted unless formal withdrawal procedure has been
initiated by the student or his/her family within 30 days of the date of with-
drawal. Written and dated notice is required.

No refunds will be granted for students suspended or expelled by the Uni-
versity.

The School Dean may request exceptions of these policies and grant pro-
rated refunds when circumstances justify it. (EXAMPLE: death, medical
reasons or military obligation.)

DISCRETE COURSE WITHDRAWAL

No refunds will be made to full-time students who reduce class load after
classes have started.

Discrete course withdrawal is defined as a reduction in class load but not total
withdrawal from the University. Example: A student who registers for two
courses and then withdraws from one class but continues with the other class.

Part-time students (graduate students who register for less than nine credit
hours) will forfeit a portion of the credit hour fee in accordance with the
following schedule:

Calendar Class Day of Percentage of Student's

Individual Course Withdrawal Instructional Fee to be Forfeited

1 through 35 50%

36 and Beyond 100% (no refund)

Refunds will be granted only for the instructional fee No refund will be granted
to students who add or drop a like number of credit hours.

Refunds will be granted students for individual course withdrawals during
summer sessions under the same basis as outlined on page 9.

WITHDRAWAL FROM UNIVERSITY SERVICES

Students who withdraw from the University Students Services (Residence
Hall, meal contracts, etc.), but do not totally withdraw from the University will
not be granted a refund.

The University — 11

lUP

Location — lUP, the state-owned university in the Commonwealth of
Pennsylvania's Higher Education System, is located in Indiana, Pennsylvania,
a community of 26,000 about 55 miles northeast of Pittsburgh and 30 miles
north of Johnstown. Situated in the Allegheny foothills, Indiana has a moderate
climate conducive to study the year round and a wide variety of historical,
cultural, and recreational facilities both immediately at hand and in neigh-
boring population centers.

Library — The University Library Complex (Patrick J. Stapleton, Jr. Library
and Rhodes R. Stabley Library) provides excellent facilities for graduate work
with librarians readily available for assisting with specialized reference work.
The Library is an officially designated Federal Depository. The holdings in
Patrick J Stapleton, Jr. Library include over 520,000 volumes of books,
1 ,500,000 units of microform, 3,800 indexed periodical subscriptions, and the
government documents collection.

The Rhodes R. Stabley Library houses 50.000 units of media material and
software together with facilities for listening and viewing. These services
consist of the development of instructional systems such as student response,
and personal self-instructional materials. In addition, the services provide
photographic, sound recording and reproduction, design and production of
conventional instructional materials: procurement, inventory, and
maintenance of University multi-media equipment; developing and main-
taining a 16mm film library.

Media equipment and hardware are housed in the lower floor of Davis Hall.

Graduate students and faculty conducting research may apply for
interlibrary loans to supplement the library's holdings. Individual study carrels
are available for graduate students conducting library research.

STAPLETON/STABLEY LIBRARY HOURS

Monday thru Thursday

Friday

Saturday

Sunday

Schedules for summer sessions and vacation periods are posted The tele-
phone number the Mam Desk is 357-2340.

45 a.m.

- 10:30 p.m

45 a.m.

- 9:30 p.m

45 am.

- 5:00 p.m

00 p.m

- 10:30 p.m

12 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

The Computer Center — The Computer Center, established in July, 1 963,
provides computational suppport for undergraduate and graduate courses,
faculty and student research, and the administrative requirements of the Uni-
versity. The computing capacity of the Center is provided by a large-scale disk
oriented central processor which supports both time-sharing and batch
processing services for the university community. Typewriter terminals,
located both in the Computer Center and in various locations on campus,
permit the use of the computer on a time-sharing basis. Keypunching facilities
and a full complement of tabulating equipment are available in the Computer
Center for student use. Remote job entry stations are located in the Computer
Science department and the School of Business, along with a large number of
time-sharing terminals. Aid in the use of the computer and facilities may be
obtained from user assistants on duty at the Computer Center, and from the
Center's professional staff.

lUP's Computer Center plays an active part in the daily functioning of the
University. It is the principal laboratory facility for computer-oriented courses
and is used as a teaching aid in many classes involving statistical and
numerical analyses and computer simulations. In addition, over 80 organi-
zatons outside the University make extensive use of lUP's computing facilities.
The staff at the Center is actively involved in continuing work aimed at making
computers a more effective and readily accessible tool for both the academic
and administrative segments of the university community.

Testing Services — Testing programs at lUP are administered through
the Academic Services and Testing Center. Among the national testing pro-
grams offered, the following are of particular interest to potential graduate
students.

The Graduate Record Examination (GRE) is administered on nationally-
established dates five times each year. In the Saturday morning sessions the
aptitude examinations are offered; the advanced examinations (specializa-
tions) are offered in the afternoon sessions. Information and registration
booklets are available from the Graduate School or from the Testing Center.
Registration forms must be sent directly to ETS in Princeton, New Jersey.

The Miller Analogies Test (MAT) is administered by the Testing Center
on a frequent schedule — usually monthly on a weekday afternoon. To
register, contact the Testing Center (412-357-3050). All Graduate School
applicants with a GPA of below 2.6 must take the MAT.

The Graduate Management Admission Test (GM AT) is administered on
nationally-established dates. lUP is a regular center for some dates and can
be a special center for other dates if 15 registrations are submitted to the
Testing Center before the "special requests" deadline. Registrations for
regular center dates, as listed in the GMAT booklet, are submitted directly to
ETS. Information-registration booklets are available from the School of
Business-MBA Coordinator or from the Testing Center.

The National Teacher Examination (NTE) is administered on three
nationally-established dates. On two dates the common examinations are
offered; on two other dates the area examinations (specializations) are

7^76 University — 13

offered. It is used generally by participating school systenns for qualification
and/or selection of instructional staff. Use of the NTE at lUP is limited to the
area examination for guidance counselor, which is used in admission to the
lUP doctoral program in counselor education.

Information on graduate and professional school exams other than those
used for lUP Graduate School programs is available through the Testing
Center. Law School Admission Test (LSAT) information is also available in the
office of the School of Humanities and Social Sciences. Medical College
Admission Test (MCAT) information is available through the Dean of the
School of Natural Sciences and Mathematics.

Arrangements can be made by advance contact for administration of tests
adapted to visual, auditory, or physical handicaps.

The Testing Center is a service operation for the administration of tests and
neither makes testing requirements nor offers interpretation of testing results.
Commercial "How to Prepare for . . ." materials are available in the Co-op Store
and other local bookstores. Questions concerning test requirements and
desirable scores should be addressed to The Graduate School. Questions
concerning specific registration matters and the test agency information-
registration materials may be directed to the Academic Services and Testing
Center, G30 Sutton Hall (357-3050).

Financial Aid — The Financial Aid Qffice, located at 308 Pratt Hall, offers
financial information and counseling to all students attending lUP. The types
of financial assistance offered by the Financial Aid Office include student
employment, loans, and scholarships. In most cases the Pennsylvania State
Grant Application is used to determine eligibility for these programs.

In order to be considered for financial aid administered through the Uni-
versity, a Pennsylvania State Grant Application must be submitted to Harris-
burg, Pennsylvania. Students attending iUP on at least a half-time basis
(5 credit hours or more) will be awarded assistance based on demonstrated
financial need. To be eligible for continued funding, applicants must remain in
satisfactory academic standing at the University and show continued
academic progress.

Payment of financial aid awards is done on a semester basis. All financial
aid, with the exception of the private scholarships, work-study, and guar-
anteed student loans are credited to the student's bill in advance.

The cost of attending IUP and the University's refund policy are listed in this
catalog. Please refer to the index for further information.

Career Services — The Office of Career Services, 302 Pratt Hall, is open to
all IUP graduate students and alumni. Students and classes are invited to use
the facilities and professional staff for assistance in carrer planning and
development.

The primary functions of the Career Services program are: providing voca-
tional planning assistance through conferences with professional career
counselors; assembling a set of credentials for each student who submits the
materials and making copies of these credentials available to prospective
employers: cooperating with the faculty of the University to increase the over-
all awareness of current employment opportunities and trends: arranging for

14 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

campus interviews; publicizing career information, especially regarding
campus interviewing opportunities; preparing vacancy files and a current
vacancy list wfiich are made available to eligible candidates; maintaining a
career information library; arranging for occupational information through
meetings with representatives from education, business, industry and govern-
ment; conducting follow-up studies of graduates and assembling supply and
demand data

Each student is urged to obtain a packet of information in the Career Ser-
vices Office and complete all the forms necessary to establish a credential file
for employment purposes.

The Graduate School — 75

THE GRADUATE SCHOOL AT lUP

GENERAL INFORMATION

Graduate work was inaugurated at lUP in September, 1957.

Master of Arts, Master of Science, Master of Business Administration,
Master of Education, Doctor of Education, and Doctor of Philosophy degrees
are currently available. Non-degree programs leading to certification in
various teaching fields are also available.

In all graduate programs the objectives are (1) to encourage excellence
and scholarship, (2) to provide depth in the student's special field, and (3) to
stimulate enthusiasm for continued cultural and professional growth on the
part of the student.

The Graduate School staff is assisted in its daily functioning by a) the
Graduate Council, a standing committee of the University Senate concerned
with graduate program curncular and policy matters; b) the Graduate Student
Assembly, an elected graduate student body representative of all campus
academic departments offering graduate programs, and c) the chairpersons
and graduate studies coordinators of departments offering graduate course
work.

In addition to the degree and certification programs referred to above,
lUP's Graduate School also maintains liaison with other graduate institutions
in Pennsylvania. Students should contact The Graduate School for additional
information.

16 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

ADMISSION

Admission to The Graduate School is required of all students who wish to
take graduate courses for graduate credit. Each student applying for
admission, either as an applicant for a graduate degree program or as an
applicant for a non-degree program, must file with The Graduate School an
application for admission and such other supporting documents as the school
may specify. An Admissions Packet is supplied by the Graduate Office upon
request. As a general rule application materials must be on file in the Graduate
Office at least one month prior to the beginning of the semester or term in
which the applicant plans to begin graduate work. Some exceptions to these
deadlines exist; please refer to the Graduate Calendar on pages 5-7 of this
catalog for specific program dates.

Requirements for Admission

1 . An applicant must have a bachelor's degree from a college or university
accredited by the Middle States Association of Colleges and Secondary
Schools or an equivalent regional accrediting agency.

2. The applicant's undergraduate transcript (or transcripts collectively)
must show a minimum cumulative quality point average of 2.6 on a 4.0
maximum scale. Occasionally, additional evidence of academic ability
is required.

3. Graduate Record Examination (GRE) scores must be submitted priorto
admission or during the student's first semester of course work by all
students except MBA and M.S. in Business program applicants; the
latter must submit General Management Admission Test (GMAT)
scores. See page 12 for further detail about these examinations.

4. Most applicants requesting admission to programs leading to an MEd
degree are required to have a Provisional Pennsylvania Teachers
Certificate or its equivalent; all MEd degree applicants should be sure to
inquire at their program's sponsoring department. MEd applicants who
do not already have such certification where required must complete a
planned program leading to certification prior to applying for MEd
degree candidacy at lUP.

Graduate School admission means that a student may program and
register for graduate courses. Admission does not guarantee subsequent
admission to candidacy for a degree, nor does it guarantee successful
completion of requirements for a degree.

Admission Procedures

1 . Each applicant must file with the Dean of The Graduate School a com-
pleted application form. Applications along with forms pertaining to
items 2 and 3 below are included in the Admissions Packet.

The Graduate School — 17

2. The application must be accompanied by one copy of an official tran-
script from each graduate and undergraduate institution attended,
including lUP if the applicant is an lUP alumnus/alumna.

3. Each applicant must submit statements of recommendation from three
individuals who arefamiliarwith his/her backgrounds. At leasttwoof the
individuals must be persons familiar with the applicant's academic
background.

4. All applicants must submit Graduate Record Examination (GRE) scores
except MBA and M.S. in Business degree applicants, who must submit
Graduate Management Admission Test (GMAT) scores. Information
about both is contained in the Admissions Packet.

5. An application fee in the amount of $10, non-refundable, must accom-
pany the application. Please pay by check and make the check payable
to: lUP.

Admission Classifications

Applicants for admission to The Graduate School are notified of their
admission status by The Graduate School Dean prior to the beginning of the
term of planned study. Admission classifications are as follows:

1 . Pre-Candidacy Status. Given to an applicant who plans to work toward
a graduate degree and whose application file with The Graduate School
is both complete and satisfactory. The pre-candidacy student may pro-
gram, under departmental guidance, 6 to 1 2 graduate hours toward the
degree being sought. Pre-Candidacy Status does not guarantee sub-
sequent admission to candidacy.

2. Special Graduate Standing. Granted to applicants who indicate they
do not plan to work toward a graduate degree but who wish to take grad-
uate courses for which they are qualified. Applicants granted this
standing who later wish to work toward a graduate degree must request
reclassification by The Graduate School. Credits earned by a student
having Special Graduate Standing may be applied to an lUP degree
after the reclassified student has been awarded degree candidacy,
provided the credits are deemed appropriate to the degree by the pro-
gram's sponsoring department

3. Admission Denied. Applicants denied admission to The Graduate
School will receive a letter from the Graduate Dean indicating the
reason for the denial.

18 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

Graduate Record and Other Examinations

All graduate school applicants must take the APTITUDE section of the
Graduate Record Examination. The following departments require that the
Examination's ADVANCED section must also be taken for the degree or certi-
fication programs indicated:

Biology (MS and MEd)

Educational Psychology (MEd and School Psychology programs)

Elementary Education (EdD)

English (PhD)

Foreign Languages (German, MEd; Spanish; MA and MEd)

Music (MA, MEd)

Psychology (MA)

Under certain conditions lUP applicants may be required to submit MAT
(Miller Analogies Test) scores. Both Graduate Record and Miller Analogies
examinations are administered by lUP's Testing Center on published dates;
specific information about test availability can be obtained from the Center's
director. Applicants taking such examinations, whether at lUP or elsewhere,
should request that their scores be sent to; Dean, The Graduate School, lUP,
Indiana, Pa. 15705.

See page 12 for information on tests offered at lUP.

Foreign Student Applicants

In addition to following the general procedures for admission to The Grad-
uate School, foreign students must present evidence of fluency in English.
Applicants whose native language is not English are required to take the Test
of English as a Foreign Language (TOEFL)*. The Graduate School will not
process applications from such students until satisfactory TOEFL scores are
filed with the dean of the Graduate School.

Foreign applicants must also present evidence to The Graduate School of
having financial resources sufficient to meet the cost of living in Indiana,
Pennsylvania; the cost of travel to and from the student's native country; and
the cost of graduate education at lUP. Such evidence should be sent directly
to: Dean, The Graduate School, lUP, Indiana, Pennsylvania 1 5705, U.S.A. The
Graduate School gives notification to the University's Foreign Student Adviser
of foreign student applications received; the Foreign Student Adviser mails to
the prospective foreign student information on housing, arrival dates, and
other general information about the University. Applicants who have questions
about legal or other matters such as the issuance of certificates of eligibility
(1-20) and the like should address those questions directly to: lUP Foreign
Student Adviser, lUP, Indiana, Pennsylvania 15705.

Foreign Student Candidacy Test — All foreign students will be required
to take the GRE if they have studied in an American college or university. If a
foreign student has not studied in an American college or university, the test
required for candidacy will be the TOEFL. Business students in MBA or MS
programs must take the GMAT regardless of foreign status.

*Students desiring direct information about this examination should write to:
TOEFL, Educational Testing Service, Princeton, New Jersey 08540, U.S.A.

The Graduate School — 19

PROGRAMMING AND REGISTRATION

Advisement

After a student has been admitted to The Graduate School, he/she should
consult the department chairperson or coordinator of graduate studies in
his/her intended field of study about a program of courses If the student is a
special graduate student, consultation should be with the Dean of The
Graduate School. Advisement before course registration is required of all
students enrolling for graduate classes for the first time. In addition, many
departments feel strongly that their students should be advised well before
registration for each semester or summer term; these departments are
identified in each semester's (or summer session's) schedule of course
offerings. The student should carefully check such schedules about advise-
ment responsibilities, as well as course offerings, before registration.

Pre-registration

Prior to each semester or summer session enrolled graduate students
receive pre-registration materials and accompanying instructions from The
Graduate School. Similar material is sent to prospective new students in
response to their inquiries. The student should return all completed registra-
tion forms to the Graduate Office by the date published in the graduate
schedule.

Final Registration

After the student has returned the registration materials to The Graduate
School, he/she will receive from the Business Office a bill for tuition and fees.
Bills must be paid before the student attends classes. Arrangements for
housing and meals when necessary, parking, identification-card receipt can
be made at the registration location for "walk-in" students. Mail-registered
students should make such arrangements independently with offices involved.

"Walk-in" registration is usually held during the final hours of registration for
students who have not pre-registered. Walk-in students may encounter
lengthy delays in their registraion processing and other inconveniences. It is
unquestionably to the student's advantage to be processed with the majority
pre-registration group.

APPLICANTS FOR SPECIALIST

CERTIFICATION PROGRAMS

lUP offers specialist certification programs in Communications Media,
Counselor Education, Public School Psychology, and Reading. Applicants for

20 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

These programs should follow the same procedures for admission, program-
ming and registration as described in this catalog. Applicants should check
program descriptions in the catalog for special program requirements.

The specialist certificate program in Communications Media is a pre-
master's level program. Applicants must hold a permanent college certificate
for elementary or secondary education to be accepted.

The supervisor of Guidance Services certification program sponsored by
the Counselor Education Department is a post-master's program. Applicants
must have a master's degree and Commonwealth of Pennsylvania certifi-
cation as an elementary or secondary school counselor or its equivalent.

The Public School Psychology certification program is a post-master's-
degree program designed for those individuals who are seeking certification
as public school psychologists in the Commonwealth of Pennsylvania. Appli-
cants for admission must have a master's degree and an instructional or
specialist certificate from an accredited institution.

The Reading program is designed for those individuals who are seeking
certification as 1) Reading Specialist or 2) Reading Supervisor. The student
who wishes to obtain Reading Specialist certification and who does not desire
an MEd degree may do so by formulating a program of studies with the depart-
mental Graduate Reading Program Coordinator contingent upon admission to
The Graduate School. Applicants who are seeking certification as Reading
Supervisors must complete all requirements for the MEd in Reading, be
eligible for a Level III certificate, and present a minimum of 19 graduate
semester hours selected from the Reading Supervisor program of studies.

FINANCIAL AID

Asslstantshlps

lUP offers both half-time (20 hours per week paying a stipend of $2,705 for
two semesters) and quarter-time (10 hours per week paying a stipend of
$1,325.50 for two semesters) teaching and research assistantships to full-
time graduate students. Half-time assistantships provide a full tuition waiver
for one calendar year; quarter-time assistantships carry a one-half tuition
waiver for a calendar year. Duties include supervised teaching, research, on
university service activities under the direction of a graduate faculty member.
The deadline for applying for a September assistantship is March 15 of the
preceding year. Applications and further information are available at The
Graduate School

Scholarships

Margaret Fiegal Harte Scholarships

Two $450 scholarships are awarded yearly to needy new full-time graduate
students. All new Graduate School applicants except for those who receive

The Graduate School — 21

Other lUP scholarships are considered for the Margaret Flegal Harte Scholar-
ships based on academic records and financial need. No application forms for
the scholarships are required; the Pennsylvania State Grant Application sub-
mitted to Harrisburg, Pennsylvania, serves as the need analysis documentfor
need assessment.

Employment Programs

A. Federal College Work-Study Program (CWSP)

The College Work-Study Program provides an opportunity for graduate
students to earn money to help finance educational expenses. Students
may be employed on campus for up to 20 hours per week when classes are
in session and 40 hours per week during vacation periods. Work-study jobs
not only help to defray the cost of education but can add valuable practical
experience accompanying the student's graduate education. Eligibility is
based on financial need as determined by an analysis of the Pennsylvania
State Grant Application submitted to Harrisburg, Pennsylvania. Theform is
available in the Financial Aid Office.

B. State University Employment Program (UE)

The State University Employment Program also provides an opportunity for
students to work as an accompaniment to their studies program. Maximum
UE hours are 20 hours per week when classes are in session and 40 hours
per week during vacation periods. No application is necessary.

C. Special Funded Grant Employment opportunities are also available to
graduate students from time to time. Interested students should check with
the Graduate Office.

Loan Programs

A. National Direct Student Loan (NDSL)

The NDSL Program provides loans up to $2,000 per academic year to
eligible graduate students. Eligibility is based on financial need as deter-
mined by an analysis of the Pennsylvania State Grant Application submit-
ted to Harrisburg, Pennsylvania. The forms are available in the Financial
Aid Office.

The interest rate for NDSL is five percent and the repayment period starts
six months after termination of the student's education. Information con-
cerning cancellation privileges is available in the Financial Aid Office.

B. Guaranteed Student Loan Program (GSL)

The Guaranteed Student Loan (GSL) can be obtained from private lending
institutions such as banks and credit unions and is administered in con-
junction with State and Federal governments. Loans up to the cost of edu-
cation (not to exceed $5,000 per year) are available for new borrowers at
nine percent simple interest with repayment not required to begin until six

22 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

months after the termination of the student's education. Borrowers with
outstanding Guaranteed Student Loans will continue to repay additional
loans at seven percent interest after a nine month grace period. There are
no cancellation privileges, but information about deferment provisions is
available at the Financial Aid Office. Applications for the GSL are available
at any participating institution.

Veterans

lUP is approved to offer training under the various G I. Bills (Public Law 550)
and Public Law 894 (disabled veterans). Students who are entitled to training
under one of these bills should contact the Veterans' Counselor immediately
after being accepted for admission to lUP in order to secure additional instruc-
tions. This procedure is necessary so veterans may be included on the
monthly payrolls. The Office of the Veterans' Counselor is in Pratt Hall.

INSURANCE

The University provides an opportunity for full-time graduate students to
purchase accident and illness insurance. Coverage under the current
arrangement is from a given September 1 or the date of planned enrollment,
whichever is later, until the following September 1. Included are accident
medical expenses up to a maximum of $1 ,000: sickness medical expenses up
to a maximum of $1,000: semi-private hospital room and board: certain
surgical operations, certain ambulance expenses, nurse expense up to
specified limits per day: and other benefits. For an additional premium,
maternity expense coverage and benefits for spouse and children are
provided.

Foreign students enrolled at lUP must purchase the foregoing health
insurance unless they can demonstrate that they already have comparable
coverage.

For further detail and/or policy purchases, please contact the Executive
Director of Financial Affairs. Administrative Annex, lUP, Indiana, Pa. 15705.

GENERAL GRADUATE SCHOOL PROCEDURES
AND REGULATIONS

The graduate student is expected to assume full responsibility for knowing
graduate program procedures and regulations. General Graduate School
requirements are set forth in this catalog: a description of special departmental
degree requirements is available at each department sponsoring the specific
degree or certification program. Requests for exceptions to policy are given
consideration when unique circumstances exist: questions concerning the
proper routing of such requests should be addressed to the Graduate School
dean. In addition to knowing policy and procedure, all admitted graduate
students should also be familiar with the document "Graduate Student Rights
and Responsibilities" (see next page), a copy of which can be obtained at the
Graduate Office.

The Graduate School — 23

Program Changes

To insure their quality and relevance, graduate programs at lUP are subject
to constant review and change by duly appointed and responsible University
groups. Because of this, the University recognizes that provision must be
made to prevent hardship to students already enrolled in programs if changes
later occur in specific or general program requirements. Students affected by
changes in programs, policies and regulations are therefore given the option
of following those requirements in effect when the student was first admitted to
the program or those in effect at the time of expected graduation. The student
cannot, of course, combine chosen elements of the two. Should a question of
rule interpretation arise with respect to changes, the student, the student's
adviser, or both should petition The Graduate School Dean for a decision
about which requirements apply.

Graduate Assistantships

Graduate assistantships are awarded at lUP to a limited number of full-time
graduate students usually who have been admitted to graduate degree
programs. There is no guarantee of renewal, although departmental recom-
mendations for renewal are considered when such occur. Assistanships carry
a stipend and a tuition waiver for graduate courses taken, but the assistant-
ship IS looked upon as an encouragement and/or reward for academic excel-
lence rather than a means to relieve financial need.

Assistantships are of two types; teaching and research. In both cases the
duties performed (20 service hours per week in the typical appointment) are
related to academic and/or professional experiences either in or closely
related to the student's degree discipline and provide an experiential exten-
sion of his/her curriculum development. Duties are assigned through the
Dean by the chairperson or graduate studies coordinator of the department of
assignment.

Graduate Student Rights and Responsibilities

upon admission to The Graduate School, the student assumes responsi-
bility for knowing program requirements and following established procedures
in relation to academic advisement, course selection and registering, the pay-
ment of fees, the processing of withdrawals from class (if any), the meeting of
residency requirements, applying for degree candidacy, and applying for and
meeting all specific requirements for graduation. Conversely, he/she has the
right to expect that all program requirements will be made clear, that all course
requirements — including grading criteria and procedures — will be made
known early in the course, and that course grades will represent the
instructor's professional and objective evaluation of performance. He/she
has the right to instruction which encourages the free and open discussion of
ideas, and which respects reasonable student needs and aspirations. It is the
student's responsibility to contribute to that classroom decorum and atmos-
phere which encourages maximum learning. Finally, the student understands
that a departmental evaluation of academic progress and professional
potential will be filed and that such an evaluation is available upon request.

24 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

The Graduate Student Assembly

Each lUP department offering a graduate program is required to establish a
graduate studies committee and is urged, but not required, to form an associa-
tion for its graduate students. On a University-wide basis, the Graduate
Student Assembly (GSA) is the graduate students' organization. GSA is com-
posed of two elected representatives (and frequently an alternate) elected by
the full-time and part-time graduate students of the department. GSA func-
tions to serve all graduate students by having voting representation on the
Graduate Council and in the University Senate; by having the right to review
Council policies; by having the means to make recommendations about grad-
uate student affairs to the Council and /or to the Graduate Dean; by working to
improve the social, intellectual, and cultural life of graduate students; and by
participating in the judicial procedure established for graduate students.

Academic Good Standing

lUP graduate students must maintain a minimum of 3.0 (B) cumulative
graduate quality point average to be in good standing academically. Students
falling below good standing are placed on probation for their succeeding
active semester or summer; probationary continuance beyond one semester
or summer is permitted only upon receipt of special authorization to this effect
from the Graduate Dean. A student must be in good standing to be admitted to
degree candidacy and to graduate.

The Graduate School — 25

ACADEMIC CREDITS AND STUDENT STATUS

Although many graduate students depend upon part-time or full-time
employment to meet expenses, the time demands for such employment must
not be permitted to curtail academic achievement. lUP Graduate School
facilities are offered only to students in a position to benefit from their graduate
experience.

Students may regularly schedule a full-time academic load in most
graduate programs. Full-time graduate student status is defined as 9 to 15
graduate semester hours per semester, while part-time status is defined eight
or less semester hours per semester. Full-time graduate students should not
hold full-time outside employment. Graduate assistants may not register for
more than 12 total hours in any semester. No studentmay apply morethan six
hours in "tour" courses toward a graduate degree. Several departments also
set maxima on the number of workshop and similar special offering hours
applicable to their degree; students should obtain this information from the
degree-sponsoring department.

RESIDENCY

Master's degree candidates may satisfy the residency requirement by
taking all credits applicable to the lUP degree (except possibly six transfer
credits — see "Credit Transfers", page 28 at lUP. Doctoral candidates have
the following options: completion of a minimum of nine graduate credits at lUP
in each of at least two consecutive semesters; completion of a minimum of
nine graduate credits at lUP for at least one semester immediately preceding
or following a summer of nine-hour study; completion at lUP of at least nine
graduate credits in each of two consecutive summers plus six graduate
credits during the intervening academic year; or completion of 12 graduate
credits at lUP in each of two consecutive summers (this latter is recom-
mended only in very special instances).

DEGREE CANDIDACY

Part-time graduate students must apply for degree candidacy through their
Dean's Office immediately following completion of six graduate credit hours
taken at lUP. Full-time students must do the same at the mid-term of the
semester or summertermduring which they are taking their 12th I UP graduate
hour. The appropriate form is available at the Dean's Office. Notification of
candidacy award or denial, as recommended by the program's sponsoring
department, will be received from the Dean. Receipt of degree candidacy is a
most important requirement in the student's progress toward an lUP graduate
degree.

26 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

Admission to Candidacy

To qualify for admission to candidacy, the student must complete the
following steps:

1 . Submit an official application for admission to candidacy to the School
Dean (form may be obtained at the student's school Dean's Office).

2. Complete with satisfactory grades (see description of Academic Good
Standing) at least six semester hours (part-time students) or be in the
process of completing 1 2 semester hours (full-time students — see first
paragraph under Degree Candidacy) of graduate work taken at lUP.

3. Have on file in the Graduate Office scores from the Graduate Record
Examination, or, for fVIBA and MS in Business students, The Graduate
Management Admission Test.

4. Have satisfied the research course requirement (GR 615 Elements of
Research, or equivalent).

5. Have on file in the Dean's Office a tentative program of studies for com-
pletion of the desired degree program.

Degree candidacy is awarded by the dean's office only upon
recommendation of the student's academic department. The student will be
notified in writing of candidacy decisions.

Individual departments may have requirements exceeding the minimum
prescribed by the Graduate School. Students should inquire for such written
requirements at the degree-sponsoring department.

GRADING SYSTEM

The following grades are used in reporting the standing of students at the
end of each semester or summer term:

A — Excellent I — Incomplete

B — Good R — Research in Progress

C — Fair W — Withdrawal

F — Failure

No "D" grade is recognized in lUP graduate work.

Quality points are assigned as follws: A — 4: B — 3;C — 2. No quality points
are carried by the notations of F, I, R, and W.

The notation "I" is used to record work which, as far as it has progressed, is
of passing grade but is incomplete because of accident, illness, pregnancy, or
extreme personal disturbance An "I" must be made up by the student within
180 calendar days following its issuance. If it is not, it is automatically con-
verted to an "F" The "R" notation pertains only to thesis and dissertation

The Graduate School — 27

research credits when such research is in progress as a semester or summer
terms ends, or in certain practicum-type courses approved for this notation by
the Graduate Dean. All "R's" are replaced by the research grade eventually
assigned when the research is completed. The "W" notation applies to certain
withdrawals from courses: please see page 30 for discussions of withdrawals
from the University and discrete course withdrawals. Note that an "F" is
entered in the student's permanent academic record if a withdrawal of either
type has not been processed in accordance with established procedures.

Course Auditing

Auditing is not permitted in a graduate course unless the student has been
admitted to The Graduate School, has received permission to audit from the
course's instructor, and has been approved for course enrollment by the dean
of The Graduate School. Auditors must pay normal tuition and related fees. An
auditor will, with permission from the instructor, participate in class discussion,
do practicum work, take examinations, and share generally in the privileges of
a class member. If the student completes all course requirements — but only if
so — an "Audit" notation is posted to the student's academic record No
student who is required to carry a certain number of credits may count among
those credits the credit of an audited course.

Class Cancellation

It is the policy of The Graduate School not to cancel regularly scheduled
classes because of weather conditions, nor does it make announcements via
radio, newspaper, or through its switchboard that classes are being sus-
pended because of such conditions. In cases of emergencies disrupting
transportation facilities or otherwise creating hazardous travel conditions, stu-
dents should make those decisions as to attendance which appear appro-
priate to them in their particular circumstances.

Graduate Course Numbering

All dual-level courses, open to enrollment by both graduate and qualified
undergraduate students, carry a 500-599 course number; all courses open
only to graduate students carry 600-series and above numbers.

The number of credits attained in dual-level courses which shall be
applicable to a degree program for any student shall be a maximum of fifty
percent of the credits required for that degree.

28 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

COURSE ABBREVIATION KEY

The following departmental abbreviations are used to identify courses
referred to in the Catalog:

Adult Education

Foundations of Education

Accounting

Geography & Regional Planning

Administrative Services

Geoscience

Art History

Graduate

Applied Music

Health & Physical Ed

Anthropology

History

Art

Home Economics Ed

Art Education

Labor Relations

Business Education

Management

Biology

Marketing

Chemistry

Mathematics

Communications fyiedia

Music

Computer Science

Nursing

Consumer Services

Philosophy

Counselor Education

Physics

Criminology

Political Science

Distributive Education

Psychology

Education Administration

Safety Sciences

Economics

Science

Early Childhood Education

Social Science

Education

Sociology

Educational Psychology

Special Education

Elementary Education

Ed of Except Children

Elementary Mathematics

Speech & Hearing

Elementary Science

Student Personnel

English

Theater

Fine Arts

Finance/MIS

Food and Nutrition

Foreign Language

Critical Language

French

German

Greek

Latin

Russian

Spanish

Credit Transfers

Credit for graduate courses taken at another institution may under certain
circumstances be incorporated as part of the graduate student's program at
lUP. These courses must have been completed on the main campus of an
accredited institution, or acceptable in its degree programs by that main
campus. The grade earned must be a "B" or its equivalent or better. The time
limitation rule cited on page 31 of this catalog relative to credit applicability to
an lUP graduate degree generally pertains without modification to transfer
credit applicability.

The Graduate School — 29

A maximum of six credits of transfer work is accepted. Transfer credits are
not necessarily posted to the student's lUP graduate record until the student
has been admitted to degree candidacy. Acceptance of transfer credit must
be approved by the candidate's department and the Dean. Students wishing to
transfer back to lUP credits taken at another institution while enrolled in an I UP
graduate program must receive advance written authorization for credit
acceptance from the School Dean.

Graduate Course Repeat Policy

Under University policy no graduate credit is recognized for courses com-
pleted with grades of "F". Graduate grading policy does not permit an award of
"D." A student receiving a "C" or "F" grade may request through his/her
adviser or coordinator of graduate studies approval to repeat the course to a
maximum of two repeats. Each such repeat must receive final approval from
the dean of the student's School.

Semester hours for repeated courses shall be counted only once for all
attempts made and, should there be a difference in hours because of a course
hours change, the hours and quality points earned when last taken shall be
those used for quality point average computation.

Credits earned in only one repeated course may be applied to an lUP
graduate degree.

Independent Study Maximum

Only six credits of Independent Study work may apply toward a student's
master's degree unless written authorization for hours in excess of six is
obtained from the student's adviser or coordinator of graduate studies and the
dean, in that order.

Graduate Internship Policy

to qualify for a graduate internship appointment the graduate student must
have a minimum of 1 2 lUP graduate credits earned and a minimum 3.0 GPA:
must have been in full-time enrollment (nine graduate credits or more) during
the semester or summer sessions (the latter taken as a whole) immediately
preceding the academic period for which internship is requested;* and must
meet departmental internship criteria. No more than six internship credits may
apply to a graduate degree unless written approval of the student's depart-
mental chairperson or graduate studies coordinator and the dean (in that
order) is obtained. Continuation in an internship experience by a given
graduate student is contingent upon the student's maintenance of satisfactory
performance in all aspects of his/her degree program. Programmatic excep-
tions to the foregoing policy can be made only with the approval of the Grad-
uate Council.

*For graduate students active during summers only, or during fall-spring
semesters only, "immediately preceding the academic period" etc. refers to
the student's last preceding active semester or summer session.

30 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

Final Credits Policy

All master's degree candidates must complete their program's final six
credits of graduate work in courses offered by lUP. Under certain circum-
stances appropriate substitutions may be authorized. Students wishing such
authorization must petition the Dean after obtaining the approval of their
adviser and department chairperson or graduate studies coordinator.

Discrete Course Withdrawal

During the fall and spring semesters, graduate students may request
authorization to withdraw from a graduate course without prejudice and with
the grade of "W" by petitioning the School Dean in writing within the first two-
thirds of the semester as determined by the published University calendar.
The request must carry the endorsement of both the course instructor and the
student's department chairperson or graduate studies coordinator, in that
order. Graduate students wishing to withdraw from an undergraduate course
within the prescribed period must do so by processing the standard under-
graduate Discrete Course Withdrawal form.

For summer term classes and labs, the following is substituted for the
above in the preceding paragraph; for Pre and Post Sessions, within the first six
class days; for Main Session, within the first twelve class days.

Following the close of the established six weeks (or 6th day or 1 2th day)
withdrawal period, a graduate student may withdraw from a course, either
graduate or undergraduate, without penalty only with the written approval of
his/her department chairperson or graduate studies coordinator and the
Dean (in that order) for such reasons as accident, severe illness, or extreme
personal disturbance. A student dropping a course under any other
circumstance will automaticallv receive an "F" at the end of the semester or
summer term.

The discrete course withdrawal refund policy is described on page 10.

Withdrawals from the University

Graduate students withdrawing from the University for any reason must
process such withdrawals in writing through the office of the Dean. The official
withdrawal date to be recognized will be established by the Dean.

Please refer to page 8 of this catalog for detailed description of the Uni-
versity's Refund Policy and related matters.

Official notification of course withdrawal will be sent by the Dean to the
student's course instructor(s) and chairperson/graduate studies coordinator.

No person shall be considered withdrawn from the University unless the
withdrawal process described herein has been employed.

Graduate Course Scheduling by
Certain Undergraduates

lUP undergraduate students with an academic grade point average of at
least 2.6 who are within 32 semester hours of graduation are permitted after

The Graduate School — 31

appropriate approvals, to take up to six semester hours of graduate work
whether or not they have applied for acceptance into an lUP graduate pro-
gram. Graduate hours so earned have no necessary bearing upon the meeting
of undergraduate degree requirements, and no assurance is given or implied
as to the hours' later applicability to a graduate degree should the students be
admitted to an lUP graduate program.

Time Limitations

Program credits earned at lUP or accepted by transfer are applicable to
lUP master's degrees over a period not to exceed five years from the date of
their earning unless the period is extended through student petition approved
by the program's chairperson or graduate studies coordinator and the
graduate dean. Doctoral candidates must complete degree requirements no
later than seven years after beginning lUP doctoral program course work
unless an extension similarly is authorized.

Graduation

Early in the student's final semester or summer session, he/she must file
an application for graduation with the Dean's office on a form furnished by that
office. Graduation applications must be filed by the deadlines shown on the
Graduate Calendar.

When all requirements for the degree have been completed and this fact is
attested to by the student's department, the student's academic record will be
so posted and the degree will be awarded at the following established
diploma-award date. An official diploma is presented to the student at that
time.

Graduate credits used to satisfy the minimum requirements in one grad-
uate program cannot be used again to satisfy the minimum requirements of a
separate graduate program.

DOCTORAL DEGREE PROGRAiViS

The Graduate School at lUP offers work leading to the degree Doctor of
Philosophy in the following fields:

English and American Literature
English Education

It offers work leading to the degree Doctor of Education in the following
fields:

Counselor Education
Elementary Education

Doctoral degrees are conferred for distinguished achievement in a partic-
ular field of scholarship and for demonstrated ability to perform independent
research in an area of that field. No specific number of course credits entitles a
student to the degree.

32 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

Departments offering the doctoral degree usually have their own special
requirements beyond the Graduate School degree requirements. The latter
are equally binding. Departments may modify or in specific cases waive The
Graduate School requirements only with Graduate Council approval.

Requirements for the Doctoral Degree

students seeking a doctoral degree must satisfy the minimum Graduate
School requirements described in the following. Mention has been made that
sponsoring departments may have additional requirements; students must be
equally familiar with departmental requirements.

Under certain circumstances Graduate School requirements for the Doc-
toral degree may be satisfied by means of substitution. Requests for the
acceptance of substitutions should be made in the form of a petition to the
Graduate Dean, the petition first having the approval of the student's adviser
and department chairperson or graduate studies coordinator.

Credit Requirement — A minimum of 60 graduate semester credits,
exclusive of dissertation credits, must be earned beyond the bachelor's
degree for either the PhD or the DEd.

Transfer Credit — Transfer credit is limited to the credit equivalent of a
recognized master's degree, except in those special cases recommended by
the student's department chairperson or graduate studies coordinator and
approved by the Graduate Dean and up to 12 graduate credits in the use of
program specific interinstitutional agreements approved by the Graduate
Dean.

Admission to Candidacy — Each student admitted to a doctoral program
must apply for doctoral degree candidacy after completing at lUP no less than
nine nor more than 15 graduate credits beyond the master's degree. The
student must have' a minimum quality point average of 3.0. The student's
minimum GPA may be set higherthan the foregoing Graduate School require-
ment by the program's sponsoring department, but in no case may it be lower.

Candidacy Examination — The candidacy examination, which may be
written, oral, or both, as determined by the program's sponsoring department,
and which may serve also as the final examination for the master's degree if a
department so prescribes, is administered by the department in the student's
field of specialization. The examination may not be taken until the student has
completed at least one year of study beyond the bachelor's degree. Examina-
tion scores must satisfy the student's dissertation committee.

The Dissertation Committee — The candidate's dissertation committee
supervises the student's degree program from the point at which he/she is
admitted to doctoral degree candidacy through defense of the dissertation.
The committee approves the student's plan of study; arranges for the
candidacy examination; arranges for the comprehensive examination; and
oversees the candidate's general supervision related to research, the dis-
sertation, and the general meeting of degree requirements.

The Graduate School — 33

The Comprehensive Examination — This examination is given, usually
upon the candidate's completion of course work, to determine the student's
stage of progress in the degree field and fields related to it, and the student's
likelihood of success in his/her research — dissertation phase. The examina-
tion may be written, oral, or both. It is not necessarily limited to areas in which
the candidate has taken course work

Foreign Language/Research Tool Options — Foreign language and/or
research tool requirements for PhD candidates vary by program; sponsoring
departments should be consulted for specific program requirements. Options
include the following: demonstration of a competent reading knowledge of two
foreign languages appropriate to the general field of study, or of a reading
knowledge of one foreign language together with a comprehensive knowledge
of its literature; or presentation of six graduate credits in theoretical or applied
linguistics; or of six graduate credits in a computer language.

Requirements in DEd programs also vary. The DEd candidate must

a) demonstrate reading competency in two foreign languages as above, or

b) pass a sequence of courses in research and statistics as prescribed by
his/her major department, and/or demonstrate, through examination or other
evidence satisfactory to the major department, competence in a computer
language. Again, the student should consult his/her department directly.

Research Proposal — After the candidate has passed the comprehensive
examination and has done extensive preliminary proposal research, he/she
must present and defend a research proposal before the dissertation commit-
tee. A copy of the proposal must be placed in the hands of all committee
members at least two weeks in advance of the scheduled meeting. The
proposal must be found satisfactory by all members of the committee before
the candidate may proceed with the dissertation.

The Dissertation — A dissertation is required of all doctoral candidates.
The paper must demonstrate the candidate's mastery of his/her research and
reflect the results of an original investigation in the principal field of study. The
goal should be to make a definite original contribution to knowledge in the field.
The notation "R" is made in the candidate's academic record while such
research is in progress; please see page 26 for description of this notation's
use.

Dissertation Review Meeting — Upon acceptance of the dissertation by
the candidate's adviser, the candidate must present a finished copy to the
dean of the School, from whom it circulates to all members of the dissertation
committee. At a time convenient to all members, the candidate shall then
request a formal meeting of the dissertation committee to secure dissertation
approval. The dissertation must be approved in writing by each member of the
committee.

Publication of the Dissertation — Following dissertation approval by the
committee, three copies of the dissertation and tv^/o copies of an abstract must
be submitted to the School Dean. The program's sponsoring department may
also require a copy for its archives.

The dissertation must be microfilmed according to the plan provided by
University Microfilm, Ann Arbor, Michigan.

34 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

Re-examination — A student who fails the candidacy examination, or any
part of the comprehensive examination, or any of the examinations in foreign
languages and/or computer language, may request re-examination not
earlier than one semester following the time of failure, nor later than one year
after that date. No student is permitted a third examination without a recom-
mendation to that effect from the degree program's sponsoring department
and the approval of the Graduate Council.

Application for Graduation — Formal application for graduation must be
filed with the dean of the student's School no laterthantwo months priortothe
University's published degree-granting date at which the candidate expects to
receive the doctoral degree.

MASTER S DEGREE PROGRAMS

The Graduate School offers Master of Arts and Master of Science degrees

in most academic fields plus the professional degrees Master of Business
Administration and Master of Education. See below for specific degree fields.
All students working toward a master's degree must satisfy The Graduate
School policies set forth in this catalog. Most departments have additional
special program requirements; students must be equally familiar with depart-
mental requirements.

Under certain circumstances a specific Graduate School requirement for
the master's degree may be satisfied by means of substitution. In no case are
requirements waived. Requests for substitutions must be made by petition to
the School Dean after approval by the student's adviser and department chair-
person or graduate studies coordinator.

Master of Arts degrees are offered in the following:

Adult/Community Education History

Art Labor Relations

Art Therapy Music

Chemistry Physics

Counseling Services Political Science

Criminology Psychology

English Sociology

Geography Spanish Language & Literature

Geology Student Personnel Services

Master of Science degrees are offered in:

Biology Health & Physical Education

Business (Sport Sciences)

Chemistry Mathematics

Exceptionality (Adult) Nutrition

Geography Physics

Speech-Language Pathology

A Master of Business Administration degree (MBA) is offered.

The Graduate School — 35

Master of Education degrees are offered in the following:

Art

Biology
Business
Cfiemistry

Communications f\/ledia
Education of Exceptional Children
Educational Psychology
Elementary Education
Elementary fvlathematics
Elementary Science
Elementary or Secondary
School Counseling

English

Geography

German

Home Economics

fyiathematics

Music

Physics

Reading

Science

Social Science

Spanish

Speech-Language Pathology

The Thesis/No Thesis Option, Master's Programs

Several lUP master's degree programs offerthe graduate student a thesis/
no-thesis option.

When the no-thesis option is chosen, additional approved course work —
usually six or more credit hours — is required

The typical committee thesis arrangement (3-6 s.h.) has the student
working with a committee of four faculty members including the student's
adviser and two faculty members, one of whom may or may not be a member
of the program's department. The committee may include an off-campus per-
son with special expertise as part of the four if requested by the department
and approved by the Graduate Dean.

DEPARTMENT

DEGREE THESIS

CREDITS

; COMMENTS

Adult/Community

Ed.

fVlA

Optional

Art

Required

MEd

Required

Art Therapy

Required

Biology

Required

32 -

Thesis

MEd

Optional

30 -
33 -

Thesis
No Thesis

Business

MBA

No Thesis

MEd

Optional

Chemistry

Optional

30 -

Thesis

Required

30 -

Thesis

MEd

Optional

30 -

Thesis

Communications Media

MEd

Optional

30 -

Thesis

36 -

No Thesis

36 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

DEPARTMENT

DEGREE THESIS

CREDITS COMMENTS

Counselor Education

MEd

Optional

Criminology

Optional

30
36

Educational Psych.

MEd

Optional

33
36

Education of Exceptional

Children

MEd

Optional

33
36

Elementary Education

MEd

Optional

30
36

Elementary Math.

MEd

Optional

30
30

Elementary Science

MEd

Optional

30
33

English

Optional

30
30

MEd

Optional

30
30

Exceptionality

Optional

33
36

Food and Nutrition

Optional

30
33

Geography

MEd

Optional

30
36

Optional

30
36

Optional

30
36

Geology

Required

German

MEd

Optional

Health & Physical Ed.

Optional

30
36

History

Optional

30
36

Home Economics

MEd

Optional

30
33

Labor Relations

Optional

Mathematics

MEd

Optional

30
30

Optional

30
30

Thesis
No Thesis
Thesis
No Thesis
Thesis
No Thesis

Thesis
No Thesis
Thesis
No Thesis
Thesis
No Thesis
Thesis
No Thesis
Thesis
No Thesis
Thesis
No Thesis

Thesis
No Thesis
Thesis
No Thesis
Thesis
No Thesis
Thesis
No Thesis
Thesis
No Thesis

Thesis
No Thesis
Thesis
No Thesis
Thes-is
No Thesis

Thesis (3-6 credits)

Thesis

No Thesis

Thesis

No Thesis

Music

In Music Performance

Recital

In Theory or Musical

Composition

Optional

In Music History

Required

In Music Education

Optional

MEd

Optional

— Musical Composition

— Course Work or Thesis

The Graduate School — 37

MINIMUM

DEPARTMENT

DEGREE THESIS

CREDITS COMMENTS

Physics

Required

MEd

Optional

30 -
33 -

Thesis
No Thesis

Optional

30 -
33 -

Thesis
No Thesis

Political Science

International Studies

Optional

Internship required if

Political Studies

Optional

30 -

Thesis Option not
chosen

Public Affairs

No Thesis

39 -

Internship required

Professional Growth

MEd

Required

30 -

4 credit thesis required

Required

30 -

4 credit thesis required

Required

30 -

4 credit thesis required

Psychology

Clinical

Required

Comnnunity

Required

General Experimental

Required

Reading

MEd

Optional

32 -
36 -

Thesis
No Thesis

Social Science

MEd

Optional

30 -
36 -

Thesis
No Thesis

Sociology

Optional

30 -
36 -

Thesis
No Thesis

Spanish

MEd

Optional

30 -
33 -

Thesis
No Thesis

Optional

30 -
33 -

Thesis
No Thesis

Speech-Language

Pathology

MEd

Optional

36 -
36 -

Thesis
No Thesis

Optional

36 -
36 -

Thesis
No Thesis

Student Personnel Ser.

Optional

30 -
30 -

Thesis
No Thesis

38 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

MASTER OF EDUCATION CURRICULUM
REQUIREMENTS

All Master of Education degrees at lUP are patterned as indicated below.
The goal is to assure the student strength in humanistic and behavioral areas
as well as professional development in selected subject specialty areas.
Specific course descriptions are presented by department in the catalog
section which follows:

I. Professional Development Area (nine s.h.)

A. Humanistic Studies (three s.h.)
One of the following courses:

FE 61 1 Historical Foundations of Education

FE 612 Philosophical Foundations of Education

FE 613 Social Foundations of Education

FE 514 Comparative Foundations of Education

B. Behavioral Studies (three s.h.)
One of the following courses:

Advanced Educational Psychology

Psychology of Adolescent Education

Behavioral Problems

Learning

Pupil Adjustment

Group Procedures (Elementary)

Group Procedures

Psychology of the Exceptional Child

C. Research (three s.h.)

GR 615 Elements of Research

II. Specialization Core (six s.h.)

FE 515 Curriculum Development

CM 600 Seminar in Learning Resources

Department Methods or Curriculum Course(s)

III. Subject Area and/or Electives (11-15 s.h. maximum)

SCHOOL CERTIFICATION

students admitted to The Graduate School who wish to work toward
certification in a specific field(s) should check the descriptions of certification
programs found in this catalog for requirements related to their program(s) of
interest. If a given certification program requires completion of a master's
degree, the master's degree procedures and regulations set forth in this
catalog apply. The Graduate School does not, however, certify students;
certification is processed by the Dean of the School of Education.

604

573

576

578

580

629

639

631

The Graduate School — 39

Principal Certification

lUP currently offers a competency based school administrative certifica-
tion program in elementary and secondary education. Applicants should
contact the director of the principal's certification program (Dean's Office,
School of Education, Stouffer Hall) for more information

Graduate Study Beyond the Master's Degree

It is not unusual to find graduate students enrolling in more courses than
they need to meet the requirements of a master's degree. Such action can be
beneficial beyond the personal satisfactions which accrue, because the
added studies may be well received by employers whether in business,
government, or the school system in such matters as certification. However,
students should understand that most graduate schools have residency
requirements at the doctoral as well as master's level and frequently will
accept no more than 30 graduate semester hours earned elsewhere as appli-
cable to a doctorate.

ofrw'-^^'

'X.

General Service Courses — 41

GENERAL SERVICE COURSES

The following Graduate School courses are taught by selected depart-
mental faculty and are open to all qualified graduate students independent of
degree or certification program. The student should check program applica-
bility with his/her adviser, department chairperson, or graduate studies
coordinator.

RESEARCH

GR615 ELEMENTS OF RESEARCH 3 s.h.

Selection of a research problem, data collection, types of research, research reports,
and use of the library and computer in connection with research problems are studied.
Elements of statistics are introduced. This course provides background for preparation
of the thesis and enables the student to become an intelligent consumer of products of
academic research. Required of all students working toward the MEd degree.

*XX 850 THESIS 1-6 s.h.

For students writing the thesis. GR 850 should be scheduled for the semester in
which the student plans to complete his/her work.

*XX 851 RECITAL 2-4 s.h.

Required for students enrolled in the program Master of Arts in Music-Performance.
Graduate students in music education have the option to prepare and perform a formal
recital in their major performing area under the guidance of their private teacher.
Approval is granted from the area faculty of the student's performance major. MU 851
should be scheduled for the semester in which the student plans to give the recital.

*XX 950 DISSERTATION 1-12 s.h. — Hours to be arranged

Students preparing a doctoral dissertation for credit must register for this course.
The number of credits assigned and the extent of time for which research activity is
scheduled depend upon the nature and scope of the individual student's research
problem and his/her general doctoral program.

*Each Academic department utilizes its own two-letter prefix.

NOTE: Credits for both thesis and dissertation if not completed during the semester
scheduled are recorded as RESEARCH IN PROGRESS They remain so until the paper
is approved. THEY DO NOT AUTOMATICALLY REVERT TO THE GRADE OF "F" in a
specific length of time Also, thesis and dissertation can be programmed above the
regular load.

42 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

STATISTICS

GR 516 STATISTICAL METHODS I 3 s.h.

Measurement and statistical techniques as used in administration, and educational
research. Basic descriptive statistics, including measures of central tendency,
variability and correlation are developed. Reliability and validity of test scores with
emphasis on use of statistical techniques studied and their interpretation.

GR517 STATISTICAL METHODS II 3 s.h.

Using computer programs, a wide array of statistical procedures for research
workers are explored. Basic concepts of statistical inference and prediction are
reviewed, including regression analysis and prediction, hypothesis testing, analysis of
variance and covariance, and partial and multiple correlation. Emphasis on use of
computer and interpretation of computer print-outs along with understanding tech-
niques employed. No computer knowledge is necessary. Prerequisite: GR 516 or
equivalent.

OTHER COURSES

GR681 SPECIAL TOPICS 1-3 s.h.

Group study of course material not offered in other graduate courses.

GR 699 INDEPENDENT STUDY 1-3 s.h.

Individualized in-depth study of an approved topic directed by a participating faculty
member and approved administratively.

NOTE: Neither GR 681 or GR 699 may be scheduled without prior written approval of the
Graduate Dean.

SS 599 CONTEMPORARY EUROPE 3 s.h.

A study /tour program in Europe, commonly of three weeks duration each summer.
Itinerary differs, but normally includes London, Paris, and Rome, Florence, Austria, and
Switzerland, among others. Program atmosphere is informal, and always fun and tiring
(lots of walking). Informal lectures on site, guided tours. Academic work includes
reading before departure and keeping a daily log.

ED 595 INTERNATIONAL STUDYTOUR IN EDUCATION 3 s.h.

Provides an analysis of educational programs and methodology in selected coun-
tries. Introduces students to series of diverse educational experiences. Special atten-
tion to teaching techniques, innovative curricula and school organizational patterns.
Teaching takes place on site in selected countries.

General Service Courses — 43

SUPERVISED LABORATORY EXPERIENCE
(TEACHING)

The following course, designed for cooperating teachers and others
working with student teachers, is open to persons having a teaching certificate
and teaching experience.

ED 540 SUPERVISION OF STUDENT TEACHING

Designed for cooperating teachers and others working with student teachers, this
course provides opportunity for the development of pertinent materials and for continu-
ous evaluation of various aspects of the student teaching program. Stress is also given
to evaluate procedures used in working with prospective teachers. Basic principles
underlying an effective student teaching program are examined from a theoretical and
applied viewpoint Prerequisite: Teaching certificate and teaching experience.

I. Li£ou^i.ta» imms ^'^<-

'^^-

':-^'''

Programs and Courses — 45
Adult and Community Education

GRADUATE PROGRAMS
AND COURSES

ADULT AND COMMUNITY EDUCATION

The Master of Arts in Adult and Comnnunity Eduation is the only program of
its kind in Pennsylvania and adjacent states. It provides an intensive and
flexible study of the growing field of adult and connmunity education. The pro-
gram's aim is to prepare qualified professionals for leadership roles in their
fields by providing a proportionate balance of academic training, practical field
experience, and individual research. It provides a solid base of concepts and
experience which will enable students to proceed toward a doctorate at
another institution.

A minimum of 30 credit hours is required for completion of the degree.
These include 1 8 credits which are individualized and accommodate students
from a wide variety of backgrounds by allowing them to pursue an area of con-
centration or special interest.

An individually designed internship, a field project, is required of all stu-
dents. Electives are interdisciplinary. The master's thesis is encouraged but it
is optional; AC 699 Advanced Seminar is taken in its place.

Core courses include those listed below as well as GR 61 5. For a descrip-
tion of GR courses, see entry under "General Service Courses", page 41 .

COURSE DESCRIPTIONS

AC 620 INTRODUCTION TO ADULT AND COMMUNITY EDUCATION 3 s.h.
A survey course which examines adult and community education as to history,
philosophy, current programs, literature, and materials available.

AC 621 THE ADULT LEARNER 3 s.h.

A focus on the adult as a learner — physiological, psychological, sociological and
intellectual characteristics and how they affect adult learning and teaching.

AC 623 ORGANIZATION AND ADMINISTRATION IN ADULT AND

COMMUNITY EDUCATION 3 s.h.

A study of basic administration skills; of community as to definition, organization,
structure, and power bases; of school and agency organization and administration.
Prerequisite: AC 620.

46 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

AC 635 SEMINAR IN ADULT AND COMMUNITY EDUCATION 3 s h.

An intensive study of special problems in adult and community education; research
and writing skills are reviewed; a research paper is required. Prerequisites: 9 credits in
A/C Education.

AC 640 INTERNSHIP 6 s.h.

An individually designed field project where students work with the supervisor of a
practitioner in the field and a university supervisor. Prerequisite: adviser approval.

AC 699 INDEPENDENT STUDY

An opportunity for students who wish to do independent research in a special area of
adult and community education. Prerequisite: approval.

ANTHROPOLOGY

Anthropology is the study of hunnan biological and cultural evolution. The
discipline is organized into four sub-fields: sociocultural anthropology,
physical anthropology, linguistics and archaeology. The breadth of anthro-
pology gives the discipline wide applicability to a variety of careers and lifetinne
undertakings.

Although there is presently no graduate degree program in anthropology,
courses in anthropology ai;e a component of the MEd degree in Social Science
and may be used as electives for MA degrees in other programs.

COURSE DESCRIPTIONS

AN 514 ETHNOLOGY OF NORTH AMERICAN INDIANS 3 s.h.

Review of culture history and culture area characteristics of Indians of North
America. Representative groups at different levels of economic, social and political
complexity chosen for more detailed study related to historical, functional, ecological
and psychological concepts Current living conditions of Native Americans ranging from
lifestyles on the reservation to urban settings examined in view of recent theories of
social and cultural change.

AN 520 FIELD SCHOOL IN ARCHAEOLOGY 6 s.h.

Current strategies and techniques in archaeological excavation research applied to
prehistorical and/or historic sites in Indiana and adjacent areas. Relationships of
archaeological and social science paradigms of archaeological data, national and state
conservation policies, and archaeological study of culture change examined in exca-
vation context.

AN 522 CULTURE AND PERSONALITY 3 s.h.

Studies personality traits unique to prescribed cultural or institutional settings. Sub-
ject matter includes socialization, emotional expression, kinesics, deviant roles, cultural
aspects of mental disturbance, and value orientation. Some attention given to research
methods employed in the discipline.

Programs and Courses — 47

Anthropology
Art and Art Education

AN 571 CULTURAL AREA STUDIES 3 s h

Analysis of pre-historic, and contemporary aspects of ethnological studies in a cul-
ture area. Examines social organization, linguistic ties, cultural ecology, folklore,
mythology, artistic expression and world view in a particular culture area This course
may be repeated according to selection of culture areas by instructors responsible for
the course. The following culture areas are initially available: AN 571 A CULTURAL
AREA STUDIES; JAPAN; AN 571 C CULTURAL AREAS STUDIES; THE CARIBBEAN.

AN 691 STUDIES IN ANTHROPOLOGY 3 s.h.

Surveys anthropological approach to human biological and cultural heritage with
special reference to physical variability of human populations, past and present.
Stresses relationship between culture and processes of biological evolution

AN 692 C0f\/1PARATIVE CULTURES 3 s.h

Comparative study of selected examples of world cultures ranging from hunting and
gathering groups to modern industrial systems viewed as adaptations to their geo-
graphical, cultural and social environments Emphasis on the universal features of
culture.

AN 693 THE SCIENCE OF CULTURE 3 s.h.

Examination of major theories of cultural anthropology employed to account for
variety and structure of human cultures. Worldwide data utilized; interplay between data
and theory emphasized.

AN 694 ANTHROPOLOGY SEMINAR 3 s.h.

Considers conceptual problems and definitions in anthropology. Formulations of a
variety of research problems central in anthropology emphasized.

AN 695 PREHISTORY 3 s.h.

Comparative study of specific cultural trajectories and cultural processes leading
toward the emergence of urban society, political differentiation, the state, social stratifi-
cation, craft specialization and militarization. Various culture change models examined
using archaeological excavation data from China, India, Egypt, Mesopotamia, Afnca,
and Middle and South America.

ART AND ART EDUCATION

The following curricula nnake it possible for a mature student capable of
self-direction to select a progrann suited to individual needs with the help of an
adviser. In effect, the student and adviser can tailor-nnake a program of study.

Procedure for Admission (departmental approval)

1 . The student must file a "letter of intent" stating the applicant's area(s) of
specialization and reasons for these choices. The area of speciaization
is subject to review including one revision in consultation with the stu-
dent's advisory committee. This review will take place between six and
1 2 study hours. It is the student's responsibility to arrange for the review.

48 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

2. For admission to the MEd program, a student must have Level I Certifi-
cation or the equivalent. To be admitted to the MEd and Certification or
the MA in studio art, the candidate must possess a BS in Art Education,
BFA or BA with a studio major or equivalent.

3. All applicants are required to submit a portfolio of work consisting of
between 12 and 15 items. The work, if possible, should represent the
applicant's area of specialization.

Research and Independent Study

Independent Study: A student may select a specific problem for one to
three semester hours and pursue it in off campus study with the help of an
adviser. The student will present a proposal for approval to the adviser of
his/ her choice and the director of graduate studies. The study will be reviewed
by the advisory committee and juried at the end by the same committee.

Thesis: Under both thesis and independent study, the final product may be
a one-artist show of the minor and major area. The show will be juried by the
thesis committee, which will be composed of the advisory committee. The
show will be accompanied by a written statement, sketch books, catalogue,
notes or other methods of reporting deemed appropriate by the committee. All
shows will leave some permanent evidence of their existence such as slides,
photographs or catalogues.

MASTER OF EDUCATION IN ART

See page 38 for additional information on the MEd degree.
I. Professional Development Area (nine s.h.)

A. Humanistic Studies (three s.h.) — One of the following:
FE 611, FE 612, FE 613, or FE 514.

B. Behavioral Studies (three s.h.) — One of the following:

EP 604, EP 573, EP 576, EP 578, EP 580, CE 629, CE 639, or EX 631

C. Research (three s.h.)

GR 615, Elements of Research

II. Specialization Core (six s.h.) — One of the following courses:
FE 51 5, CM 600, AT 61 0, AT 61 1 , AT 61 4, *AT 61 3.

III. Subject Area and/or Elective

AR Studio courses are listed in catalog (nine s.h.)

Art Elective (three s.h.)
AR 850 Thesis (three s.h.)

For description of FE courses see section on FOUNDATIONS OF
EDUCATION; for EP courses, EDUCATIONAL PSYCHOLOGY: for CE
courses, COUNSELOR EDUCATION:for EX courses, SPECIAL EDUCATION:
for CM course, COMMUNICATION MEDIA.

Programs and Courses — 49
Art and Art Education

For description of GR courses, see entry under "GENERAL SERVICE
COURSES," page 41

MASTER OF ARTS IN ART THERAPY

The Master of Arts degree in Art Therapy program is designed to fulfill the
nnininnunn graduate requirements for an art therapist. Following the guidelines
of the American Art Therapy Association, the master's degree in Art Therapy
at lUP is designed to provide the theoretical and practical art therapy skills
which are applied in clinical, education, or rehabilitative settings. The program
is an interdisciplinary one of art, art therapy, psychology, and related areas. A
practicum of 600 hours under the supervision of an art therapist in an
applicable setting is required.

'Required

In addition to meeting the requirements for admission to The Graduate
School, an interview with a portfolio of the candidate's art work will be required
and an evaluation of the candidate's interests in therapeutic work will follow. It
is suggested that graduate students in art therapy have a background in
human, normal, and abnormal psychology and have background suitable to
professional work in the field. Upon the director's advisement students may be
required to take additional undergraduate course work if they are found to lack
proficiency in art orthe social sciences. Graduate credit is not given for under-
graduate courses which may be required.

The MA in Art Therapy requires the successful completion of a minimum of
39 semester hours.

The following courses are required: AT 554 (3 s.h.). AT 655 (3 s.h.), AT 656
(6 s.h.). AT 657 (pending approval. 0-3 s.h.). AR 850 (3-6 s.h.)

Seven of the following core courses must be chosen: EP 662 (3 s.h.),
EP 576 (3 s.h.). PC 574 (3 s.h.), PC 633 (3 s h), PC 634 (3 s.h.), 'PC 635 (3 s.h),
PC 641 (3 s.h), *PC 642 (3 s.h ), *PC 643 (3 s h), PC 644 (3 s.h). CE 646 (3
S.h.).

Electives may be chosen from the following: PC 530 (3 s.h.), PC 561 (3 s.h.),
EP 573 (3 s h), EP 604 (3 s.h.), EP 576 (3 s.h), EP 578 (3 s.h.), EP 580 (3 s.h.),
EX 631 , EX 688 (3 s.h), EX 639 (3 s.h), EX 665 (3 s.h.)

For description of PC courses, see section on PSYCHOLOGY: for EP
courses, EDUCATIONAL PSYCHOLOGY: for EX course. SPECIAL EDUCA-
TION

For description of GR courses, see entry under "GENERAL SERVICE
COURSES." page 41

Students are expected to acquire as much practical experience as
possible during their studies In addition to the required 600 hours of prac-
ticum, students will be expected to accomplish field work in connection with
both introduction and sem,inar art therapy courses. Practicum requires
between two and three workdays per week. The same number of hours may be
provided by concentrated summer work in a shorter period or by evening work
over a more extended period. Such extension must be approved by the
director of art therapy.

no less than

3-6

50 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

The University takes responsibility for providing field placements in the
Indiana area only. Students wishing to arrange for other field placements are at
liberty to investigate possibilities.

Each student's program must be approved by the director of art therapy
and the coordinator of graduate studies during the first semester of graduate
study.

It is the feeling of the University and the American Art Therapy Association
that the acquisition of competence in the professional field demands tv^o
academic years of study.

'Permission of Instructor

MASTER OF ARTS IN ART

Studio Major (AR 640 through AR 668)
Studio Minor (AR 640 through AR 668)
Art Seminar (AR 615)
Thesis (AR 850)
Electives

TOTAL 30

MASTER OF EDUCATION PLUS CERTIFICATION
Undergraduate Requirements

Elementary Education (AR 31 7, EL 421 , EL 422) 1 1

Secondary Certification (AR 318, ED 441, ED 442) 11

Elementary and Secondary Certification 22

Graduate Requirements

Seminar in Learning Resources (CM 600) 3

Educational Psychology (EP 604 or EP 618) 3
Foundations of Education (FE 61 1 , FE 61 2, FE 61 3,

FE514, FE515) 3
Art Education (Select Two: AT 61 0, AT 61 1 ,

AT 612, AT 614) 6

AT 613 Research in Art Education 3

GR 615 Elements of Research 3

AR 850 Thesis 3

Studio 9

For description of CM course, see section on COMMUNICATIONS MEDIA;

for EP courses, EDUCATIONAL PSYCHOLOGY; for FE courses, FOUNDA-
TIONS OF EDUCATION

For description of GR courses, see entry under GENERAL SERVICE
COURSES," page 41

Programs and Courses — 51
Art and Art Education

GRADUATE MINOR IN MEDIA

Graduate students may, with the approval of their adviser, obtain a minor in
Media at lUP The minor consists of a minimum of six semester hours of work
in graduate level courses in Media and may include as many hours in Media as
are approved by the student's graduate program adviser.

The minor may include any combination of courses offered by the Com-
munications Media Department except CM 630 Classification and Cataloging
of Learning Resources, CM 660 Management of Learning Resources Pro-
grams and CM 699 Internship. These courses are designed for the profes-
sional Media Center Manager rather than the person minoring in Media Media
minors may be designed around the list of courses under communications
Media (page 78). All courses are three semester hour credits except CM 699,
which may be from one to three semester hour credits.

The number of semester hours in each of these programs represents the
minimum. The student's committee reserves the right to recommend more.

COURSE DESCRIPTIONS

AH 506 ANCIENT MIGRATORY ART 3 s.h.

Survey of painting, architecture and sculpture of Prehistoric Man; Egypt and the Near
East, as well as Art of Primitive Man of later times — The American Indian, African Art
and the Art of the Oceanic.

AH 507 MEDIEVAL ART 3 s.h.

Prerequisite Art History majors, by special arrangement. Art and architecture of
Europe during Middle Ages, beginning with a study of Early Christian and Byzantine art
and concluding with art of Romanesque and Gothic periods.

AH 508 ITALIAN RENAISSANCE ART 3 s.h.

Art History majors, by special arrangment. Covers span of Italian art from 1400's
through 1 850 and Mannerist movement. Special attention paid to great masters of the
period,

AH 509 BAROQUE AND ROCOCO ART 3 s.h.

General survey of art from 1 575-1 775. Will include architecture, sculpture, painting
and other arts,

AH 519 MUSEOLOGY 3 s.h.

The student will work in the University museum under the supervision of the museum
director Museum techniques and practices will be stressed in an "on-the-job" training
situation. The role of the graduate student will be that of "acting curator" of specific areas
of his/her choice, and supervising selection and hanging of shows.

AH 522 ART IN AMERICA 3 s.h.

Surveys American art and its relation to development of American ideas and ideals,

AH 523 SEMINAR IN ART CRITICISM 3 s,h.

Explores philosophic theories of art and art products. An attempt to relate these
theories to senses and form itself, and to technical, psychological and cultural values.
Primary concepts explored are play, illusion, imitation, beauty, emotional expression,
imagination, empathy, creativity and experience. Time will be given fb forms of art that
are not primarily visual, including music, dance, literature and poetry.

52 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

AH 524 ART OF THE EAST 3 s.h.

Nature of Eastern Art's meaning and place in contemporary world culture^

AH 625 ARuHITECTURAL INFLUENCES IN

A CONTEMPORARY SOCIETY 3 s h.

Experimental problems in structure and aesthetics as related to architecture.
Attempts are made to search out the historical roots of many contemporary styles of
architecture,

AH 626 PRE-COLUMBIAN ART 3 s.h.

Art of Mezo-American cultures. Mayas. Aztecs and Incas, as influenced by Oceanic
migrations.

AH 628 WORLD ART SINCE 1875 3 s.h

Discoveries and advances in artistic expression in modern times. Subject matter for
study may be found in any or all of the arts.

All art history courses are open as electives to all students.

AR615 ART SEMINAR 3 s.h.

Opportunity for student to discuss problems in art related to studio interests.
Proposals will also be prepared. For MA candidates only.

AR616 DIRECTED STUDIES 0-3 s.h.

Offered in instances where a particular course is needed by a student, but is not on
the regular schedule rotation. Approval must be secured from the adviser, the instructor
involved and the Graduate Coordinator.

AR640 GRADUATE STUDIO IN CERAMICS 3-18 s.h

Prerequisite — at least one year of undergraduate ceramics. All aspects of hand-
forming, decorating, glazing and firing will be dealt with. This may include body and
glaze formulation and reduction, oxidation, salt, wood and raku firing as well as thrown,
coiled or slab construction or combinations thereof. Historic and contemporary ceram-
ics and philosophies of the craft.

AR644 GRADUATE STUDIO IN FABRICS 3-18 s.h.

Fundamentals of fabric construction and processes. Emphasis on experimental
approaches to fabric design and construction. Designed to meet the needs of beginning
as well as advanced students.

AR 647 GRADUATE STUDIO IN JEWELRY AND METAL WORK 3-18 s.h.

Advanced study dealing with specialized problems in design and execution of metal
work and jewelry. A thesis may be developed depending upon research in one of areas
relating to this field, history, materials, tools, processes or teaching techniques of the
craft.

AR 650 GRADUATE SCHOOL IN SCULPTURE 3-18 s.h.

An advanced course in which students are expected to work on more complex
problems of sculpture. A student may explore one or several sculpture or modeling
media

AR653 GRADUATE STUDIO IN WOODWORKING 3-18 s.h.

Specialized study and experiences are related to design and execution of problems
relating to wood as a crafts material. Opportunity is presented to more intensive explor-
ation of materials and processes of this craft employing both hand and power tools.

Programs and Courses — 53
Art and Art Education

AR661 GRADUATE STUDIO IN DRAWING 3-18 s.h.

Drawing as a language and continued development of skill in communication and
expression in all kinds of materials and media Drawing as an intimate work of the artist
will be stressed

AR662 GRADUATE STUDIO IN OIL PAINTING 3-18 sh.

Traditional and contemporary metfiods and tecfiniques in area of plastic painting
media Composition, m relation to modern painters problems Opportunity is presented
for exploration and specialization m depth as well as breadth.

AR665 GRADUATE STUDIO IN WATERCOLOR PAINTING 3-18 sh.

Painting in transparent watercolor, gouache, mixed media and with new water
soluble paints, such as casein and acrylic polymer tempera. Traditional, current and
experimental approaches with emphasis on design and emotional content,

AR668 GRADUATE STUDIO IN PRINTMAKING 3-18 sh.

Prerequisite — AR 217 or its equivalent. Modes, media, material, techniques and
processes of graphic arts and their use in expression. The student may concentrate on
intensive exploration of one media in depth or explore a number of media for breadth of
experience

Studio courses may be taken for a total of 1 8 semester hours in one studio No more
than 6 semester hours in one studio may be taken during any one semester

AT 610 ART AND THE EXCEPTIONAL CHILD 3 s h.

Designed to consider characteristics and needs of the mentally retarded and the
intellectually gifted child with particular emphasis on art aspects of their education

AT 611 ART CURRICULUM DEVELOPMENT IN

ART EDUCATION 3 sh.

A seminar and study of curricula at all levels Particular attention given to individual

needs of class participants in development of curricula pertinent to their own teaching

situations For those students who have not yet taught, theoretical and practical

problems will be examined

AT 612 SUPERVISION AND ADMINISTRATION IN

ART EDUCATION 3 sh.

Responsibilities, functions and duties of Art Supervisors and Administrators

AT 61 3 RESEARCH IN ART EDUCATION 3 sh.

Required of all Art Education majors Reviews past and present research focusing
upon the methodologies pertinent to the field. Prerequisite for this course. GR 61 5. is to
be scheduled within the first four to eight semester hours, AT 61 3 must be taken as soon
after as possible but within the first 12 semester hours.

AT 614 HISTORY AND PHILOSOPHY OF ART EDUCATION 3 sh.

Considers art education in Europe. United States and Canada, designed to give the
student background

AT 654 INTRODUCTION TO ART THERAPY 3 s h.

A survey of the concepts and theories, applications and procedures of Art Therapy.
Consideration of selections of materials and media for varying diagnostic and
therapeutic problems, rehabilitory and psychiatric settings and limitations of the art
therapist Prerequisite is admission to graduate school Basically the course will serve
individuals with clinical backgrounds (psychology, social workers, child care, speech
therapy, special education, art education, art therapy), and those with a primary identity
in one or more of the arts.

54 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

AT 655 ART THERAPY SEMINAR 3 s.h^

Provides practical considerations in therapy to prepare student to enter a practicum
experience^ Prerequisite is Introduction to Art Therapy 654 or the equivalents

AT 656 ART THERAPY PRACTICUM 6 s.h.

A professional supervisory team m\\ guide the student in a semester experience in
settings where they will practice art therapy^ Discussion, analysis, planning and data
gathering will be in the student's area of interest Mininrium required courses for the Art
Therapy Degree are the prerequisites.

BIOLOGY

Requirements for Admission — To be adnnitted to the Biology Depart-
ment, the applicant must have completed the requirements for a bachelor's
degree from an accredited college or university v\/hich should include a major
in biology, one year in inorganic chemistry, one semester of organic and one
semester of biochemistry, one year of physics, and mathematics through one
semester calcuiGs or statistics. Applicants with undergraduate deficiencies
may be required to register for appropriate courses

The Requirements for Candidacy for an MEd degree are — The satis-
factory completion of 1 5 semester hours of graduate work, with at least eight
hours in the biological sciences. For those students electing the thesis option,
requirements are the same as those for MS students beginning with the
second paragraph below. For those students electing the non-thesis option,
requirements are the same as those for MS students beginning with the third
paragraph below

The Requirements for Candidacy for an MS degree are — The satis-
factory completion of 1 5 semester hours of graduate work, with at least eight
hours in core courses.

The selection of an adviser and a committee of at least two additional
faculty members to guide the candidate in completing a tentative program and
selecting a thesis problem

An official application for admission to candidacy, incluOing the tentative
program which has been approved by the adviser, must be submitted to the
Biology Department graduate committee

Candidates for all degrees are expected to maintain an average of not
lower than B Continuance in the graduate program for those receiving two
course grades below the minimum is contingent upon favorable review of the
graduate committee

Programs and Courses — 55
Biology

MASTER OF EDUCATION IN BIOLOGY

students working for this degree have two options, a non-thesis program
with a 33 credit hour requirement and a thesis program with a 30 credit hour
requirement. The only way in which these programs differ is in the credit hour
requirement noted above and that the thesis is required for the 30 credit hour
degree. Students working in either of these programs will complete the appro-
priate number of hours in accordance with the following requirements:

I. Professional Development area (nine s.h )

A. Humanistics Studies — three s.h. to be selected from FE 61 1 , 61 2, and
613.

B. Behavioral Studies — three s.h. to be selected from EP 573, 576, 578,
580, 604, CE 639, and EX 631 .

C. Research — three s.h. — GR 61 5 required of all students (both options).

II. Specialization Core (six s.h )
Six s.h, to be selected from Bl 661 , FE 51 5 and CM 600 Biology Practicum
(Bl 661 ) is strongly recommended

III. Subject Matter Concentration (15-18 s.h.)

Fifteen s.h. (for thesis program students) or 1 8 s.h. (for non-thesis program
students) to be selected from Bl 545 through Bl 699, Ml 500, Bl 850, GS
607, and CH 651.

For description of FE courses, see section on FOUNDATIONS OF EDUCA-
TION; for EP courses, EDUCATIONAL PSYCHOLOGY; for CE courses,
COUNSELOR EDUCATION; for EX courses, SPECIAL EDUCATION; for CM
course, COMMUNICATIONS MEDIA; for GS course, GEOSCIENCE; for CH
course, CHEMISTRY

For description of GR courses, see entry under "GENERAL SERVICE
COURSES," page 41.

MASTER OF SCIENCE IN BIOLOGY

Students working for this degree will complete 32 semester hours of work in
accordance with the following divisions:

I. Core Courses — 18-20 s.h, Bl 601 (Instrumentation), Bl 602 (Biometry),
Bl 610 (Seminar) and Bl 850 (two-four credits in thesis) are required
courses. The remaining 10 hours of core credits include one morphology-
taxonomy course (chosen from Bl 546, 551 ,575.576.578and61 1 through
625), and one physiology course (chosen from Bl 553, 561 . 652, 653, or
654), and one ecology course (chosen from Bl 563. 631 , 635, or 640).

II. Elective Courses — 12-14 semester hours to be selected with the approval
of the adviser from the 500 and 600 level Biology courses. (With the
exception to Bl 661 ) or from related science and mathematics courses

III. Resident Requirements for the MS — The candidate must take a minimum
of 24 of the semester hours required for graduation at lUP.

56 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

IV. Research Requirements for the MS — Every candidate must present a
research thesis on an original topic approved by the candidate's advisory
committee. This is programmed as Bl 850 (thesis) for two to four credits.

V Requirements for Completion of the MS

A 1 All students in the MS program in the Biology Department must pass a
comprehensive examination administered by the department gradu-
ate committee. The purpose of this examination is to assure that all of
our graduates have a well proportioned knowledge of the field of
biology. The examination will also help point out the student's major
area of inadequate knowledge or training.

2. This examination is offered at a specific time twice each year The
student may signify intentions of taking the examination by informing
the graduate committee.

3. The student should plan to take the entire exam in the second sem-
ester of full-time course work (or the equivalent). A second attempt,
if necessary, should come in the student's third full-time semester. A
third and final attempt is permitted only after petition to. and approval
of the Graduate Committee

4 This will be the only comprehensive examination for the Master of
Science degree

B After the thesis has been accepted in its final written form by the candi-
date's committee and The Graduate School, the candidate is expected
to present a public seminar reporting the results of his/her research.

For descriptions of GR courses, see entry under "GENERAL SERVICE
COURSES," page 41.

COURSE DESCRIPTIONS

In many courses in the Biology Department, additional laboratory time may be
required beyond the regularly scheduled periods.

Bl 532 COMPARATIVE VERTEBRATE ANATOMY

Discussion of anatomy of representative vertebrates from a comparative point of
view. Stresses ma)or organizational changes observed in vertebrate history Two hours
lecture. 3 hours lab per week. Prerequisite: Bl 120,

Bl 546 DENDROLOGY 3 s.h.

Study of the woody plants as to their identification, distribution, ecology, culture,
anatomy, physiology, mensuration and utilization.

Bl 551 TAXONOMY OF PLANTS 3 s.h.

Includes collection, identification, and classification of vascular plant species with

special emphasis on family characteristics and phylogeny. Prerequisite: Plant Biology.

Bl 553 PHYSIOLOGY OF PLANTS 4 s.h

A comprehensive study of physiological bases for organization and function of living
plants. Current literature is emphasized Prerequisite: Biochemistry. Closed to students
with undergraduate Plant Physiology. Bl 351

Programs and Courses — 57
Biology

Bl 561 GENERAL PHYSIOLOGY 4 s.h.

A molecular approach to quantitative analysis of function and coordination in living
organisms. Emphasis is on chemical and physcial principles operating at primary func-
tional units. Prerequisites: course in Physiology, Biochemistry, Calculus. (Two hours
lecture and four hours lab.)

Bl 563 LIMNOLOGY 3 s.h.

An investigation into the physical, chemical, and biological aspects of inland waters
and their inter-relationships. Saturday or Sunday labs may be required. Prerequisite:
Ecology.

Bl 572 RADIATION BIOLOGY 3 s.h.

Basic aspects of nuclear physics, phenomena of radioactive isotopes and biolog-
ical effects and uses of such isotopes. Lab work utilizes instruments for detection and
measurement of radioactive nuclides. Prerequisites: two years Biology, one year
Physics, and General, Organic and Biochemistry.

Bl 575 MAMMALOGY 3 s.h.

General discussion of mammals emphasizing systematics, distribution, and struc-
ture-function modifications related to their evolution. A paper is required.

Bl 576 PARASITOLOGY 3 s h

The parasitic protozoa, flatworms and roundworms. Major emphasis upon species
infesting man and includes their structure, physiology, ecology, life cycles and patho-
genicity. Arthropods involved in parasite transmission included. Prerequisites: one year
Biology, Vertebrate and Invertebrate Zoology.

Bl 578 MYCOLOGY 3 s.h.

The systematics, morphology, and physiology of fungi, with emphasis on economi-
cally important and experimentally useful Myxomycophyta and Eumycophta. Not open
to students with undergraduate Bl 381 Mycology,

Bl 585 MICROTECNIQUE 3 s.h.

Procedures involved in production of microscope slides. Techniques of preparing
whole mounts, microtome sections and serial sections of both plant and animal mate-
rials.

Bl 597 INTRODUCTION TO ROCKY MOUNTAIN ECOLOGY 4 s.h.

Flora and fauna of each of the life zones described, collected, and identified. Takes
place m Bridger-Teton National Forest, Wyoming. Tents, food horses, etc. are provided
by professional outfitter Offered only in the summer. No prerequisites.

Bl 601 INSTRUMENTATION 3 s.h.

introduction to the variety of techniques and procedures of instrument-assisted data
gathering appropriate to the biologist.

Bl 602 BIOMETRY 3 s.h.

The choice and application of standard, efficient, and practical statistical techniques
for data analyses in common biological research situations.

BI610 BIOLOGY SEMINAR 1 s.h.

An opportunity to become acquainted with various areas of current research in
biology. One hour meeting per week,

Bl 611 COMPARATIVE PLANT MORPHOLOGY 3 s.h.

Procedures, general principles and ob|ectives of comparative plant morphology.
Emphasis on relationships between morphology, taxonomy and experimental morpho-
genesis in vascular plants.

58 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

Bl 620 PROTOZOOLOGY 3 s h

Common and representative genera of all groups of free-living protozoa. Emphasis is
placed upon structure, phiysiology, ecology and life histories of these organisms. An
independent research protect is required

Bl 621 PRINCIPLES OF ANIIVIAL TAXONOMY 3 s.h

Study of classification system and its application to identification of animals. Basic
principles of taxonomy rules of nomenclature, a synoptic history of classification and the
"old" and "new" taxonomy will be included. A taxonomic field study is required.

Bl 622 ADVANCED ORNITHOLOGY ' 3 s.h.

A detailed study of bird populations, behavior, and movement including the annual
cycle Prerequisites: Identification by site and song of local birds.

Bl 623 ANIMAL MORPHOGENESIS 3 s.h.

Factors that influence and control the differentation of organs, tissues, and cells.
Emphasis is placed on experimental procedures and methods Prerequisites: Embry-
ology of Comparative Anatomy. Organic Chemistry or Biochemistry, and Genetics.

Bl 624 ADVANCED ENTOMOLOGY 3 s.h

Insect morphology, including external and internal organization of different species
of insects. Comparisons between species included An independent research study and
seminar presentation required.

Bl 625 HERPETOLOGY 3 s.h.

A comprehensive survey of the classes Amphibia and Reptilia, including their classi-
fication, structure, origin, evolution, phylogenetic relationships, distribution, and natural
history Special emphasis is placed on the herpetofauna of Pennsylvania

Bl 631 PLANT ECOLOGY 3 s.h.

Nature and distribution of vegetation in relation to environmental factors Field inves-
tigations of local plant communities constitute bulk of lab work Prerequisite: Field
Botany, Plant Taxonomy or general knowledge of local flora

Bl 635 TAXONOMY AND ECOLOGY OF BACTERIA 3 s.h

Isolation, cultivation, classification and ecology of major groups of bacteria. Special

emphasis on principles of bacterial taxonomy and ecology Prerequisite Microbiology

Bl 640 ANIMAL ECOLOGY 3sh

Effect of environmental factors on animals, animals as members of communities,
their tropic relationships, their ecological distribution, population dynamics, and aspects
of animal behavior A field or lab problem is required.

Bl 652 MICROBIAL PHYSIOLOGY 4 s h

Physiological reactions involved in growth, reproduction, and death of microbes
Energy production, substrate transport and metabolism and regulatory mechanisms.
Prerequisites Microbiology and Biochemistry

Bl 653 ANIMAL PHYSIOLOGY 4 s h

Digestion and molecular transport of nutrients, gaseous exchanges, excretion,
muscular activity, and control by endocrine and neural elements Prerequisite Animal
Biology

Bl 654 ENDOCRINOLOGY 4 s h

Phytogeny, embryology, micro-anatomy, and physiology of the endocrine tissues.
Prerequisites: course in anatomy and physiology.

Programs and Courses — 59
Biology
Business

Bl 661 BIOLOGY PRACTICUM 3 s.h.

Deals with methods and materials that will enable the secondary school biology
teacher to teach more recent curricula and strategies. Emphasis on environmental and
individual instruction methods will supplement the more conventional and traditional
skills demanded of successful biology teaching.

Bl 662 IVIOLECULAR GENETICS 3 s.h.

Study of chemical structure of the gene in relation to its molecular function in control
of specific protein biosynthesis Emphasis will be placed on genetic systems of bacteria,
fungi, and viruses Prerequisites: genetics, organic chemistry and biochemistry or
permission of the instructor.

Bl 663 IMMUNOLOGY 3 s.h.

Physical and chemical properties of antigens and antibodies, nature of antigen-
antibody interactions, mechanism of antibody formation and immune reaction in
disease. Prerequisites: Biochemistry and Microbiology.

Bl 664 PATHOGENIC MICROBIOLOGY 3 s.h.

Study of disease caused by microorganisms with emphasis on human pathogens.
Both epidemiology and aspects of host-parasite relationships. Prerequisite: Micro-
biology.

Bl 681 SPECIAL TOPICS 1 -4 s.h,

Content will vary, covering diverse topics in specific areas of biology.

Bl 699 INDEPENDENT STUDIES 1 -3 s.h.

Consists of independent research studies under guidance of an instructor. Maximum
credit in any one area is six semester hours Time and class hours will be arranged by
instructor involved. Prerequisite: Permission of instructor.

Ml 500 PROBLEMS IN MARINE SCIENCE 3 s.h.

Independent study for the advanced student in marine sciences. Topics are selected
from areas offered by the Marine Consortium and studies are directed by the instructor
in that area. Prerequisite: Consent of instructor.

BUSINESS

The School of Business offers three separate graduate progranns: The
Master of Business Adnninistration (MBA), the Master of Education in Business
(M.Ed.), and the Master of Science in Business (M.S.).

MASTER OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION (MBA)

The Master of Business Administration program is intended to serve the
needs of both junior and senior level business and industrial executives
seeking additional knowledge and skills to do a more efficient job of problem
solving and managerial decision making. It also serves the needs of students
seeking advanced training in business management prior to entry into a
business career. The program is offered on part-time or full-time basis.

60 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

Core I of the program consists of 10 courses (31 s.h.), thiat provides a
foundation in the basic concepts and techniques used in today's business
world.

Core Jl consists of ten graduate level courses or thirty semester hours. Of
these, seven courses are required in the functional and applied areas of
business. The remaining three courses are electives which may be concen-
trated in one functional area, such as Accounting, Finance, Marketing, Man-
agement Information Systems or Management, by those students wishing to
develop an academic specialty within the broader field of business admin-
istration, or the electives may be taken from any combination of those areas or,
with permission, from other related areas by those students wishing a busi-
ness degree covering a broader range

Normally the student with an undergraduate degree in business admin-
istration would either go directly to the Core II subjects or would have a
minimal number of Core I subjects remaining.

However, a student with no undergraduate background in Business Admin-
istration would need to take more Core I classes. Therefore, for the student
with no Business Administration background, completing both Core I and Core
II will normally require two years of full-time study to achieve the MBA degree.
However, for a student with a bachelor's degree in Business Administration,
the requirements for the MBA can normally be completed in one year of full-
time study

If the student did not have these courses as an undergraduate, they may be
taken at lUP by the student or, with prior permission, at some other institutions.
In some cases, credit may be given for other, parallel educational experi-
ences. For example, there are certain corporate training programs in
computer languages that might be accepted in lieu of the introductory under-
graduate computer course. In some instances, course credit may be given by
examination for these prerequisite courses. Please contact the Director of
Graduate Studies in Business for information concerning the prerequisite
courses.

Students seeking enrollment in the MBA program or M.S. in Business pro-
gram must take the Graduate Management Admission Test (GMAT) before
being admitted to the program. Information about the GMAT can be obtained
from the Educational Testing Services, Princeton, NJ 08540 or from the lUP
Academic Services and Testing Center (Telephone 412-357-3050).

COURSE REQUIREMENTS FOR THE MBA DEGREE

Core I: 31 s.h. in the following undergraduate courses: AG 201, AG 202, FS
31 0, MK 320, AD 235, EC 1 22, MG 360, MA 1 21 , FS 21 5, and FS 241 .
Students will be given credit for Core I, undergraduate prerequisite
courses, taken at lUP or at other appropriate institutions with prior
permission. Contact Director of Graduate Studies in Business to
ascertain the appropriateness of such courses and to obtain permis-
sion to take courses at any other institutions. See lUP undergraduate
catalog for course descriptions.

Core II: (a) 21 s.h. inthefollowinggraduatecourses: AG607', EC634, FS601 ,
FS 630, FS 640, MG 633, and MK 603.

Programs and Courses — 61
Business

(b) 9 s.h. chosen from among the following elective courses:

Accounting: AG 501 . AG 51 2, AG 531 . AG 600. AG 602. AG 603.

AG 608
Finance/MIS: FS 510. FS 520. FS 522. FS 550. FS 551. FS 570.
FS 580. FS 602. FS 604. FS 631. FS 632. FS 635.
FS 641. FS 642
Management/Marketing: MG 630, MG 631. MG 632. MG 635,
MG 636. MG 642. MG 645. MK 521,
MK 530, MK 531.
Other: 581 / 681 Special Topics courses offered by the AG, FS.
MG and MK Departments: and other business related
courses with the prior approval of the Director of Graduate
Studies in Business

'Students with undergraduate concentrations in Accounting are
not eligible for AG 607 See Director of Graduate Studies in
Business for alternative Accounting course selections.

MASTER OF EDUCATION IN BUSINESS (M.Ed.)

The Master of Education in Business degree is designed to permit business
teachers to broaden their understanding of business and to study teaching
procedures in light of new experiences.

Business education teachers with appropriate prerequisites can earn, at
the graduate level, certification in accounting, data processing, marketing, and
distributive education while pursuing the Master of Eduation degree program.

Distributive education teachers seeking to broaden their background in
marketing, merchandising, and management may emphasize these areas in
the Master of Education degree program.

Individuals without an undergraduate degree in business may pursue
graduate work leading to certification in Distributive Education,

Cooperative education certification may be earned by teachers holding a
valid Pennsylvania teaching certificate or its equivalent.

Upon admission to the Graduate School, each student is assigned an
adviser who will assist the student in scheduling his/her program of studies.
Prior to admission to candidacy for the degree of Master of Education in
Business, the student must take the Graduate Record Examination aptitude
test. Information about this examination can be obtained from The Graduate
School.

COURSE REQUIREMENTS FOR THE M.Ed. DEGREE

Students must complete 30 semester hours for the degree distributed as
follows:

I. Professional Development Area (nine s.h.)
A. Humanistic Studies (three s.h.) — One of the following: FE 61 1 . FE 61 2,
FE 613, or FE 514.

62 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

B, Behavioral Studies (three s.h.) — One of the following: EP 604, EP 573,
EP 576, EP 578, EP 580, CE 639, or EX 631.

C. Research (three s.h.)

GR 615 Elements of Research

II. Specialized Core (nine s.h.)
AD 610, BE 650 and either BE 660 or BE 661 (NOTE; Students seeking
certification in Distributive Education may substitute DE 51 0 or DE 51 3 for
BE 660 or 661.)

III. Subject Area and/or Thesis (12 s.h )

AD 850 (three s.h.) Thesis (optional) and/or any additional graduate
courses listed in this catalog under AD, AG, BE, DE, FS, MK or MG. Other
related courses may be allowed with the consent of the School of Business
Director of Graduate Programs

Courses in Specialized Core Area and Subject Area should be scheduled
early in the student's program.

For description of FE courses, see section on FOUNDATIONS OF
EDUCATION: for EP courses. EDUCATIONAL PSYCHOLOGY: for CE
courses, COUNSELOR EDUCATION: for EX course, SPECIAL EDUCATION

For description of GR courses, see entry under "GENERAL SERVICE
COURSES."

MASTER OF SCIENCE IN BUSINESS (M.S.)

The Master of Science in Business degree is designed primarily for busi-
ness people, industrial, personnel and government employees who are
interested in furthering their academic career through study in Business
Administration, The program is designed to allow these peopleto specialize in
an area of Business Administration and to take more courses in their chosen
specialty than would be allowed in the MBA program. In the MS in Business
program such students may elect to take four courses or forty percent of their
graduate course work in the area of their chosen specialization

In order to familiarize the student with the full range of business activities,
the student is required to take a series of undergraduate prerequisite courses
identical to the "Core I" requirements or undergraduate prerequisite courses
that are required by the MBA program. If the student did not have these
courses as an undergraduate, they will be taken at lUP, or, with prior permis-
sion, they may be taken at some other accredited institutions. In some
instances, course credit may be given by examination for these prerequisite
courses. Please contact the Director or Graduate Studies in Business for
information concerning the prerequisite courses

In addition, the prospective MS in Business student will submit a written
statement explaining their career goals and the area of specialization or func-
tional field where they wish to concentrate to the Director of Graduate Studies
in Business. The Director and the student will develop a program tailored for
the student's specific needs, to include a listing of courses to be taken for
completion of the degree requirements.

Programs and Courses — 63
Business

COURSE REQUIREMENTS FOR THE M.S. DEGREE

I. Undergraduate Prerequisite Courses. 31 s.h. in the following undergrad-
uate courses:

AG 201, AG 202, FS 310, MK 320, AD 235, EC 122, MG 360, MA 121,
FS 215, and FS 241.

Students will be given credit for undergraduate prerequisite courses taken
at lUP or at other appropriate institutions with prior permission. Contact
Director of Graduate Studies in Business to ascertain the appropriateness
of such courses and to obtain permission to take courses at any other insti-
tutions. See lUP undergraduate catalog for course descriptions.

II. Graduate Courses (30 s.h. distributed as follows):

A. Three (3) Required Business Courses (9 s.h.): AG 607, AD 610, and
FS 640.

B. Business Elective Courses (1 2 to 1 5 s.h. ) from the following list: AG 501 ,
AG 51 2, AG 531 , AG 600. AG 602, AG 603, AG 608, AD 51 2, AD 51 5,
AD 612, AD 614, AD 632, AD 633, AD 634, AD 670, FS 510, FS 520,
FS 522, FS 550 FS 551 , FS 570, FS 601 , FS 602, FS 604, FS 630, FS 631 ,
FS 632, FS 635, FS 641, FS 642, MK 521, MK 530, MK 531. MK 600,
MK 601 , MK 603, MG 630, MG 631 , MG 632, MG 633, MG 635, MG 636,
MG 642, MG 645

Other graduate level courses closely related to the student's career
plans may be taken as electives. Prior permission of the Director of
Graduate Studies in Business is required.

C. Research Area (6-9 s.h.):

1. GR 516 or FS 601

2. FS 604 or MK 521

3. 850, Thesis in appropriate department in School of Business if
elected. Students not electing a thesis will take an additional elective
course as prescribed in their course of studies by the Director of
Graduate Studies in Business.

COURSE DESCRIPTIONS

Accounting

AG 501 ADVANCED PRINCIPLES OF ACCOUNTING 3 s.h.

Study of business combinations and consolidations as well as accounting problems
of specialized nature such as goods on consignment, installment sales, receivership
accounts, agency and branch accounting. Prerequisite: AG 302 or equivalent (nine
semester hours of accounting),

AG 512 ADVANCED COST ACCOUNTING 3 s.h.

Theory, preparation and use of budgets, analysis of cost variances, direct costing,
and extensive analysis of various cost-control and profit-planning programs. Prerequi-
site: AG 31 1

AG 531 AUDITING 3 s.h.

A study of auditing theory and practical application of auditing standards and
procedures to the verification of accounts and financial statements, working papers,
and audit reports. Prerequisite: AG 301

64 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

AG 581 SPECIAL TOPICS IN ACCOUNTING 3 s.h.

Covers advanced or exploratory topics within the discipline. Specific content
developed by instructor. Content will vary depending upon the interests of instructor and
students with instructor choosing specific topics. May be repeated by specific approval.
Prerequisite: Permission of the instructor and Director of Graduate Studies in Business.

AG 600 ACCOUNTING SYSTEMS 3 s.h.

Accounting principles applied to constructing accounting systems Special attention
is given to problems of management as they relate to accounting systems by developing
a system to give management the information desired for effective operation of busi-
ness. Prerequisite: AG 301.

AG 602 ADVANCED TAX ACCOUNTING 3 s.h.

Developes further knowledge of federal income tax laws as they apply to corpora-
tions, estates, and trusts. Federal estate tax and gift tax are also explored. Prerequisite:
AG 521

AG 603 FINANCIAL STATEMENTS ANALYSIS 3 s h

Detailed analysis and interpretation of financial statements using the various pur-
poses and coverage of the accounting principles underlying the data to be analyzed.
Prerequisite: AG 301

AG 607 MANAGEMENT ACCOUNTING 3 s.h.

Designed for management personnel who are not accountants but need to under-
stand the accounting process and the use of accounting information by management in
making decisions and in performance evaluation. Prerequisite: AG 202. Not open for
credit for students with constructive credit for AG 31 1 .

AG 608 SEMINAR IN ACCOUNTING ISSUES 3 s h.

Designed to offer students the opportunity to explore the conceptual framework for
accounting and reporting and to study, research, and debate various controversial
issues of current interest to the accounting profession as well as any other accounting
area of mutual interest to them and their instructor. The theme of the seminar may be
different every time it is offered. Prerequisite: AG 302 or instructor's permission.

AG 681 SPECIAL TOPICS IN ACCOUNTING 3 s.h.

Covers advanced or exploratory topics within the discipline. Specific content devel-
oped by instructor. Content will vary depending upon the interests of instructor and
students with instructor choosing specific topics May be repeated by specific approval.
Prerequisite: Permission of the instructor and Director of Graduate Studies in Business.

AG 699 INDEPENDENT STUDY IN ACCOUNTING 1-3 s.h.

Individual research and analysis of contemporary problems and issues in a concen-
trated area of study under the guidance of a senior faculty member. Prerequisite: Con-
sent of Instructor, Departmental Chairperson, and Dean, School of Business.

AG 850 THESIS 1 -6 s h

For students writing the thesis, AG 850 should be scheduled for the semester in
which the student plans to complete his/her work. The thesis may be a non-committee
thesis (1 -3 s h,), with one faculty member serving as the student's adviser: or a commit-
tee thesis (4-6 s.h.), for which the student's adviser, two additional faculty members.
Director of Guidance Programs, and/or the representative of the Dean of the School of
Business may constitute the committee

Programs and Courses — 65
Business

Administrative Services and Business Education

AD 512 ADMINISTRATIVE OFFICE SERVICES 3 s.h.

Presentation of fundamental principles and practices used in the development of an
office Specialized areas sucfi as systems analysis work simplification, forms design,
word processing, office machiines and equipment, records management, office design
and layout, office location and physical environment, office supervision, office manuals,
and development of office personnel will be discussed

AD 515 RECORDS ADMINISTRATION 3 s.h.

Development of the principles of records administration including creation, use,
maintenance, and destruction. Storage facilities, records classification, forms analysis,
control of records, as well as micro-image systems will be discussed.

AD 610 BUSINESS COMMUNICATIONS AND REPORT WRITING 3 s.h.

Study and comparison of effective communications. Emphasis is on positive
approach, clear statements, good form and structure. Organization and preparation of
reports used in education, business, and government Techniques of collecting, inter-
preting, and presenting information useful to executives.

AD 612 OFFICE ORGANIZATION AND MANAGEMENT 3 S.h.

Duties and responsibilities of office manager, principles of practical office manage-
ment and their application. Includes survey and analysis development of manuals and
their use. selection, training, pay and promotion of office employees, controlling
expenses and measuring office efficiency, quality and quantity standards, purchase and
use of equipment and report writing.

AD 614 EXECUTIVE SECRETARIAL TRAINING 3 s.h.

Stresses application of secretarial skills and knowledge and importance of good
human relations in offices. Develops methods of complementing secretarial training so
that high school graduates may become competent, proficient, and well-adjusted
secretaries.

AD 632 CURRENT BUSINESS ECONOMIC PROBLEMS 3 s.h.

Provides opportunity for students to gam insights into relationships of business to
many facets of society, impact of major societal groups upon business, and nature of
obstacles that businessmen face in day-to-day operations Review and analysis of
basic economic concepts and principles will serve as a basis for study of selected
economic problems of current interest and concern to business and society.

AD 633 CASE PROBLEMS IN BUSINESS LAW 3 s.h.

Deals with solution of case problems as applied to various topics in the field of busi-
ness law. Prerequisite: AD 235 or equivalent.

AD 634 CONSUMER ECONOMIC PROBLEMS 3 s.h.

Program for the education of intelligent consumers in how to gain the maximum
satisfaction from goods and services. An effort will be made to develop an appreciation
of the problems of the producer and distributor as well as the consumer,

AD 670 ECONOMIC BACKGROUNDS OF BUSINESS 3 s.h.

Overview of economic environment in which business and other agencies operate.
Students will gain a broad perspective of business operation through such topics as
business organization and management, consumption of goods, business risks, busi-
ness cycle, budgeting and investments. Not open to business majors, but is designed as
a general studies for other programs.

66 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

AD 699 INDEPENDENT STUDY IN ADMINISTRATIVE SERVICES 1 -3 s.h.

Individual research and analysis of comtemporary problems and issues in a concen-
trated area of study under the guidance of a senior faculty member Prerequisite: Con-
sent of Instructor, Departmental Chairperson, and Dean, School of Business.

BE 650 PRINCIPLES AND PROBLEMS OF BUSINESS EDUCATION 3 s.h.

Surveys basic principles and practices of business education Among the topics
considered are: history of the high school business program, purposes, attitudes of
management and labor toward education, relationships of general education to busi-
ness education, and trends in the field.

BE 660 IMPROVEMENT OF INSTRUCTION IN SECRETARIAL

COURSES 3 s.h.

Provides business teachers with a working philosophy and practical approach to
teaching of secretarial subjects — shorthand, typewriting, transcription, and office
practice Teaching procedures basic to development of vocational proficiency in short-
hand, typewriting, transcription, and office practice including: content, methods,
teaching aids, available instructional materials, measurement of skills, and standards of
achievement

BE 661 IMPROVEMENT OF INSTRUCTION IN ACCOUNTING AND

BASIC BUSINESS COURSES 3 s h.

Problems and techniques in teaching accounting and basic business courses.
Including ob|ectives. place and purpose of accounting and basic business courses,
curricular organization, teaching techniques, instructional materials, resource mate-
rials, course standards, testing, and evaluation For experienced or prospective high
school vocational-technical school, and community college teachers of accounting,
general business, consumer economics, business mathematics, economics, and busi-
ness principles and management

BE 676 SPECIAL STUDIES IN BUSINESS AND DISTRIBUTIVE

EDUCATION 1-6 s.h.

Special topics m business and distributive education Topics will beannouncedwell
in advance of registration

BE 699 INDEPENDENT STUDY IN BUSINESS EDUCATION 1 -3 s h.

Individual research and analysis of contemporary problems and issues in a concen-
trated area of study under the guidance of a senior faculty member. Prerequisite:
Consent of Instructor. Departmental Chairperson, and Dean. School of Business

BE 850 THESIS 1 -6 s h

For students writing the thesis. BE 850 should be scheduled for the semester in
which the student plans to complete his, her work. The thesis may be a non-committee
thesis (1 -3 s.h.). with one faculty member serving as the student's adviser: ora commit-
tee thesis (4-6 s.h.). for which the students adviser, two additional faculty members.
Director ot Graduate Programs, and/or the representative of the Dean of the School of
Business may constitute the committee

DE 510 METHODS & EVALUATION IN DISTRIBUTIVE

EDUCATION I 3 s h

To acquaint prospective teacher-coordinators with objectives of vocational distrib-
utive education, including state plan and curriculum To understand programs in
organizing, administering, and supervising a complete cooperative program.

Programs and Courses — 67
Business

DE 513 METHODS & EVALUATION IN DISTRIBUTIVE

EDUCATION II 3 s.h.

Acquaints students with basic principles of group and individual instruction in

various subject matter areas, as well as methods of presentation. Students prepare unit

plans, lesson plans, demonstrations, and evaluations. Prerequisite: DE 510 or DE 413

DE 620 RETAIL ORGANIZATION AND MANAGEMENT 3 s,h.

Directed toward problems of retail management includes present-day trends in
retailing, personnel management, merchandise control, pricing, promotion, services,
accounting, and expense control.

DE 640 INTERNSHIP IN OFFICE AND DISTRIBUTIVE

OCCUPATIONS 4 s.h.

Students who do not have extensive business experience are given the opportunity
to work full-time for six weeks during the summer in a business position under super-
vision. Evening seminars are held weekly to discuss problems related to work experi-
ence program, A written report of the experience will be required,

DE 653 ADMINISTRATION AND SUPERVISION OF VOCATIONAL

EDUCATION 3sh

An introductory course in administration and supervision of vocational education.
Historical background and problems connected with budgeting procedures and prac-
tices, teacher qualifications, certification, selection and assignments, in-service pro-
grams, rating and evaluating vocational techniques, classroom and personnel super-
vision, vocational teachers' conferences, curriculum construction and revision, selec-
tion and maintenance of equipment, establishing and using standards of achievement,
guidance selection, placement and follow-up programs will be covered in this course.

DE 654 COOPERATIVE VOCATIONAL EDUCATION 3 s.h.

To develop administrative procedures necessary for planning, organizing, and
coordinating cooperative vocational education programs Major topics include histor-
ical background of cooperative vocational education programs, program development,
supervision, public relations, the teacher coordinator and the )0b. labor laws governing
such a program, and desired educational outcomes. Leads to Cooperative Education
Teacher certification. Prerequisite; DE 653,

DE 699 INDEPENDENT STUDY IN DISTRIBUTIVE EDUCATION 1-3s,h,

Individual research and analysis of contemporary problems and issues in a concen-
trated area of study under the guidance of a senior faculty member. Prerequisite: Con-
sent of Instructor. Departmental Chairperson, and Dean. School of Business.

FINANCE/MIS

FS510 FINANCIAL INSTITUTIONS AND MARKETS 3 s.h.

Review of entire structure of financial institutions, money and capital markets, of
which the business enterprise is both a supply and demand factor, and structure and
dynamics of interest-rate movements Prerequisites: EC 325. FS 324

FS 520 INVESTMENT ANALYSIS 3 s.h.

Integrates the work of the various courses in the finance areas and familiarizes the
student with the tools and techniques of research in the different areas of investments.
Prerequisites: AG 301, FS 310, FS 324.

FS 522 SEMINAR IN FINANCE 3 s.h.

A course primarily for the senior Finance major, covering topics in all areas of
finance by using recent articles, cases, discussions, speakers and a financial simulation
game. Prerequisites: FS 310, FS 320, FS 324.

68 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

FS 550 DATA BASE THEORY AND APPLICATION 3 s.h.

The analysis of data structures and data base, management systems and their
implementation in COBOL. Prerequisite: CO 220 or FS 352, and FS 350.

FS 551 SYSTEMS ANALYSIS 3 s.h.

Develops understanding of concepts and techniques, involving conventional and
structured approaches to analyzing problems of business information systems, systems
definition feasibility, as well as quantitative and evaluative techniques of business infor-
mation systems analysis. Prerequisite: FS 352 or CO 220.

FS 570 SYSTEMS DESIGN 3 s.h.

Students learn tools and techniques for design of a business system. Along with
classroom discussions of principles and techniques for analyzing, designing, and con-
structing the system, students will formulate system teams to analyze the problems of an
existing business information system, to design an improved system and to control
implementation of new system. Prerequisite: FS 451/551, FS 450/550.

FS 580 DISTRIBUTED BUSINESS INFORMATION SYSTEMS 3 s h.

Prerequisite: FS 451 /551 or by instructor's permission.

FS581 SPECIAL TOPICS IN FINANCE OR MANAGEMENT

INFORMATION SYSTEMS 3 s.h.

Covers advanced or exploratory topics within the discipline. Specific content

developed by instructor. Content will vary depending upon the interests of instructor and

students with instructor choosing specific topics. May be repeated by specific approval.

Prerequisite: Permission of the instructor and Director of Graduate Studies in Business.

FS 601 QUANTITATIVE METHODS 3 s.h.

Introduction to the concepts and methods of scientific problem solving in manage-
ment. Students will learn to formulate mathematical models of complex decision
problems and to solve these problems using quantitative methods. Topics covered
include linear programming, inventory models, network models, waiting line models, and
simulation. Prerequisite: FS 215.

FS 602 SEMINAR IN MANAGEMENT SCIENCE 3 s.h.

Builds upon basic concepts developed in FS 601 dealing with the theory and appli-
cation of mathematical models in an organizational environment. This course is
intended student who will actually be working with such models in his/her future
occupation. Topics to be covered include: more advanced methods of linear program-
ming, non-linear programming, dynamic programming, and simulation. Prerequisites:
FS601. MA 121, MA 122.

FS 604 SEMINAR IN METHODOLOGY OF BUSINESS RESEARCH 3 s.h.

Designed to help students acquire a basic understanding of the research process
and a knowledge of the research methods needed in the design and execution of a
competent applied behavioral research. Emphasis will be on measurement and scaling,
survey research, and data analysis. Prerequisite: GR 516 or FS 601.

FS630 FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT 3 s.h.

An extension of basic managerial finance, dealing with the theory and practice of
analyzing companies, financial planning, capital budgeting, management of working
capital, and obtaining funds for the corporation. Prerequisite: FS 310.

FS 631 ADVANCED FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT 3 s.h.

Purpose IS to provide the business manager with various approaches and methods
for solving capital budgeting decisions and evaluating investment proposals. Topics will
include: capital budgeting techniques and applications, decisions under certainty and
uncertainty, capital rationing and methods of evaluating and classifying investments.
Prerequisites: FS 630

Programs and Courses — 69
Business

FS632 SEMINAR IN FINANCE 3 s.h.

Covers topics in all areas of finance by using recent articles, cases, discussions,
speakers, and a finance simulation game. Designed to bring together all aspects of
finance. Prerequisites: FS 630.

FS635 PRINCIPLES OF INVESTfVIENTS IN SECURITIES 3 s.h.

Introduces many forms of investment possibilities which exist. Attention is given to
operation of stock markets, concepts and terminology of investing, mutual funds and
their function, investment clubs and problems involved in making investments through
brokers, bankers, and stock promoters.

FS 640 MANAGEfvlENT INFORMATION SYSTEMS 3 s.h.

Introduces techniques involved in organizing computer-based management infor-
mation systems and the concepts of systems analysis and design including problem
definition, data gathering, information analysis, presentation techniques, implementa-
tion planning, systems control, and documentation is presented. Relationship between
these techniques and the management of modern business organization is stressed.
Exercises and case studies used to develop student's ability to usethe various systems
methods presented in solving informational problems of modern business. Prerequi-
sites: AG 202, FS 241 or equivalent.

FS 641 BUSINESS DATA PROCESSING I 3 s.h.

Covers the theory operation of remote computer terminals. The BASIC language is
used to write computer programs for Business Mathematics and Bookkeeping problems
for the Business Education and Distributive Education teacher. Interactive programs
utilizing the computer will be used for this training. Not open for students with credit for
FS 451/551.

FS 642 BUSINESS DATA PROCESSING II 3 s.h

Develop the principles of COBOL language programming with specific applications
for the teachers of Business and Distributive Education. The course builds upon the
basic concepts of data processing developed in FS 641 . Special emphasis placed on
computer-based instruction and programmed instruction as used with the remote
terminals. The value of library programs will be demonstrated. Prerequisite: FS 641 or
equivalent. Not open for students with credit for FS 470/570.

FS 681 SPECIAL TOPICS IN FINANCE OR MANAGEMENT

INFORMATION SYSTEMS 3' s.h.

Covers advanced or exploratory topics within the discipline. Specific content devel-
oped by instructor. Content will vary depending upon the interests of instructor and
students with instructor choosing specific topics. May be repeated by specific approval.
Prerequisite: Permission of the instructor and Director of Graduate Studies in Business.

FS 699 INDEPENDENT STUDY IN FINANCE OR MANAGEMENT

INFORMATION SYSTEMS 1-3 s.h.

Individual research and analysis of contemporary problems and issues in a concen-
trated area of study under the guidance of a senior faculty member. Prerequisite:
Consent of Instructor, Departmental Chairperson, and Dean, School of Business.

FS 850 THESIS 1-6 s.h.

For students writing a thesis, FS 850 should be scheduled for the semester in which
the student plans to complete his/her work. The thesis may be a non-committee thesis
(1-3 s.h.), with one faculty member serving as the student's adviser: or a committee
thesis (4-6 s.h.). for which the student's adviser, two additonal faculty members. Director
of Graduate Programs, and/or the representative of the Dean of the School of Business
may constitute the committee.

70 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

Management

MG 630 MANAGEMENT THEORY 3 s.h.

Study of development, nature, and meaning of basic functions of management.
Emphasis will be placed upon functional activities of an organization at all levels of
management and tfie application of these principles Prerequisite: MG 360-

MG 631 MANAGEMENT DEVELOPMENT AND TRAINING 3 s.h.

A survey of the major aspects, trends, and methodologies in management develop-
ment and training as these specializations are being practiced in the enterprises in the
advanced western nations. Prerequisite: MG 360.

MG 632 SEMINAR IN PERSONNEL 3 s.h.

Designed to offer the MBA student the opportunity to research, study, and discuss
various theories, principles, concepts and issues of current interest to business and
personnel managers. The case method will be emphasized and the focus or theme of
the seminar may be different each time it is offered. Prerequisite: MG 360.

MG 633 ORGANIZATIONAL ANALYSIS 3 s.h.

An integrative course oriented toward an empirical analysis of the phenomena and
theories of large, complex, formal organizations Intergroup phenomena are also treated
as they pertain to the larger organization. Special study is made of the organization as an
economic, social decision-making, bureaucratic and political system. The analysis and
design of organizations is viewed from a number of perspectives including classical
theory and case analysis to illustrate and extend the major topics of the course.
Prerequisite: MG 360

MG 635 SEMINAR IN MANAGEMENT AND ORGANIZATIONAL

LEADERSHIP 3 s.h.

Studies of theory and research in the leadership of groups and organizations with
application to the management fields of business, industry and labor. The debate,
research, and study of controversial leadership issues of current interest to manage-
ment and preparation of a research paper by the student in his/her occupational
interest area is required. Prerequisite: MG 311 and Permission of Department Chair-
person and/or Instructor.

MG 636 THE EVOLUTION OF MANAGEMENT 3 s.h.

This course examines the backgrounds, roles and influences of major contributors
and analyzes the various trends and movements in management thought. Prerequisite:
MG 360.

MG 642 HUMAN RELATIONS IN BUSINESS 3 s.h.

Study of human motivations and their constructive application to all aspects of busi-
ness. Psychological basis of human relations will be developing as it applies in the busi-
ness world. Major topics include employer-employee relations, labor relations, stock-
holder relations, customer relations, community relations and public relations. Prerequi-
site: MG 360,

MG 645 CASE PROBLEMS IN BUSINESS HUMAN RELATIONS 3 s,h.

Application of principles of personnel management in solution of problems in human
relations. Students will be required to solve realistic problems in human relations found
at all echelons of management. Emphasis will be placed on actual problems
encountered m day-to-day work activities Prerequisite: MG 642 or equivalent,

MG 681 SPECIAL TOPICS IN MANAGEMENT 3 s h.

Covers advanced or exploratory topics within the discipline Specific content devel-
oped by instructor. Content will vary depending upon the interests of instructor and
students with instructor choosing specific topics May be repeated by specific approval.
Prerequisite: Permission of the instructor and Director of Graduate Studies in Business,

Programs and Courses — 71
Business

MG 699 INDEPENDENT STUDY IN MANAGEMENT 1 -3 s.h.

With the approval of the department, students will select one or more topics of critical
importance in the field and will meet with faculty for independent reading, analysis, and
evaluation. (Prerequisites; approvals of department chairperson and Director of
Graduate Programs).

MG 850 THESIS 1 -6 s.h.

For students writing the thesis, MG 850 should be scheduled for the semester in
which the student plans to complete his/her work The thesis may be a non-committee
thesis (1 -3 s.h.), with one faculty member serving as the student's adviser, or a commit-
tee thesis (4-6 s.h), for which the student's adviser, two additional faculty members,
Director of Graduate Programs, and/or the representative of the Dean of the School of
Business may constitute the committee.

Marketing

MK 521 MARKETING RESEARCH 3 s.h.

Research procedures and techniques applicable to problem solving in the marketing
field. Critical analysis of research techniques with considerable emphasis placed on the
use of information gathered. Prerequisite: MK 320

MK 530 INTERNATIONAL MARKETING 3 s.h.

International marketing is analyzed, with consideration given to the significance of
government regulation, organization structures of export and import enterprises, and
credit policies. Prerequisite: MK 321.

MK 531 INDUSTRIAL MARKETING 3 s.h.

Considers major activities involved in marketing of industrial goods and services.
Prerequisite: MK 320.

MK 600 MARKETING 3 s.h.

Study of risks, costs, and methodsof distribution including analysis of such problems
as research, competition, pricing, and laws in marketing goods from manufacturer to
producer to consumer. Prerequisite: MK 320.

MK 601 SALES PROMOTION AND ADVERTISING 3 s.h.

Basic principles of sales promotion and advertising together with consideration of
the major problems encountered in management of activities. Emphasized determina-
tion of basic promotional strategy, selection of advertising media; determining adver-
tising appropriations; and, advertising research. Prerequisite: MK 320.

MK 603 MARKETING MANAGEMENT 3 s.h.

An analytical and quantitative approach to decision-making the planning, devel-
opment, implementation and control of marketing program. Prerequisite: MK 320.

MK 681 SPECIAL TOPICS IN MARKETING 3 S.h.

Covers advanced or exploratory topics within teh discipline. Specific content devel-
oped by instructor Content will vary depending upon the interests of instructor and stu-
dents with instructor choosing specific topics. May be repeated by specific approval.
Prerequisite: Permission of the instructor and Director of Graduate Studies in Business.

MK 699 INDEPENDENT STUDY IN MARKETING 1-3 s.h.

With the approval of the department, students will select one or more topics of critical
importance in the field and will meet with faculty for independent reading, analysis, and
evaluation. (Prerequisites: approvals of department chairperson and Director of Gradu-
ate Programs.)

72 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

MK 850 THESIS 1-6s.h.

For students writing the ttiesis, MK 850 should be scheduled for the semester in
which the student plans to complete his/her work The thesis may be a non-committee
thesis (1 -3s,h ), with one faculty member serving as the student's adviser; or a commit-
tee thesis (4-6 s.h.), for which the student's adviser, two additional faculty members,
Director of Graduate Programs, and/or the representative of the Dean of the School of
Business may constitute the committee

CHEMISTRY

The Chennistry Department offers tfiree different degree programs on the
master's level: the Master of Education, Master of Science, and the Master of
Arts degrees in chemistry.

The Master of Education program is designed for the secondary school
teacher, affording the teacher the opportunity to gam more knowledge of
chemistry and keep abreast of a rapidly changing field. The major emphasis is
on subject matter. The student may enroll on either a full- or part-time basis.

The Master of Science degree is for the chemist who intends to pursue
further graduate work leading to a PhD or who intends to work as a profes-
sional chemist and desires to become more competent in chemistry This
degree is research oriented and successful completion of an experimental
thesis IS required. Also two consecutive semesters of residency are required.

The Master of Arts degree is designed to meet the needs of the chemist
who is currently a full-time employee of the chemical or academic institution
and who wishes strengthening in those areas relevant to the professional
position The emphasis here is on course work.

Four core courses, one in each of the areas of inorganic, organic, ana-
lytical, and physical chemistry, are required in the MS and MA programs.*
Beyond this point the programs separate with the MS and MA student taking
more specialized work in chemistry along with an experimental research prob-
lem. The MEd candidate will take broadening courses which increase the
effectiveness of a teacher. The MA candidate will take more specialized work
in chemistry and will be encouraged to take courses outside the sciences if
they are relevant to the particular area of employment.

General Admissions Requirements — Students should have completed
one year each of general chemistry, analytical chemistry, organic chemistry,
physical chemistry.*' general physics, and calculus. Students wishing to
specialize in biochemistry should also have had an undergraduate course in
biochemistry. Students deficient in the above areas of study may also be
admitted provided these deficiencies are made up concurrently with the stu-
dent's graduate studies.

The general requirements for admission to candidacy for a master s
degree are discussed on page 25 ot the bulletin.

*An exception to this is afforded the student wishing to specialize in bio-
chemistry.
**Only one semester of physical chemistry is required for education majors.

Programs and Courses — 73
Chemistry

MASTER OF ARTS IN CHEMISTRY

I, Industrial/Teaching Experience: Before the degree of MA in chemistry can
be granted the applicant must have had three years of full-time employ-
ment in an approved area of chemistry. Only those years of employment
acquired after obtaining the bachelor's degree may be counted. This
experience meets the University residency requirements.

II. Course requirements include 1 4 hours in the following: CH 540, 600*, 61 0,
620, and 630.

III. Course electives (10-16 s.h.) — Any graduate level courses selected from
the natural sciences and mathematics with the permission of the candi-
date's adviser. Special permission from the Chemistry Department's Grad-
uate Committee will be required for courses outside the sciences.

IV. Thesis Requirements (zero, two, or four s.h.):
The student has three options:

A. Thesis not required — a total of 30 s.h. in suitable courses being accept-
able.

B. No-Committee Thesis (CH 850-two s.h.) — Refer to page , for the
steps in satisfying the research requirement for submitting a "Two- Hour,
No-Committee Thesis."

C. Committee Thesis (Ch 850-four s.h.) — If the candidate is doing
research as part of the full-time employment, the research may be sub-
mitted as a thesis, provided approval is given in advance by the employ-
er, and the Chemistry Graduate Committee. The candidate's employ-
ment supervisor may serve as an ex-officio member of the thesis com-
mittee,

*The MA candidate is not required to attend all of the day time seminars, but is
required to present two seminars and is expected to attend the evening
seminars.

MASTER OF EDUCATION IN CHEMISTRY

Students working for this degree will complete a minimum of 30 semester
hours of work in accordance with the following division:

I. Subject Area and/or Thesis — 15-18 s.h

A. Elective Chemistry Courses — 1 1 -1 8 s.h of work selected from CH 500
and CH 600 level courses.

B. Thesis — zero-four s h After consultation with the adviser, the student
may choose:

1. No thesis (if the student chooses this option he/she must earn a
minimum of 18 s.h. in A above )

2. A no-committee thesis — CH 850-two s.h.

3. A committee thesis — CH 850-four s.h.

74 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

II. Professional Develpment Area — nine s.h.

A. Humanistic Studies — three sennester hours in one course selected
from the following: FE 61 1 , 61 2, 61 3, or 51 4.

B. Behavioral Studies — three s.h. in one course selected from the fol-
lowing: EP 604, 573, 576, 578, 580, CE 639, or EX 631.

C. Research — three s.h. required of all students GR 615.

III. Specialization Core — six s.h. — CH 505 and one of the following courses:
FE515, CM 600, or CH 605.

For description of FE courses, see section on FOUNDATIONS OF EDU-
CATION; for EP courses, EDUCATIONAL PSYCHOLOGY; for CE course,
COUNSELOR EDUCATION; for EX course, SPECIAL EDUCATION; for CM
course, COMMUNICATIONS MEDIA.

For description of GR courses, see entry under "GENERAL SERVICE
COURSES," page 41.

MASTER OF SCIENCE IN CHEMISTRY

I. Residence Requirements: The student shall be in residence a minimum of
two consecutive semesters of full-time work. Students working as graduate
assistants and /or making up deficiencies can expect to be in residence for
at least two years.

II. Course Requirements: For those specializing in analytical, inorganic,
organic, or physical chemistry:

A. Required Courses (15 s.h.): The four core courses of analytical, CH 620;
inorganic, CH 610; organic, CH 630; and physical, CH 540, and one
additional three hour course designated by a chemistry 600 number
selected from one of the four areas of analytical, inorganic, organic, or
phyical chemistry,

B. Electives (six s.h.)

The electives may be selected from the areas of chemistry, physics,
biology, and mathematics by the student with the advice and approval
of the adviser.

CH 500, Special Studies, can provide a maximum of three semester
hours toward the 30 semester hours necessary for the degree.

III. Course Requirements: For those specializing in biochemistry

A. Required Courses (12 s.h.), including CH 646, 623, 630, and 81 662.

B. Electives (at least nine s.h.), including at least one of the following:
Bl 561 , 553, 652, 653, or 654 and any graduate courses in the natural
sciences or mathematics mutually agreed upon by the student and
adviser.

IV. Research and Thesis Requirements:

A. The research work must lead to an acceptable thesis, approved by the
student's adviser and supervisory committee, and defended in a final
oral examination.

B. Seminar — two s.h. required in CH 600.

C. CH 690 for at least three hours.

D. CH 850 Thesis — four s.h., taken during the term in which the student is
writing the MS thesis.

For description of Bl courses, see section on BIOLOGY.

Programs and Courses — 75
Chemistry

COURSE DESCRIPTIONS

General

CH 500 SPECIAL STUDIES 1-6 s.h.

Intensive survey of literature in a particular area as well as individual instruction on
recent advances in chemical instrumentation, methods of research, and specialized
subject areas. To be arranged with instructor

CH 502 CHEMISTRY IN MANUFACTURING PROCESSES 3 s.h.

A course on the applications of chemistry to manufacturing processes. Lecture and
field trips Lecture — three hours

CH 503 GLASSBLOWING TECHNIQUES 1 s.h.

Introduces science student to techniques necessary for construction and modifi-
cation of scientific glass aparatus. Two hours lecture instruction.

CH 505 NEW APPROACHES TO TEACHING

HIGH SCHOOL CHEMISTRY 3 s.h.

Chem Study and C.B.A. approaches will be investigated. Individualization of
chemistry and application of various teaching materials and techniques used in indi-
vidualizing chemistry. Environmental chemistry and other relevant topics to better
understand the chemical basis of our current environmental problems. Four hours
lecture/laboratory.

CH 576 RADIOCHEMISTRY 3 s.h.

Basic aspects of nuclear structure, phenomena of radioactive isotopes and chem-
ical effects on such isotopes. Concurrent lab work utilizing instruments for detection and
measurement of radioactive nuclides used in chemical experimentation. Four hours
lecture/laboratory.

CH 600 SEMINAR 1 s.h.

A study of modern chemical research and research techniques. Scientific communi-
cation, including the role of the science laboratory in research. The student will present
one oral report. Lecture — one hour.

CH 605 EXPERIMENTAL TECHNIQUES IN CHEMISTRY 3 s.h.

Experimentation, observation and application of scientific concepts. Classroom and
lecture demonstrations will be prepared, presented and evaluated by students and
instructor. Prerequisites: Chemistry I, II, Physics 1, II. Four hours lecture/laboratory,

CH 633 CHEMICAL LITERATURE 3 s.h.

Periodicals, encyclopedias, handbooks, abstracting journals, and other sources
dealing with various divisions of chemistry will be studied. Students are required to con-
duct a literature search on a selected topic. Lecture — three hours.

CH 690 RESEARCH 1-6 s.h.

Laboratory and literature investigation of the student's thesis problem done under the
direction of a faculty member.

Within the first 1 5 hours of course work, the student must schedule at least one credit
of research for which the student performs the literature review and writes a research
proposal.

CH 699 INDEPENDENT STUDY 1 -6 s.h.

Available to students who seek to deepen their knowledge in some specific aspect of
chemistry The student must discuss the nature of the independent study with a faculty
member having expertise in the area prior to registration. Special attention to develop-
ment of new ideas and new ways of presenting scientific principles.

7Q — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

CH 850 THESIS 2 or 4 s.h.

For students writing the thesis. Should be scheduled for the sennester in which the
student plans to complete work. May be a non-committee thesis (2 s.h.) with one faculty
member serving as adviser; or a committee thesis (4 s.h.), for which the student's
adviser, two additional faculty members and the Dean of the School of Natural Sciences
and Mathematics constitute the committee.

Inorganic

CH512 INORGANIC PREPARATIONS 3 s.h.

Preparation of inorganic compounds expressing different techniques of synthesis.
Designed for those students who have chosen to do inorganic research but have never
had a prep course. Four hours lecture-laboratory.

CH610 INORGANIC CHEMISTRY (core course) 3 s.h.

Theoretical inorganic chemistry and in particular, structure, periodicity, coordination
chemistry, bonding and chemistry or non-aqueous solvents. Lecture — three hours

CH611 COORDINATION CHEMISTRY 3sh

Chemistry of transition metals, their compounds and complex ions Lecture — three
hours.

CH615 CURRENT TOPICS IN INORGANIC CHEMISTRY 3 s h.

Representative elements, chemistry of rare earth elements, inorganic spectroscopy,
group theory or any other special areas of chemical interest.

Analytical

CH 521 ADVANCED INSTRUMENTAL METHODS OF ANALYSIS 3 s h.

Modern instrumental analysis including electrical, spectrophotometric, x-ray, gas
chromatography, and other methods. (Open to MS and MA candidates by permission
only.) Four hours of lecture-laboratory

CH 620 ANALYTICAL CHEMISTRY (core course) 3 s.h.

Theoretical principles of analytical chemistry. Lecture — three hours.

CH 621 ELECTROANALYTICAL CHEMISTRY 3 s.h.

Theoretical and practical considerations of polarography. potentiometric, amphero-
metric, coulometnc, and conductometric methods of chemical analysis. Lecture — two
hours — four-hour lab.

CH 622 SPECTROCHEMICAL METHODS OF ANALYSIS 3 s.h.

Study of instrumentation and analytical applications of ultravioletand visible absorp-
tion, atomic spectrometry, fluorescence, x-spectrometry, and nuclear magnetic
resonance. Lecture — two hours — four-hour lab.

CH 623 PHYSICAL AND CHEMICAL METHODS OF SEPARATION 3 s.h.

Application of chromatographic methods to the quantitative separation and analysis
of chemical systems. Topics will include gas, column, paper and ion exchange chroma-
tographic methods and other methods of separation as time permits. Lecture — two
hours — four-hour lab.

Programs and Courses — 77
Chemistry

Organic

CH 531 ORGANIC QUALITATIVE ANALYSIS 3 s.h.

Gives student experience in systematic identification of various classes of organic
compounds by both chemical and physical methods Four hours lecture-laboratory.

CH 535 CURRENT TOPICS IN ORGANIC CHEMISTRY 3 s.h

With selections to meet the needs and interests of the students, possible topics may
include: reaction mechanisms, molecular spectroscopy, stereochemistry, natural prod-
ucts, heterocyclics, polymer chemistry, and organic synthesis

CH 630 ORGANIC CHEMISTRY (core course) 3 s h

Principles of physical chemistry will be applied to the study of organic reaction
mechanisms Lecture — three hours

Physical Chemistry

CH 540 PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY (core course) 3 s h

An introduction to chemical bonding and molecular structure Lecture — three hours

CH 641 STATISTICAL THERMODYNAMICS 3sh

The application of statistical mechanics to chemical systems Lecture — three
hours.

CH 642 CHEMICAL KINETICS 3 s h.

An introduction to empirical and theoretical chemical kinetics. Lecture — three
hours.

CH 643 OUANTUM CHEMISTRY 3 s h.

An introduction to quantum theory and its application to atomic and molecular struc-
ture and spectroscopy Lecture — three hours.

CH 645 CURRENT TOPICS IN PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY 3 s.h

With selection to meet the needs and interests of the student, possible topics may
include: quantum mechanics, molecular structure, chemical thermodynamics, statisti-
cal mechanics and chemical kinetics

Biochemistry

CH 646 BIOCHEMISTRY 3 s.h

Topics covering and emphasizing most recent developments in the areas of bio-
chemistry such as ammo acids, carbohydrates, lipids, nucleic acids, proteins, enzymes,
metabolism and metabolic control Lecture — three hours.

CH 651 BIOCHEMISTRY TOPICS 3 s.h.

A discussion of areas such as carbohydrates, lipids, amino acids, proteins, nucleic
acids, kinetics, and metabolism. Lecture — three hours.

CH 652 ENZYMES 3 s.h.

A study of enzymes to include isolation, kinetics, classification, specificity,
mechanisms, cofactors, structure and formation Lecture — three hours

78 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

COMMUNICATIONS MEDIA

In the Communications Media Department, the student may choose from
the following programs:

I. Master of Education in Communications Media
II. Instructional Media Specialist Certificate

Students pursuing careers in medical communications, business or
industrial training as well as educational communications have the oppor-
tunity to choose a course of study that most effectively prepares them for entry
into that profession. To this end, the department's modern facilities and profes-
sional staff will provide students the opportunity to do intensive work in photog-
raphy, cinematography, graphic production, radio, television, instructional
design and development, media management or such combinations of these
areas as students may desire to accomplish their goals. In many of these
courses, students gam actual work experience in the design, production and
evaluation of training, promotional and educational materials for local busi-
ness, industrial, educational and medical communities. Culmination of the
academic experience is an internship experience in which students have the
opportunity to apply theory to practice.

All departmental offerings are distributed within the following course con-
centration blocks. These blocks are to serve as guides only for choosing those
courses that are consistent with the student's goals. Students may elect
courses from all three blocks or may choose to concentrate on only one.

Students are encouraged to consult their adviser and course instructors at
frequent intervals, especially during the schedule planning stage prior to pre-
registration. For cufrent curriculum information, students should contact the
department chairperson.

Block A. Media Management: CM 630, CM 660, CM 669, EL 656, AD 642

Block B. Media Production: CM 504, CM 505, CM 509, CM 540, CM 543,
CM 544, CM 545, CM 547, CM 548, CM 550, CM 551 , CM 552, CM 571 ,
CM 572, CM 573

Block C. Instructional Development: CM 503, CM 600, CM 601 , CM 602,
CM 615, CM 561, FE 515, ED 607, EL 631, EL 655.

MASTER OF EDUCATION

IN COMMUNICATIONS MEDIA

In addition to being admitted to The Graduate School, the student must
have taken the ORE (aptitude test only). Students wishing to transfer from
another graduate program at lUP to this program must have at least a B
average in graduate courses taken here. The applicant may then be asked to
come for an interview with the departmental Graduate Committee and if
accepted, a tentative program will be planned. While some basic media com-

Programs and Courses — 79
Communication Media

petencies as might be obtained in an audiovisual course are preferred of all
applicants, such experience is not a requirement for acceptance into the pro-
gram. Where lacking, these competencies will be built into the student's pro-
gram of study.

I. Master of Education in Media Program

A. Professional Development Area (nine s.h.)

1 Humanistic Studies (three s.h.) one of FE 61 1 , 61 2. 61 3, 51 4

2, Behavioral Studies (three s.h.) one of EP 604, 573, 576, 578, 580. or
CE 629, CE 639, EX 631, or PC 636

3. Research (three s.h.) GR 615

B. Specialization Core (six s.h.) CM 503 and 615

C. Subject Area

1 CM 669 Internship (two s.h. minimum) required of all media majors.

2. Student elected concentrations from Blocks A, B or C. Dependent
upon terminal option (see below) selected, student will take 12-18
s.h. media courses specializing in one block or taking a variety of
courses from Media Management. Media Production or Media and
Instructional Development Blocks.

3. Options

a. Thesis — 30 s.h. including all of A, B, and C-1 above, plus thesis.

b. Course work — 36 s.h. including all of A, B, and C-1 above, plus
electives to total 36 hours.

For description of FE courses, see section on FOUNDATIONS OF
EDUCATION; for EP courses, EDUCATIONAL PSYCHOLOGY; for CE
courses, COUNSELOR EDUCATION; for EX course, SPECIAL EDUCATION;
for PC course, PSYCHOLOGY

For description of GR courses, see entry under "GENERAL SERVICE
COURSES, page 41.

M. Certification as an Instructional Media Specialist

The specialist certificate in Instructional Media may be awarded to
students who hold at least a Pennsylvania Level I or equivalent certificate
valid for elementary or secondary education and who complete 24
semester hours of graduate work in the curriculum of Communications
Media and related subjects. With the approval of an adviser, each student
will select a balance of courses from each of the two course concentration
blocks described earlier; however, CM 503, 61 5, 630. 660. and 669 must be
included in the courses selected. Application for the Certificate is made
through the Communications Media Department to the Pennsylvania
Department of Public Instruction.

By careful structuring of their program it is possible for students to obtain
both the MEd degree and the Instructional Media Specialist Certification
concurrently. Usually this will require slightly more than the 30 semester
hours of minimum credits required for the MEd but students often find it to
their advantage to fulfill the requirements for both programs.

Graduate school admission does not automatically ensure acceptance
into the certificate program. Successful applicants will present evidence of
(1 ) the intellectual ability to do acceptable graduate work. (2) satisfactory

80 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

scores on the GRE, and (3) the requisite personal qualifications of char-
acter, health, and professional background. The departmental graduate
faculty will make the necessary determinations.

COURSE DESCRIPTIONS

CM 503 DESIGN AND WRITING FOR

MEDIA PRODUCTIONS 3 s.h.

Provides an introduction to script writing for films and filmstrips. Various styles and

techniques of writing will be analyzed and each student will be expected to experiment

with the techniques presented. Emphasis on writing and criticism, in class, of student

script.

CM 504 FOUNDATIONS OF BROADCASTING 3 s.h.

An examination of the historical, legal, and economical aspects of modern broad-
casting. Extensive readings in fundamental theory and a study of current station and
network practices, educational as well as commercial

CM 505 INTRODUCTION TO RADIO BROADCASTING 3 s h

Examination of historical, legal and economic aspects of modern broadcasting.
Extensive readings in fundamental theory and study of current station and network
practices, educational as well as commercial.

CM 509 PROGRAMMING MULTI-IMAGE MATERIALS 3 s.h.

Introduction to scripting, storyboarding and production of multi-image presentations.

Major emphasis on students producing their own three-screen, six projector program

through the use of computer programming equipment. Prerequisite; CM 571, CM 503.

CM 540 COMMUNICATIONS GRAPHICS 3 s.h.

Provides basic experiences in planning and producing commonly used television
studio, industrial display and classroom graphics which are applicable in educational,
industrial and medical training programs Experiences include layout and lettering;
color; mounting and laminating techniques; copying techniques such as Thermofax,
photography and Xerography; photo silk screening and photo sketching.

CM 543 SLIDE AND FILMSTRIP PRODUCTION 3 s.h.

Emphasizes techniques of color and b/w slide preparation, duplication, titling and
binding; techniques necessary to produce color filmstrips on a commercial basis, and
students will participate in making of a filmstrip through all stages, from scriptto screen.
Techniques for making home-made filmstrips will also be explored. Each student must
furnish own 35 mm camera, and an acceptable exposure meter Prerequisite; CM 571
Photographic Fundamentals

CM 544 BEGINNING MOTION PICTURE PRODUCTION 3 s.h.

Emphasis on effective use of motion picture camera and editing tools to make useful,
locally produced teaching films No previous experience is necessary, but student
should own or have access to an 8mm or 1 6mm camera, and an acceptable exposure
meter.

CM 545 ADVANCED MOTION PICTURE PRODUCTION 3 s.h.

Production planning for motion pictures, directing, advanced picture and sound
editing techniques, and use of sound recording and lab facilities. In addition to live action
cenematography, titling, animation, and special effects photography will be
investigated. Prerequisite: CM 544.

Programs and Courses — 81
Communication Media

CM 547 ANIMATION 3 S.h.

Introduces a variety of motion picture aninnation techniques and offers practical
experience in planning and carrying out production of animated sequences. Experi-
mentation with filmograph, cut-out, puppet, and full eel animation. Practice in designing,
drawing, tracing, inking, and painting cells; preparation of blackboards, use of eel
boards; animation camera, and stand: preparation of story boards and cue sheets;
integration of visual and sound. Prerequisite: CM 544.

CM 548 WRITING FOR RADIO AND TELEVISION 3 s.h.

For teachers, school administrators, and non-school persons interested in public
service, non-professional, or educational broadcasting. Presents theory and practice in
planning, writing, and producing various kinds of programs for listeners in and out of
schools. Educational and/or radio experience is desirable but not required.

CM 550 ADVANCED AUDIO RECORDING TECHNIQUES 3 s.h.

Theory and practice of recording sound for motion pictures, video tapes, audio
tapes, sound filmstrips, etc. Will use sound on sound and other special recording
techniques.

CM 551 TELEVISION PRODUCTION AND DIRECTION 3 s.h.

Intensive lab course using closed circuit facilities designed to develop skills in pro-
gram production and direction. Theory and practice of production is examined with each
student expected to produce a television program during the course.

CM 552 ADVANCED TELEVISION PRODUCTION 3 s.h.

For advanced graduate student with prior training and experience in television.
Advanced television production techniques, set design, lighting, remote video taping,
special effects, and production of a professional quality documentary. Prerequisite: CM
551.

CM 561 LEARNING SYSTEMS DESIGN 3 s.h.

Introduction to elements of systems approach to learning system design. For people
involved in any level of instruction such as teachers, industrial, government and social
trainers. Participants will have opportunity to study and carefully plan a learning system
according to accepted phases of analysis, design and evaluation.

CM 571 PHOTOGRAPHIC FUNDAMENTALS 3 s.h.

Emphasis on use still picture camera and the darkroom for instructional purposes,
the making of b/w negatives, 35mm slides, copywork, developing b/w and color film,
and b/w contact printing and enlarging. Each student must furnish own 35mm camera
and an acceptable exposure meter. Camera must have manual focusing and manual
exposure setting capability. No previous photographic experience is necessary,

CM 572 PHOTOGRAPHY II; THE PRINT 3 s.h.

Students in Photography II; The Print will be expected to develop their camera and
print-making skills to the degree that they can produce solon-quality photographic
prints. Students will understand the photographic processes utilized in producing a high
quality negative and print to the extent that they can manipulate those processes to
communicate on intended message with their photographs. Emphasis will be placed on
camera and print control as well as composition and negative and print manipulation.
Prerequisites: CM 571 and permission of the instructor.

CM 573 CREATIVE DARKROOM TECHNIQUES 3 s h.

Student will pursue on an individual basis those photographic skills which he/she
wants to develop to a high proficiency Topics to be covered in lecture include high-
contrast photography, silk screen photography, tone line, bas relief, posterization, etch
bleach, photo sketching, print screening, color print and slide making, lighting tech-
niques and flash photography as well as other topics that might be pertinent to meeting a
student's objectives. Prerequisites; CM 571 and permission of the instructor.

82 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

CM 600 SEMINAR IN LEARNING RESOURCES 3 s.h.

Major emphasis on differences in learning materials, learning and teachiing metfiods.
The student will do literary research for a better understanding of how learning
resources are related to learning process in our society.

CM 601 THE CLASSROOM USE OF MOTION PICTURES 3 s.h.

Develops a basis for critical evaluation of films for various educational purposes.
Emphasis on an understanding of production techniques, stereotypes, prejudices, and
misconceptions which influence the quality of educational films.

CM 602 PROGRAMMING SYSTEMATIC INSTRUCTION 3 s h.

Will cover historical development theory and philosophy, audio instructional equip-
ment, programmed texts, theories of programming, types of programs available,
analysis and evaluation of research,

CM 615 ROLE OF LEARNING RESOURCES 3 s h.

Examines role of perception as it pertains to sensory experiences and inner
cognitive processes in relationship to maturation, goals and drives, and environment.
Seeks to relate psychological processes to learning resources, with emphasis on newer
media.

CM 630 CLASSIFICATION AND CATALOGING OF

LEARNING RESOURCES 3 s.h.

Principles of classifying and cataloging learning resources such as motion pictures,

video tapes, filmstrips, slides, transparencies, disk and tape recordings, microfilm,

microcard and microfiche, flat pictures, etc. For learning resources administrators and

librarians.

CM 660 MANAGEMENT OF LEARNING RESOURCES

PROGRAMS 3 s.h.

Considers the pcoblems in setting up and managing an integrated program, including
production, selection, utilization, and management of Learning Resources Centers: and
problems of finance and organization of the different services; relationships among
school systems, colleges, and community and adult groups; and evaluation standards
for various services.

CM 669 INTERNSHIP PROGRAM OF LEARNING

RESOURCES SPECIALISTS 2-6 s.h.

A candidate would work in a carefully planned variety of roles in a comprehensive
regional learning resources center or similar situation, television broadcasting or
closed-circuit facility, motion picture production agency, programmed learning devel-
opment organization learning resources workshop program, little theater group, major
museum or approved equivalent, under competent university and agency supervision,
and would be rated by both the cooperating agency and the University.

CM 699 GRADUATE INDEPENDENT STUDY 1-3 s.h.

The student may elect, with approval of adviser, to do several different independent
study projects University facilities and equipment are provided but student must apply
materials and pay for processing and production costs. Prerequisite: Successful com-
pletion of the basic courses in the medium selected, the professor's approval

Programs and Courses — 83
Communication Media
Computer Science

COMPUTER SCIENCE

The Computer Science Department does not currently offer a program
leading to a master's or doctoral degree. Graduate courses are offered as dual
level with undergraduate courses.

COURSE DESCRIPTIONS

CE 502 COMPUTERS IN EDUCATION 3 s.h.

Introduction to computers and computer programming in the language BASIC, with
emphasis on applications in education: general models for computer usage in educa-
tion, and educational institutions, case studies of specific projects in terms of approach,
effectiveness, and implications for the future. No computer prerequisites.

CO 510 PROCESSOR ARCHITECTURE AND MICROPROGRAMMING 3 s.h.

The logical description of computer processor structure (architecture), with

emphasis on the microprogramming approach. Project assignments using the

Microdata 1 600 minicomputer at microlevel. Prerequisite: Permission of the instructor.

CO 520 MODERN COMPUTER LANGUAGES 3 s.h.

Comparative study of the properties and applications of a range of modern higher
level programming languages, including APL, SNOBOL, PL/I, ALGOL 60. PASCAL,
LISP, and TRAC Comparison with older languages such as BASIC. FORTRAN. COBOL,
and RPG. Prerequisite: Permission of the instructor.

CO 530 INTRODUCTION TO SYSTEMS PROGRAMMING 3 s.h.

Concepts and techniques of systems programming with an emphasis on assembly
and compilation of user programs. Representation of source language so as to facilitate
the needed translation process. Exercises using the University computer and the
departmental minicomputer and microcomputer. Prerequisites: Permission of the
instructor,

CO 540 LARGE FILE ORGANIZATION AND ACCESS 3 s.h.

The organization of large computer files for business systems, information systems,
and other applications. Use of COBOL and Assembler for efficient file access. Evalua-
tion of file access. Prerequisite Permission of the instructor.

CO 541 DATA BASE MANAGEMENT 3 S.h.

Review of data base concepts. Detailed study of data base management approaches.
Comparative presentation of commercially available data base management systems.
Prerequisites: Permission of the instructor.

CO 550 APPLIED NUMERICAL METHODS 3 S.h.

Polynomial approximations using finite differences: applications in numerical
integration and differentiation. Numerical solution of initial value ordinary differential
equations: boundary value problems: difference methods for partial differential equa-
tions. The APL language will be introduced and used, along with FORTRAN, in program-
ming selected algorithms. Prerequisites: Computer Programming, Linear Algebra, and
Ordinary Differential Equations

CO 551 NUMERICAL ANALYSIS 3 s.h.

Theory of polynomial approximation: applications to quadrature formulae. Numerical
solution of linear systems and computation of eigenvalues and eigenvectors using
matrix transformation methods. Selected topics from differential equations, linear
programming, rational approximations, and Monte Carlo techniques. Prerequisite: CO
550.

84 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

CO 560 THEORY OF COMPUTATION 3 s.h.

Formal methods for describing and analyzing programming languages and
algorithms; Backus-Naur forms; productions; regular expressions; introduction to
automata theory; Turing machines; recent concepts in algorithm theory. Prerequisite;
Permission of the instructor.

CO 581 SPECIAL TOPICS IN COMPUTER SCIENCE 3 S.h.

Seminar in advanced topics from Computer Science; content will vary depending on

the interests of the instructor and students (consult department for currently planned

topics). May be repeated for additional credit. Prerequisite; Permission of the instructor,

CO 601 FUNDAMENTALS OF COMPUTER PROGRAMMING 3 s.h.

Introduction to digital computer programming. Development of problem solving skills
using flowcharting and a problem oriented language, such as FORTRAN, Four to five
programs required. Description of a large problem from students field of interest for
possible computer solution.

CONSUMER SERVICES

Graduate courses in Consumer Services are prinnarily designed to provide
in-depth study in particular areas of home economics. A graduate degree in
Consumer Services in pending. Credits in these courses may be used towards
a degree in Home Economics Education.

COURSE DESCRIPTIONS

OS 533 CONSUMER SERVICES STUDY TOUR 1 -6 s.h.

Offered to broaden the scope of experience and understanding of fashion in clothing,
textiles, and interior design. Historic costumes, textiles, and decorative arts are viewed.
Fashion houses, designer salons, cottage industry centers, retail stores and museums
are visited,

CS 534 QUALITY CONTROL IN TEXTILES 3 s,h.

Physical properties explored through microscopic examination and use of textile
testing equipment for fabric analysis. Prerequisite; CS 31 4 Textiles or equivalent. Two
lecture hours, two laboratory hours,

CS 553 FLAT PATTERN DESIGN 3 s,h.

Garment design achieved by use of flat pattern techniques. An understanding is
developed for the interrelationships of garment design, fabric, fit, and construction
processes. Two major projects required One hour lecture, three hours laboratory.

CS 554 TAILORING 3 s.h.

Various tailoring methods are studied and applied in the selection, fitting, and con-
struction ot a tailored garment. Consumer problems m the selection of ready-to-wear
apparel are investigated, A research study or special project is required. One hour
lecture, three hour laboratory.

Programs and Courses — 85
Consumer Services

CS555 DRAPING 3 s.h.

In-depth study of the principles involved in fashion design, draping principles, and the
manipulation of fabric to conform to the human figure. Students will pad a form to indi-
vidual measurements and design garments that are both individual and original. Two
major projects required. One hour lecture, three hours laboratory.

CS556 HISTORIC COSTUME 3 s h.

Chronological study of historic costume from ancient times to the present day,
emphasizing style details as well as social, economic, political, religious, and aesthetic
influences on design of clothing. Three lecture hours.

OS 561 MICROWAVE COOKING TECHNOLOGY 3 s.h.

Study of the electronic technology, selection, care and use of the microwave oven.
Basic physical and chemical concepts related to microwave cooking will be included.
Individual investigative research problems will be required. Two lecture hours plus two
lab hours per week.

OS 562 HISTORIC INTERIORS 3 s.h.

Chronological study from ancient times to the mid-19th Century of the dominant
influences and characteristics of historical interiors, furniture and ornamental design.
Emphasis placed upon style detail and its relationship to social, economic, political,
religious and aesthetic influence, and to the contemporary scene. Paper required. Three
lecture hours

CS 563 MODERN INTERIORS 3 s.h.

Chronological study from mid-1 9th Centurytothepresentof the dominant influences
and characteristics of 20th Century interiors, furniture and ornamental design.
Emphasis placed upon style detail and its relationship to social, economic, political,
religious and aesthetic influence, and to the contemporary scene. Paper required. Three
lecture hours.

CS564 INTERIOR PLANNING AND DRAWING 3 s.h.

Lifespace analysis and design as related to residential applications. Presentation,
appropriate media, equipment and techniques will be stressed. Freehand and
mechanical methods employed to depict floor plans, elevations and construction
details. A research project related to professional interests is required. One hour lecture,
three hours lab per week.

CS630 CLOTHING AND HUMAN BEHAVIOR 3 s.h.

Understanding factors affecting clothing decisions of differing individuals and
families Cultural, social, psychological and economic influences are considered.
Concepts from anthropology, sociology, psychology and economics are explored in
studying the relation of clothing to human behavior.

CS631 CREATIVE CLOTHING 3 s.h.

Factors that influence clothing design and sources of design inspiration are investi-
gated. Lines, shapes, colors, and textures are studied in the creationof clothing to fit the
human body. Effects of fabric finishes, drapability, and dimensional stability on design
are explored. Two major projects required

CS632 RECENT DEVELOPMENTS IN TEXTILES 3 s.h

Designed to acquaint the student with the new developments in textiles as they affect
the consumer. Emphasis on understanding factors involved in selection, use and care of
new fibers, fabrics and finishes,

CS650 HUMAN RESOURCE MANAGEMENT 3 s.h.

Principles of management are studied in-depth as they encompass conditions of the
household or family A systems approach is used to analyze the components and
functions of home management. Management of resources is emphasized to improve
day-to-day living of families and individuals with different life-styles. Individual research
on pertinent topics is required.

86 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

CS655 CONSUMER ECONMICS 3 s.h.

Problems in consumer expenditures with emphasis given to effects of current
economic and social forces. Individual investigations are required.

CS656 PROBLEMS IN FAMILY FINANCE 3 s.h.

Advanced problems in personal and family finance. Individual investigations in
current situations are required,

CS661 CONSUMER ELECTRONICS 3 s.h.

In-depth study of household equipment in relation to energy and its distribution and
consumption throughout the network systems of the house. Individual problems
required.

CS662 PROBLEMS IN HOUSING 3 s.h.

Private and public housing problems posed by an urbanizing society and approaches
to their solution are studied. Social, economic, physical and psychological factors are
explored. Three hours lecture.

OS 663 PROBLEMS IN INTERIOR DESIGN 3 S.h.

Advanced work in the design, selection and arrangement of furnishings for
residential interiors are studied in relation to the fulfillment of human needs and the
application to interior design problems.

CS664 LIVING ENVIRONMENTS FOR OLDER ADULTS 3 s.h.

Social, psychological, physical, and economic concerns of the older adult are
considered in relation to housing alternatives. Selected legislation and current programs
are investigated, evaluated, and compared to proposals for a more livable and satisfying
near environment.

COUNSELOR EDUCATION

Department offerings include Master of Arts, Master of Education and
Doctor of Education degree programs. Commonwealth approved programs
leading to certification as elementary school counselor, secondary school
counselor, and supervisor of guidance services, and supervisor of pupil
personnel services are also available.

Degree Programs

The Master of Arts degree programs (Counseling Services: Student
Personnel Services in Higher Education), are designed for students seeking
preparation leading to counseling and counseling-related employment in non-
school settings and student services in higher education. The Master of
Education degree program is the appropriate base for students seeking
preparation leading to certification as elementary or secondary school
counselors. The doctoral program in counselor education focuses upon the
role of supervisor of guidance services and student personnel services in
basic and higher education and the role of the counselor-supervisor in
agencies or institutions.

Programs and Courses — 87
Counselor Education

Certification Programs

Elementary and Secondary School Counselors — To qualify for insti-
tutional endorsement and Commonwealth certification the student must
complete a 45 credit hour competency-based program to include field
experience and all requirements of the Master of Education degree.

While teaching experience is not an absolute requisite for admission, stu-
dents should have or obtain an understanding of educational philosophy,
objectives, and practices. They should also understand the basic principles of
psychology, sociology, and related fields, and possess sufficient background
in mathematics to comprehend the statistical materials and methods v\/ith
which the counselor must be familiar. Prospective students should include
introductory courses in these areas in their undergraduate preparation.

Supervisor of Guidance Services and Supervisor of Pupil Personnel
Services — These two areas of study are six-year, competency-based,
management-oriented programs. They are designed for the preparation and
certification of guidance services supervisors or pupil personnel services
supervisors in grades K-1 2. Applicants for both certificates must have suitable
academic credentials to include the master's degree. The supervisor of
guidance services applicant must have at least one year of experience as a
school counselor. The supervisor of pupil personnel services applicant must
have at least one year of experience as a pupil personnel specialist.

The Doctorate in Counselor Education — This is a program specifically
designed to meet the needs of counselors and pupil personnel specialists who
desire to become supervisors and for those supervisors who desire to refine
and upgrade their competencies. Graduates may choose from doctoral pro-
gram concentrations that lead to the development of competencies needed to
function in one of the following areas: supervisor of guidance services for
basic education, supervisor of pupil personnel services for basic education,
supervisor of student personnel services for higher education, supervisor of
counseling services for public or private agencies, or a teacher in higher
education.

A complete description of the Doctor of Education Program in Counselor
Education may be obtained from the Counselor Education Department in
Stouffer Hall.

A departmental adviser is assigned to each student who assists with the
preparation of course schedules and all other program concerns in a manner
consistent with Graduate School and department policy. Students should plan
their program and course schedules in consultation with their adviser.

CONTENT AREAS

All students enrolled in master's level programs will complete a core sup-
ported by suitable electives The core consists of GR 615, GR 516, CE 850
(Thesis Optional), CE 631 or CE 620, and CE 633 for a total of 1 2-1 5 semester
hours. GR course descriptions can be found under General Service Courses.
See the course descriptions in this section for all CE and ST courses.

88 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

Master of Arts in Counseling Services (Community Counseling) program
majors will complete the core, plus CE 635, CE 637, CE 639, CE 641 , CE 655,
and six to nine hours in supporting electives.

Majors in the Master of Arts in Student Personnel Services in Higher Edu-
cation will complete a modified core to include GR 61 5, OR 51 6, CE 633, CE

637, and CE 641 , Students in this program also take ST 626, ST 627, ST 628,
ST 629, ST 630, and three hours in supporting electives.

Students seeking Commonwealth certification as elementary school
counselors will complete the core and CE 625, CE 626, CE 627, CE 629, CE

638, CE 640, and CE 655 plus one course in Foundations of Education and six
semester hours of electives.

Students seeking Commonwealth certification as secondary school
counselors will complete the core and CE 635, CE 636, CE 637, CE 638, CE

639, CE 641 , and CE 655 plus one course in Foundations of Education and six
semester hours in supporting electives.

Supervisor of Guidance Services program candidates, with suitable
qualifications, complete MG 630, CO 502, FE 515, CE 642, CE 643, CE 644,
CE 645. CE 646, CE 650, CE 651 , and CE 660 For descriptions of the MG, CO,
and FE courses, see the sections on BUSINESS, COMPUTER SCIENCE, and
FOUNDATIONS OF EDUCATION.

Supervisor of Pupil Personnel Services program candidates will, with
suitable qualifications, complete courses MG 630. CE 630, CE 642, CE 643,
CE 644, CE 645, CE 646, CE 647, CE 649, CE 660, CO 502, and FE 515.

Doctoral program majors complete one of the supervisory cores outlined
above plus an eighteen-hour research equivalent which includes the dis-
sertation

Courses outside the student's major may serve as suitable electives, but
only with approval of the adviser and the course instructor For additional infor-
mation about individual programs contact the Department Chairperson.

COURSE DESCRIPTIONS

CE 625 INDIVIDUAL ANALYSIS (ELEM) 3 s.h.

CE 635 INDIVIDUAL ANALYSIS 3 S.h.

Principles, problems, methods, and content involved in understanding the individual
student and his/her developing self-concept. Prerequisites: CE 631, 633.

CE 626 INFORMATION SERVICE (ELEM) 3 S.h.

CE 636 INFORMATION SERVICE 3 s.h.

Designed to present the information service as a distinct and vital part of the
guidance services. Emphasis on relationship between information service and other
guidance services: theories related to career education, vocational development, and
decision making: need for information in the process of vocational, educational, and
social development: processing and uses of information. Prerequisite: CE 631.

CE 627 CONSULTATIVE AND COUNSELING THEORY (ELEM) 3 s.h.

CE 637 COUNSELING AND CONSULTATIVE THEORY 3 s.h.

Theories, objectives, principles and practices of counseling and consulting with
individuals are covered Interview techniques are presented for maximum development
with subsequent practicum experience. Prerequisite: CE 631.

Programs and Courses -^ 89
Counselor Education

CE 629 GROUP PROCEDURES (ELEM) 3 s.h.

CE 639 GROUP PROCEDURES 3 s.h.

Emphasis will be placed upon nature of groups, techniques involved in development
ot dynamics of group behavior, formation and operation of groups, organization and
structure of groups, and influence of group upon the individual as they relate to common
problems.

CE 630 PROFESSIONAL, ETHICAL, AND LEGAL

CONSIDERATIONS 3 s.h.

Emphasis is placed on legal and ethical issues associated with the counseling
profession It analyzes the function of ethics in the profession and studies the legal
rights, duties, and liabilities of counselors.

CE 631 INTRODUCTION TO GUIDANCE SERVICES 3 s.h.

Overview of genesis and development of guidance in American education, including
philosophical concepts, psychological theories, cultural and social influences, and
current practices.

CE 633 EVALUATION TECHNIOUES 3 s h

Basic concepts utilized in testing, emphasizing data concerning purposes andtypes
of tests, test administration, test scoring, test validity, and test selection. Prerequisites:
CE 631, GR 516

CE 638 MANAGEMENT OF THE GUIDANCE SERVICES 3 s.h.

Helps school counselor acquire necessary competencies to manage guidance
services. Emphasis placed upon planning, organizing, coordinating, directing, and con-
trolling functions of management as applied to guidance services within framework of
the school's philosophy and objectives of education. Prerequisites: CE 631, 633, 635,
636, 637, 639 or corresponding elementary school counselor course.

CE 640 SUPERVISED PRACTICUM (ELEM) Prerequisite: CE 627) 3 s.h.

CE 641 SUPERVISED PRACTICUM (Prerequisite: CE 637) 3 s.h.

Practicum experience in counseling techniques, including interviews, observations,
written reports, and group interaction. Students work with counselees appropriate to
their level of preparation and goals. Emphasis is both developmental and problem-
centered. Since aspects of all component guidance services are included, this is a
terminal course in the core sequence.

CE642 SCHOOL SERVICES 3 s.h.

Designed to analyze critically written statements of educational philosophies and
objectives of selected elementary and secondary schools, students will prepare a
written statement of educational philosophy and objectives for a school in which he/she
is or has been employed as a guide for the critical examination of philosophies and
objectives for school services — instructional, administration and supervisory, and pupil
personnel.

CE 643 PLANNING PRINCIPLES 3 s.h.

Student will develop written statements of philosophy and objectives for pupil
personnel services and the service in which certified. Program elements will be estab-
lished from objectives. Program elements will be critically analyzed to determine the
resources, including personnel, facilities, materials, and money required to execute
program elements and satisfy objectives. Prerequisites: MG 630, CE 642.

90 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

CE 644 ORGANIZING PRINCIPLES 3 s.h.

Student will identify tasks necessary to execute program elements which will fulfill
pupil personnel services objectives. Personnel qualified to perform tasks will be identi-
fied. Techniques to relate tasks to personnel will be examined to develop organizational
patterns necessary to initiate programs of pupil personnel services in districts of various
sizes and compositions. Prerequisites: CE 643.

CE 645 HUMAN RELATIONS AND COMMUNICATIONS 3 s.h.

Students will develop skill in programming various guidance services for the school
year throughout the district. Human relations principles and techniques to elicit
cooperation from personnel involved and skills in communicating with personnel partici-
pating in the program of guidance services and with the public will be developed.

CE 646 ENCOUNTER AND SENSITIVITY 3 s.h.

Participants will explore their own individuality and human potential as they enter into
authentic, honest and trusting relationships within the context of a small group experi-
ence encouraging recognition and expression of feelings as an effective way of under-
standing one's self and impact on others.

CE 647 INTRODUCTION TO PUPIL PERSONNEL SERVICES 3 s.h.

Philosophy, objectives and roles of each of the pupil personnel services will be con-
sidered. Emphasis on team approach to services. Pupil personnel services will be con-
sidered as a facilitating function contributing to the development of individual pupils and
to success of total instructional and management processes of the school.

CE 648 ADVANCED RESEARCH IN COUNSELOR EDUCATION 3 s.h.

Research literature in counselor education and research design are covered. The
student will develop and present a trial dissertation proposal.

CE 649 PRINCIPLES OF SUPERVISION 3 s.h.

Designed to permit student to study theory, research and evolving concepts of
supervision.

CE 650 SUPERVISION OF COUNSELORS 3 s.h.

A practicum designed to provide allied experience in supervision of school
counselors, elementary and secondary, in preparation of supervisors of guidance ser-
vices. Primary focus is on supervision of counseling service content and process, but
components of all guidance services are included.

CE 651 EVALUATION OF PUPIL PERSONNEL SERVICES 3 s.h.

Studentw will evaluate programs of services as related to the educational objectives
and pupil personnel services objectives of the school including initiation of appropriate
research and preparation and reporting of recommendations based upon findings.
Prerequisite: CE 644.

CE 652 THE SKILLS APPROACH TO DECISION MAKING 3 s.h.

Decision-making is viewed as a multi-dimensional life process which integrates all
facets of self in life planning and goal setting. Games, role playing, group work, and
related experiences are utilized in providing experiential exposure to a diversity of
decision-making models which can be applied to a variety of work settings.

CE 655 FIELD EXPERIENCE 3 s.h.

This course provides a supervised field experience for students in the counselor
education programs. The plan and scope of the field experience will be determined by
the student and faculty on an individual basis.

Programs and Courses — 91
Counselor Education
Criminology

CE 656 INDEPENDENT STUDY 1-3s.h.

Topic pertinent to the individual's program of study. By permission of department
chairperson and adviser only

CE660 INTERNSHIP IN COUNSELOR EDUCATION 12 s.h.

The internship provides an opportunity to apply didactic experiences in the work

setting of the supervisor of guidance services under carefully supervised conditions.

ST 626 HISTORY OF HIGHER EDUCATION IN THE UNITED STATES 3 s.h.
Growth and trends of higher education in the United States with emphasis on
twentieth century

ST 627 STUDENT PERSONNEL SERVICES IN HIGHER EDUCATION 3 s.h.

Overview of student personnel work in higher education, highlighting its history,
purposes, organization, philosophy, ethical values, current and past social and legal
issues, including various student services such as admission and registration, data
processing and scheduling, housing and food services, career counseling and place-
ment, college unions and student activities, sources of financial aid, fraternities and
sororities, intramural athletics and other programs.

ST 628 INTERNSHIP IN STUDENT PERSONNEL SERVICES 3 S.h.

Affords the student an opportunity to gam practical experience in dealing with
theories of his/her specialities. Includes one or two semesters in one of the student
personnel offices at lUP under leadership and instruction of departmental director or co-
ordinator. Limited number of off-campus internships with affiliate institutions can be
arranged

ST 629 STUDENT DEVELOPMENT IN HIGHER EDUCATION

Provides an overview of student development theories and the student development
model. Includes the application of assessment, goal setting, intervention strategies,
environmental management, and evaluation in higher education settings.

ST 630 MANAGEMENT OF THE STUDENT PERSONNEL SERVICES

Designed to teach managerial concepts and skills for managing the Student
Personnel Services. Concepts covered include planning, leadership, management,
supervision, organizational development, goal setting, collective bargaining, legal
issues, and team building.

CRIMINOLOGY

The Departnnent of Criminology offers a program of studies leading to a
Master of Arts Degree in Criminology. Students may choose from a wide
variety of course offerings or select specialized areas of concentration. In
addition, students may complete elective courses in fields directly related to
criminology. The program is designed for individuals who are currently
employed within the criminal justice system and students who are interested in
pursuing careers in criminology and related disciplines. The department also
offers courses open to students following other degree programs in the
Graduate School.

92 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

Department Admission Requirements

In addition to nneeting the requirennents for admission to the Graduate
School, a student intending to work toward a Master of Arts in Criminology will
be required to have the following prerequisite professional preparation:

A. Students should demonstrate a sound understanding of the criminal
justice system: or

B. Students should have practical experience within the system of justice
or have pursued an undergraduate degree in criminology, or completed
graduate or undergraduate studies in a related field.*

*Where the Department determines that a deficiency in background experi-
ences or educational requirements exits, a student may be permitted (with
permission of the Director of Graduate Studies) to complete additional
studies to eliminate the deficiency.

MASTER OF ARTS IN CRIMINOLOGY

students may choose between a thesis or a non-thesis curriculum:

Thesis Degree Requirements — A total of 30 semester hours is required,
including OR 601 , OR 698, OR 850, and a competence in statistics. A minimum
of nine semester hours in other criminology graduate courses must be com-
pleted as well as six to nine hours of departmentally-approved graduate
courses from other disciplines. Option requirements may apply to course
selection.

Non-Thesis Degree Requirements — A total of 36 semester hours is
required including OR 601 and CR 698 and a competence in statistics. A
minimum of 1 5 semester hours in other criminology graduate courses must be
completed as well as 12-15 semester hours of departmentally-approved
graduate courses from other disciplines. Option requirements must apply to
course selection.

COURSE DESCRIPTIONS

CR 601 CRIMINOLOGICAL THEORY 3 s.h.

An intensive review of selected criminological theories: with emphasis on in-depth
understanding of relevant theoretical approaches to crime and criminally deviant
behavior

CR 602 INTRODUCTION TO CRIMINOLOGICAL RESEARCH 3 s.h.

Analysis of research methodology apropos to study of crime and deviant behavior.
Course structure will emphasize research design and development, methods of
scientific field inquiry, objective evidence, utilization of library resource materials, and
techniques of research presentation

CR 603 SEMINAR ON POLICE ADMINISTRATION 3 s.h.

Innovative techniques of police organization and personnel management discussed.
Review of practical difficulties involved in adapting cybernation, scientific technology,
and advanced personnel administration to existing police establishment.

Programs and Courses — 93
Criminology

CR 604 PERSONNEL RECRUITMENT AND SELECTION

IN LAW ENFORCEMENT 3 S.h.

Techniques of man-power recruitment and personnel selection coupled with in-
depth review of police applicant testing procedures.

CR 607 SEMINAR IN COMMUNITY COLLEGE TEACHING 3 s.h.

Designed to prepare community college instructors through an emphasis on the
objectives, materials, techniques, and evaluation of general education programs in
criminology. Prerequisites: Criminology major or minor.

CR 61 1 PREDICTIVE METHODS OF PROBATION AND PAROLE 3 S.h.

Gives students actual practice in using behavioral prediction devices. Each student
will have opportunity to develop experimental models and research the results.

CR 612 LABORATORY IN BACKGROUND ANALYSIS AND

PRE-SENTENCE REPORT WRITING 3 s.h.

Will provide background information concerning structure, function, and use of pre-
sentence investigation. Gives practical training in compilation and analysis of social
case histories. Each student, under direct supervision, will develop, organize and write
several pre-sentence investigations.

CR613 SEMINAR ON CRIME AND DELINQUENCY PREVENTION 3 s.h.

Exploration of most effective ways of preventing crime and delinquency. Will stress
remedial social action, law enforcement and correctional procedures and techniques of
community arousal and involvement.

CR614 DEVELOPMENT OF INSTITUTIONAL TREATMENT SERVICES 3 s.h.
In-depth study of institutional treatment methods; including a review of the most suc-
cessful approaches to curbing recidivism problem. Will investigate therapeutic com-
munity and milieu management concepts as well as individual treatment procedures.

CR616 ADVANCED SEMINAR ON PROBATION AND PAROLE 3 s.h.

Provides a thought provoking review of functional relationships between various
branches of government and the correctional process, and a thorough analysis of
probation and parole processes and their ancillary components. Stresses practical
problems of client supervision, resource referral, and termination of supervision
services.

CR 630 INTERNSHIP IN CRIMINAL JUSTICE 3-12 s.h.

Each student placed with a selected criminal justice agency to participate actively in
activities of the unit. Student may earn up to 1 2 semester hours credit. Students required
to submit an acceptable paper explaining experiences in the internship program. By
appointment only.

CR 681 SPECIAL TOPICS 3 s.h.

Special topics courses are offered at the discretion of the department in a wide area
of subjects directly related to law enforcement, courts, corrections or security.

CR 698 GRADUATE READINGS IN CRIMINOLOGY 3 s.h.

With faculty supervision, students will read at least six major criminological texts and
participate in a seminar situation for the purpose of discussing the reading materials,
CR 501

CR 699 INDEPENDENT STUDY IN CRIMINOLOGY 1-3 sh.

The student, with advice and approval of instructor, reaches a significant problem in
Criminology. By appointment. Criminology major or minor.

CR 850 THESIS 3-6 s.h.

94 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

ECONOMICS

The Economics Department does not currently offer a graduate degree.
The graduate courses offered by the department are a component of master's
degree programs offered by other departments and Schools.

COURSE DESCRIPTIONS

EC 501 FOUNDATIONS OF MODERN ECONOMICS 3 s.h.

Not open to students who have credits of C or better in undergraduate EC 1 21-1 22
sequence Survey of micro and macroeconomics designed for students who is not
already well-grounded in the field.

EC 520 HISTORY OF ECONOMIC THOUGHT 3sh

Examination of social, political, intellectual, and economic origins of work of
prominent past economists, and of the content and impact of their work Prerequisite: EC
501 or credits of C or better in six s.h. of Principles of Economics or permission of the
iristructor

EC 521 MACROECONOMIC ANALYSIS 3 s h.

Covers national income theory with emphasis on the causes and cures of inflation
and unemployment. Includes study of consumption and investment theories, fiscal and
monetary policy, national income accounts, and growth analysis Prerequisite; EC 501
or credits of C or better in six s h of Principles of Economics or permission of the
instructor

EC 522 MICROECONOMIC ANALYSIS 3 s.h

Analysis of the theories of consumer demand, the firm, exchange, market structures,
distribution, and welfare economics Prerequisite: EC 501 or credits of C or better in EC
122 Principles of Economics II or permission of the instructor.

EC 525 MONETARY ECONOMICS 3 s.h.

Structure and function of monetary institutions including the Federal Reserve
System, commercial banks, and financial intermediaries, theory of monetary economy,
and monetary policy Prerequisite EC 501 , or credits of C or better in six s h. of Principles
of Economics or permission of the instructor.

EC 530 LABOR ECONOMICS 3 s.h.

History, structure and operations of trade unions and employer organizations; major
Federal labor legislation; collective bargaining theory; wage determination; current labor
problems. Prerequisite: EC 501 or credits of C or better in six s h of Principles of
Economics or permission of the instructor

EC 534 ECONOMICS OF CORPORATE DECISIONS 3 s h

Applies economic theory to corporate decision-making Covers mathematical solu-
tions to various profit-maximization and cost minimization problems and examines
statistical estimation of demand and cost functions. Prerequisite: EC 501 or credits of C
or better in six s h. of Principles of Economics or permission of the instructor,

EC 536 STATE AND LOCAL FINANCE 3 s h

Analysis of the character and consequences of state and local government revenue
procurement, expenditures, and fiscal systems Prerequisite: EC 501 or credits of C or
better in six s.h, of Principles of Economics or permission of the instructor.

Programs and Courses — 95
Economics

EC 541 CONTEMPORARY ECONOMIC ISSUES 3 s.h.

Problem areas of domestic economy. Primary focus in eacfi semester is determined
by student-instructor interest. Prerequisite: EC 501 or credits of C or better in six s h, of
Principles of Economics or permission of the instructor

EC 545 INTERNATIONAL ECONOMICS 3 s h

Nature of world economy, international trade, international investment, current inter-
national institutions, and foreign economic policy of the United States. Prerequisite: EC
501 or credits of C or better in six s.h. of Principles of Economics or permission of the
instructor.

EC 550 COMPARATIVE ECONOMIC SYSTEMS 3 s.h.

Basic economic issues in capitalism, socialism, communism, and fascism, and their
relationships to political and social problems. Prerequisite: EC 501 or credits of C or
better in six s.h. of Principles of Economics or permission of the instructor.

EC 560 ECONOMICS OF HEALTH SERVICES 3 s.h.

Analysis of the allocation of resources in the health sector using demand and supply
techniques. Pricing and output by physicians, hospitals, ando ther health agencies are
considered, along with National health insurance and current policy issues. Prerequi-
site: EC 501 or credits of C or better in six s.h. of Principles of Economics or permission ol
the instructor.

EC 571 ECONOMICS OF LABOR LEGISLATION 3 s.h.

Economic background and effects of governmental regulation of labor relations, with
emphasis on a detailed examination of the National Labor Relations Act as amended
Prerequisite: EC 530 or permission of the instructor.

EC 572 ECONOMICS OF WAGES AND EMPLOYMENT 3 s.h.

Analysis of wages and employment under various market structures. Also, an
analysis of the impact of labor market forces on wages, prices, and distributive shares.
Prerequisite: EC 530 or permission of the instructor.

EC 573 ECONOMICS OF HUMAN RESOURCES 3 s.h.

Analysis of the development and utilization of human resources with an emphasis on
the income and employment situation of minorities. Manpower policy options designed
to increase the value and use of human resources are also explored. Prerequisite: EC
530 or permission of the instructor.

EC 574 ECONOMICS OF EDUCATION 3 s.h.

Analysis of the costs and benefits of education, the impact of education on economic
growth, the private and public process of determining investment m education, and plan-
ning at the institutional level. Prerequisite: EC 501 or credits of C or better in six s.h. of
Principles of Economics or permission of the instructor.

EC 580 SEMINAR 3 s.h.

Seminar in selected economic issues or problems. Prerequisite: EC 501 or credits of
C or better in six s.h. of Principles of Economics or permission of the instructor.

EC 582 URBAN ECONOMICS 3 s.h.

Analysis of the structure of urban economy; goals, processes, problems and policy in
urban economic development. Prerequisite: EC 501 or grade of C or better in six
semester hours of Principles of Economics or permission of the instructor,

EC 583 REGIONAL ECONOMICS 3 s.h.

Process of regional economic growth, location theory, basic techniques of regional
analysis, public and private area development programs. Prerequisite: EC 501 or grade
of C or better in six semester hours of Principles of Economics or permission of the
instructor.

96 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

EC 634 ECONOMICS OF CORPORATE DECISIONS 3 s.h.

Applies economic theory to corporate decision making. Covers mathematical solu-
tions to various profit-maximization and cost minimization problems and examines
statistical estimation of demand and cost functions. Prerequisite: EC 501 or credits of C
or better in six s.h. of Principles of Economics or permission of the instructor.

EC 699 INDEPENDENT STUDY 1 -6 s.h

Directed readings, written assignments, and research on a specific topic determined
by the student and the instructor. Prerequisite: EC 501 or credits of C or better in six s.h.
of Principles of Economics or permission of the instructor.

EDUCATIONAL PSYCHOLOGY

After admission to The Graduate School, the candidate must secure the
Departmental Application Packet, which includes further information from the
Educational Psychology Department. Potential candidates will be interviewed
by the Program Admissions Committee after the departmental application,
copies of transcripts from The Graduate School, and official Graduate Record
Examination scores, including Education are received. An adviser will be
assigned to approved candidates and no course work may be scheduled
without the adviser's approval. The adviser may approve alternate courses to
meet required competencies.

Admission to the programs will be based on evidence of previous scholar-
ship and/or potential for academic success, personal and professional
qualities deemed necessary for adequate functioning as a specialist in edu-
cation and motivation for professional excellence. Continued enrollment once
begun, is expected. Exceptions to this policy must be filed in writing and
approved by the student's program committee.

Candidates for admission to master's degree programs must have a
bachelor's degree from an accredited institution. Candidates for admission to
the post-master's certification program must have a master's degree and an
instructional or specialist certification from an accredited institution or have
approved educational experiences.

MASTER OF EDUCATION IN

EDUCATIONAL PSYCHOLOGY

The Master of Education degree in Educational Psychology program (33-
36 s.h., depending upon choice of thesis or non-thesis option) has been
designed to give the interested student a broad theoretical and practical back-
ground in the areas of education and psychology. There are three majors in
this degree.

Programs and Courses — 97
Educational Psychology

General requirements are: All students will take the Professional Develop-
ment Area (total of nine s h). Humanistic Studies (three s.h), select one FE
61 1 , 61 2, 61 3, 51 4: Behavioral Studies (three s.h), select one EP 604 or 578.
573, 576, CE 629 or 639, EX 631; Research (three s.h), GR 615 (Ed. Psych
section).

Requirements for the three major areas are as follows:

Pre-school Psychology — (23-27 s.h.) is designed to prepare the inter-
ested student for entrance into the post-master's certification program.
Professional Specialization courses (six s.h.) EP 618, 662, Subject Area
and/or Elective (17-21 s.h.) EP 604, 578, 576, 572, 573, 650, 581 , ED 601 , PC
640, EX 522, 639, 665, CE 625 or 635, SH 530, SH 614rEP 850.

Human Development and Learning — (23-27 s h ) is designed to pre-
pare the teacher to be more effective in the classroom and to have a balanced
program in Educational Psychology. Professional Specialization courses (six
s.h.) EP 61 8, 604 or 578, Subject Area and/or Electives (17-21 s.h.) EP 604,
578, 576, 572, 573, 580, 650, 581 , AC 520, ED 601 , PC 533, 640, EX 522, 639,
665, CE 625 or 635, SH 502, 635, EP 850

Educational Evaluation and Research — (23 27 s h ) is designed to
provide a broad theoretical and practical background in Educational Evalu-
ation and Research. Professional Specialization (six s.h.) EP 61 8, 662, Subject
Area and/or Electives (17-21 s h.) EP 604, 578, 576, 572, 573, 580, 581 , GR
516, 517, CO 502, EP 850. Thesis required

CERTIFICATE OF ADVANCED STUDY

IN SCHOOL PSYCHOLOGY —

POST-MASTER'S DEGREE PROGRAM

A certificate of Advanced Study in School Psychology may be issued to
those students who have completed a minimum of 66-69 graduate hours, 33 of
which should be approved graduate hours in the university beyond the
master's degree, and who have not met all of the requirements for certification
as a school psychologist.

The School Psychology Program is designed for those individuals who are
seeking certification as public school psychologists in the Commonwealth of
Pennsylvania. The objectives of the program are to tram competent individuals
who will demonstrate (1) an ability to evaluate and prescribe. (2) an under-
standing of individual and group dynamics, (3) an understanding of the edu-
cational system and learning process, and (4) an ability to apply all acquired
competencies. There is a required comprehensive exam, practicums, and
internship experiences. Certification as a school psychologist is recom-
mended when all of the indicated role competencies are demonstrated by the
candidate.

The Professional Specialization studies courses for the program for 21 -24
s.h are EP 611. 612, 613, EP 663 and EP 650-EP 651 (12-15 s.h ). The other
approved courses for nine s.h. to meet competency requirements are EX 631 ,
EX 666 or EP 581, and PC 635. For final certification other courses and/or
additional internship hours may be required by the School Psychology Com-
mittee to satisfy competency requirements.

For descriptions of EX courses, see section on SPECIAL EDUCATION: for
PC course, PSYCHOLOGY.

98 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

COURSE DESCRIPTIONS

EP 572 PSYCHOLOGY OF CHILDHOOD EDUCATION 3 s.h.

Studies relationship which physical, social, emotional, and intellectual development
have on theory and practice of childhood and pre-adolescent education.

EP 573 PSYCHOLOGY OF ADOLESCENT EDUCATION 3 s.h.

Concerned with study of significant characteristics of adolescence, and under-
standing the role of cultural influences on formation of behavior.

EP 576 BEHAVIOR PROBLEMS 3 s.h.

Explores behavior problems encountered in classroom situations and gives causes,
characteristics and some remedial techniques.

EP 578 LEARNING 3 s.h.

Explores learning theories and educational application in working with learning
problems in the classroom

EP 581 SPECIAL TOPICS IN EDUCATIONAL PSYCHOLOGY 3 s.h.

Designed for those students who wish to do independent research in special areas.
Prerequisite: department chairperson permission.

EP 583 EDUCATION OF THE DISADVANTAGED CHILD 3 s.h.

Acquisition of necessary understandings of physiological, psychological, and social
implications relevant to working with and teaching disadvantaged children.

EP 585 HUMANIZING THE CLASSROOM 3 s.h.

An experimental course concerned with human-relations-skills training and particu-
lar emphasis on group process, non-verbal communication, listening and responding
skills. The focus is primarily on the translation of these skills into effecting productive
classroom environments in educational settings.

EP 587 CHILDREN AND THE LAW 3 S.h.

A course designed to promote a better understanding of our legal system as it affects
children within the family and in specific settings including schools, juvenile courts, state
institutions, and community agencies.

EP 588 INTERPERSONAL EFFECTIVENESS AND

COMMUNICATION SKILLS 3 S.h.

Designed to increase professional effectiveness and improve communication skills
within educational, business, and industrial settings. Includes analysis of non-verbal
behaviors, active listening, and rational self-analysis and assertion skills.

EP 604 ADVANCED EDUCATIONAL PSYCHOLOGY 3 s.h.

An upward extension of Educational psychology with a systematic review of current
research and learning theory with emphasis on classroom application.

EP611 INTRODUCTION TO SCHOOL PSYCHOLOGY 3 s.h.

Designed for those students who are preparing to function as school psychologists,
and includes role concepts and other responsibilities of a school psychologist.

EP612 INDIVIDUAL EVALUATION I 3 s.h.

Individual testing and professional competency in Binet and related scales of intel-
ligence and includes techniques of report writing, professional role studies, and com-
munication procedures. Prerequisite: For approved School Psychologist candidates.

Programs and Courses — 99
Educational Psychology
Elementary Education

EP613 INDIVIDUAL EVALUATION II 3 s.h.

Individual testing and professional competency in the Wechsler Scales and other

pertinent tests Prerequisite EP 612 — For approved School Psychologist candidates.

EP 618 INTERPRETATION OF EDUCATIONAL AND

PSYCHOLOGICAL TESTS 3 s.h.

Designed to provide the individual with information necessary to understand,
evaluate, and interpret results of educational and psychological tests accurately and
meaningfully

EP 650 INTERNSHIP I 3 s.h.

Supervised experiences in Educational Psychology Prerequisite For approved
candidates.

EP 651 INTERNSHIP II 3-12 s.h.

Clinical and field experience with mentally and physically handicapped and
emotionally disturbed children. Prerequisite: For approved School Psychologist candi-
dates

EP 652 INTERNSHIP - HOME AND SCHOOL VISITOR

(SCHOOL SOCIAL WORKER) 3-9 s h.

Supervised experiences for Home and School Visitor (School Social Worker) candi-
dates. Prerequisite: For approved candidates

EP 662 PSYCHOTHERAPY AND GROUP DYNAMICS 3sh

A systematic study of major techniques of counseling and psychotherapy, and appli-
cation of principles of group dynamics to educational settings.

EP 663 PROJECTIVE TECHNIOUES 3 s h.

An introduction to various personality and behavior assessment techniques cur-
rently used. Prerequisite: For approved School Psychologist candidates.

ELEMENTARY EDUCATION

The Elementary Education master's curriculum is designed to assist the
graduate student to broaden or strengthen background in academic areas
and in professional education. The graduate student may elect one of several
specialized fields of study, including curricula in general elementary educa-
tion, early childhood education, and reading.

Upon admission to any of the Elementary Education programs, students
will be notified of an adviser by the Coordinator of the specific program At this
time, the student and adviser outline a tentative program of studies.

MASTER OF EDUCATION

IN ELEMENTARY EDUCATION

Students working toward a master's degree in Elementary Education
should complete 30 semester hours of work (thesis option) or 36 semester

100 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

hours of work (non-thesis option) from the following areas: Nine semester
hours in Professional Development, including a Foundations of Education
course, a Behavioral Studies course. Elements of Research; six semester
hours in a Specialization Core; 18 semester hours of Elementary Education
electives; and EL 680. Seminar in Advanced Research. With the approval of
the coordinator, when appropriate, six semester hours of workshop credit or
graduate electives may be applied to the master's degree.

GRADUATE PROGRAMS

IN EARLY CHILDHOOD EDUCATION

students seeking Instructional Level II certification with a specialization in
early childhood education or a master of education degree specializing in
early childhood must complete the following requirements: a minimum of 24
s.h. is required for the Instructional II certificate or 30 s.h. minimum is required
for the master of education degree program. Courses scheduled by the stu-
dent should have the approval of the student's adviser. Students entering the
program must have an Instructional I Certificate in elementary education.

Students pursuing the M.Ed, with an Early Childhood concentration must
complete 30 s.h. (thesis option) or 36 s.h. (non-thesis option) from the following
areas: nine semester hours in Professional Development, including a Founda-
tions of Education course, a Behavioral Studies course, and Elements of
Research; six s.h. in Specialization Core; 1 8 s.h. of Elementary Education elec-
tives including EL and EE courses; and EL 680, Seminar in Advanced
Research. With the approval of the coordinator, when appropriate, six s.h. of
workshop credit or graduate electives may be applied to the master's degree.

THE DOCTORATE IN ELEMENTARY EDUCATION

The Doctor of Education degree in elementary Education is designed for
those who wish to teach at the college or university level or who desire to work
in a teaching, supervisory, or administrative capacity. A candidate for this
degree is expected to acquire a broad knowledge of various aspects of edu-
cation, and to demonstrate, through the completion of an acceptable disserta-
tion, the ability to conduct an independent investigation of a topic approved by
an advisory committee.

The first step toward the doctorate is to seek admission to course work
beyond the master's degree. After the student has completed nine hours and
prior to 1 5 hours of advanced work at lUP, he/she can apply for candidacy. To
become a candidate a student must meet the requirements of The Graduate
School and the Elementary Education Department. Applicants are reviewed
on the basis of acceptable scores on the Graduate Record Examination,
performance in course work, professional recommendations, and success-
fully passing a written and an oral examination administered by the depart-
ment.

After admission to candidacy the student will be assigned to an advisory
committee. This committee will assist the student in preparing a final plan of
study. The comprehensive examination will be both written and oral and will
include a ma|or and a second concentration field.

Programs and Courses — 101
Elementary Education

No specific number of credits entitles a student to the degree, but a mini-
mum of 90 hours of credit, properly distributed, must be earned beyond the
bachelor's degree.

Statistics and computer science are required to complete the research
area of study.

A supervised internship and a period of residency will be required of all
candidates for this degree. Ordinarily the internship will consist of working for a
semester or a summer in an educational experience unlike one already
experienced by the candidate.

A complete description of the Doctor of Education program in Elementary
Education can be obtained from the Department of Elementary Education,
Davis Hall.

COURSE DESCRIPTIONS

EE 660 EARLY CHILDHOOD STUDY TECHNIQUES

AND ASSESSMENT TOOLS 3 s.h.

Designed to provide the student with a specific method of studying children from
three through eight years Students learn to observe, record and analyze pertinent infor-
mation and to suggest ways to help children toward positive self development. Tests for
assessment of the young child in areas of perception, concept development, self-inven-
tories, general intellectual ability, readiness, and academic ability will be examined,
administered, and interpreted.

EE 661 EARLY CHILDHOOD PHILOSOPHY CURRICULUM.

AND MATERIALS 3 s.h

Introduces students to philosophy and historical background of pre-school educa-
tion and their influences on current programs and curriculum. Curriculum patterns and
strategies, including available materials, for schools for the younger child are introduced
and evaluated

EE 662 EARLY CHILDHOOD FIELD STUDY EXPERIENCES 3 s.h

Includes direct observation and teaching in early childhood programs Seminar
sessions will be directed toward the study of appropriate strategies with immediate
application with children. Students will be expected to meet the individual needs of
children they are teaching. Close supportive relationships with parents and community
will be stressed Prerequisites: EE 660. EE 661. EE 664.

EE 664 EARLY CHILDHOOD CURRICULUM IN PRIMARY GRADES 3 s.h.

Based on developmental levels of children, students understand the appropriate
concepts and strategies which should be included in the primary grade component of
early childhood.

EE 665 ISSUES IN EARLY CHILDHOOD EDUCATION 3 s.h.

Focuses on the ma|or controversies facing the early childhood educator Opposing
viewpoints will be presented for review, reaction and debate. Students will be encour-
aged to establish priorities and clarify value systems to arrive at solutions to the critical
issues

EE 666 EVALUATION OF PROGRAMS FOR YOUNG CHILDREN 3 s h

Analysis of extant early childhood programs Examination of early intervention
projects and matenals. review of research findings and implications: cross-cultural
comparisons of preschool programs Prerequisites: EE 661 664 or permission of the
instructor

102 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

EL 510 SEMINAR IN ELEMENTARY SCHOOL EVALUATION

AND ACCREDITATION 3 s.h.

In conjunction with the Assembly of Elementary Schools of the Middle States Asso-
ciation, provides instruction and field practicum in elementary school evaluation, plan-
ning and accreditation Books and supplies provided by Middle States Association
Provides leadership training for students interested in developing school evaluation
plans and serving on accreditation teams

ED 631 CURRICULUM DEVELOPMENT 3 s.h

Students will learn curriculum development by differentiating among educational
goals, objectives and learning activities Sources of curriculum goals and objectives
such as needs assessment, philosophical models and psychological models will be
studied The design and selection of learning activities as well asdesignsforevaluating
the effectiveness of curricula also will be considered.

ED 632 SYSTEMATIC OBSERVATION OF

CLASSROOM BEHAVIOR 3 sh

Students will learn how to code classroom verbal interaction through actual demon-
stration, video tapes, and audio recordings, with emphasis on various teaching strat-
egies, monitoring verbal interaction, and supervisory sessions Designed for elementary
majors, curriculum supervisors, and students majoring in secondary and supervisory
behavior

EL 641 RECENT TRENDS IN SOCIAL STUDIES 3 sh.

Specific problems with curriculum, teaching, and learning experiences and evalu-
ation are stressed Each student will research a special problem or area of interest

EL 642 MATHEMATICS IN ELEMENTARY SCHOOL 3 s.h.

Experiences with manipulative materials, games and puzzles, activity centers, and
lab approach to mathematics Inexpensive mathematics lab equipment will be con-
structed. Sources of literature and materials will be presented and used Opportunities
will be given to write activity and problem cards and to plan mathematics activity
centers. Psychological foundations and mathematics structure will be used as refer-
ence for suggested activities and curriculum studies

EL 643 RESOURCE MATERIALS IN ELEMENTARY SCIENCE 3 s.h.

An introduction of underlying philosophy and use of materials of several of the
current national curriculum programs m elementary science. Emphasis is placed on
following programs; (1 ) Science: A Process Approach (SAPA). (2) Elementary Science
Study (ESS), (3) Science Curriculum Improvement Study (SCIS), and (4) Conceptually
Oriented Program in Elementary Science (COPES), including micro-teaching tech-
niques and development and preparation of individualized self-instruction modules.
Students are required to work with various program materials.

EL 644 RECENT TRENDS IN LANGUAGE ARTS 3 s.h.

Designed to help students to direct more effective communication through study of
problems, recent trends and contributions of research in the broad fields of listening, oral
and written communication

EL 645 EXPERIMENTAL STUDIES IN ART EDUCATION 3 s.h.

Teachers will undertake art experiences in various media as they are adapted to
provision of art experiences for the child Emphasis will be placed on stages of growth,
type of motivation, and ways of administering stimuli. Perceptual awareness and under-
standing and appreciation of visual art forms and their importance in the lives of people
in our town and other cultures will be developed along with study of the exceptional child
to recognize and encourage evidences of art potentials as well as wholesome self-
expression.

Programs and Courses— 103
Elementary Education

EL 646 MODERN PROCEDURES & SKILLS IN

ELEMENTARY MUSIC 3 s.h.

New dimensions in thinking about elementary music for children. Emphasis is placed

on the young student discovering interesting aspects of music — sounds, rhythm

through movement, use of percussive and simple method instruments, and music of

countries. (Music Staff)

EL 647 RESOURCE MATERIALS IN

CHILDREN'S LITERATURE 3 s.h.

Evaluation and selection of literature as a classroom resource for teaching and
learning, including illustrations, folklore, poetry, modern and traditional fiction and non-
fiction,

EL 648 CREATIVITY AND THE ELEMENTARY SCHOOL CHILD 3 s.h.

Includes a study of creative thinking and ways to develop creativity in children
including strategies and techniques to use in the classroom Ways of measuring
creativity and analyzing the role of the teacher are included. Students are encouraged to
develop their own creativity.

ED 650 SCHOOL AND COMMUNITY 3 s.h.

Development and maintenance of a purposeful program of communication between
the school and the community through study of selection, organization and functions of
citizens advisory committees and cooperative use of various community services.

EL 651 RECENT INNOVATIONS IN ELEMENTARY EDUCATION 3 s.h.

Newer trends in classroom procedure, equipment, and materials as well as problems
involved in improvement of instruction. Whenever possible sessions will be held to
demonstrate and use recently developed materials. Individual research and field trips
into many of the new programs in elementary education.

ED 652 SCHOOL EVALUATION 3 s h.

Current models for both formative and summative evaluations are presented with
emphasis on their application to school programs and other educational projects. Prior
knowledge or experience in curnculumdevelopmentand/or project proposals would be
helpful but not required.

ED 653 SUPERVISION AND THE IMPROVEMENT

OF INSTRUCTION 3 s.h.

Purposes, patterns, processes, and products of the supervision of instruction with

emphasis on the supervisor as the educational leader whose concern is improvement of

instruction through the on-going growth and professional development of his/her staff.

EL 655 RECENT TRENDS IN HUMAN DEVELOPMENT

AND LEARNING 3 s h

Concerned with the literature and recent research in the field of human development
and learning and how they relate to the education of children. Characteristics of the
learner and the developmental aspect of children will be stressed.

EA656 SCHOOL ADMINISTRATION 3 s.h.

Designed as basic course in school administration, intended to serve as an intro-
duction to principles and practices of school administration for students whoaspiretoa
supervisory or administrative position in public schools. Human aspects of educational
administration are emphasized.

EA 657 SCHOOL PERSONNEL ADMINISTRATION 3 s h.

Designed to provide background for potential principals and supervisors in matters
pertaining to functions of various types of personnel employed in schools. Knowledge of
organizational practices for proper and effective utilization of personnel and recognition
of administrators role in providing services to both staff and pupils

104 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

ED 658 SCHOOL LAW AND NEGOTIATIONS 3 s.h.

An understanding of legal principles as they pertain to functions of personnel in
public school system and to persons engaged in education. Study of statutory enact-
ments, review of court actions through case studies, and analysis of collective negoti-
ation laws and cases.

EL 659 ADMINISTRATION OF THE ELEMENTARY SCHOOL 3 s.h.

Principles and techniques of elementary school administration. Administrators will
be viewed as leaders of teachers, children, non-professional staff and the community to
develop and maintain the best educational system possible.

EL 677 SUPERVISED INTERNSHIP 6 s.h.

A carefully planned field-based on internal work experience proposed by the
advanced graduate student to extend professional competence, subject to approval by
advisory committee. Registration only by permission.

EL 678 SEMINAR IN ELEMENTARY EDUCATION INTERNSHIP 3 s.h.

Provides opportunities for in-depth study in special areas in elementary education.
Designed primarily for doctoral and post master's candidates. Registration by permis-
sion only.

EL 680 SEMINAR IN ADVANCED RESEARCH 3 s.h.

This course focuses on the application of experimental and survey designs within the
school setting. Students will be expected to use the computer in analyzing a research
project. Students will be able to interpret factorial analysis of variance, analysis of
covariance, and also some non-parametric research designs.

EL 681 SPECIAL TOPICS IN EDUCATION 3 s.h.

Designed for the students who wish to do independent research in special areas.

EL 699 INDEPENDENT STUDY IN ELEMENTARY EDUCATION 1 -3 s.h.

Students will select one or more topics which are of critical importance in elementary
education and will meet staff members for independent reading, study, analysis, and
evaluation. Registration only by permission of Graduate Committee.

EL 850 THESIS 3 s.h.

For students writing a thesis. Should be scheduled for the semester in which the
student plans to complete his/her work. All thesis writing involves a committee com-
posed of the student's adviser, two additional (acuity members, and the Associate Dean
for Research.

EL 950 DISSERTATION 1-12 s.h.

Students preparing a doctoral dissertation for credit must register for this course.
Number of credits assigned and the extent of time for which research activity is
scheduled depend on nature and scope of student's research problem and his/her
general doctoral program.

NOTE: Credits for both thesis and dissertation, if not completed during the semester
scheduled, are recorded as RESEARCH IN PROGRESS. They remain so until the paper
is approved. They DO NOT automatically revert to the grade "F" in a specific length of
time. Also, thesis and dissertation can be programmed above the regular load.

N.B. Candidates wishing to select on emphasis in Reading are referred to the Reading
section of this catalog.

Programs and Courses — 105
English

ENGLISH

A candidate for a master's degree in English may choose a program
leading to either the Master of Education or the Master of Arts. The choice will
depend on the background of the candidate and his/her purpose of pursuing
graduate study. Both programs share a common aim of increasing the candi-
date's knowledge of English language and literature and introducing the stu-
dent to the discipline of advanced study. In addition, the Master of Education
degree aims at preparing teachers for public schools.

After a student is admitted to The Graduate School, the Director of Grad-
uate Studies will consult with him or her about the scheduling of courses. The
student should apply for the candidacy before 12 credits have been earned.

The writing of a thesis is optional for both the MA and the MEd degree. The
English department values writing and research: however, a candidate's deci-
sion concerning the thesis should be made on the basis of his/her purposes in
obtaining the degree and the extent to which training in research will enhance
both professional and personal goals. Under special circumstances and upon
request from The Graduate School, a thesis may be written for additional credit
after the student has already completed the master's degree without a thesis.

MASTER OF ARTS IN ENGLISH

The MA degree either with or without athesis requires a minimum of 30 s. h.
beyond the bachelor's degree. The candidate who chooses not to write a
thesis will take all 30 s h. in course work. Depending upon the nature of the
thesis, the candidate who chooses to do research will take either three or six
s.h. of the minimum 30 as thesis and the remainder in course work.

Required of all MA candidates ared ) EN 674 and (2) proficiency in a single
language in addition to English. The language requirement may be satisfied by
acceptable undergraduate credit of 12 hours, by examination through the
Foreign Languages Department at lUP, or by the Graduate School, Foreign
Language Test through the Educational Testing Service, Princeton.

The MA candidate may apply a maximum of six s.h. in a related field (e.g.
history, philosophy, psychology) toward a satisfying total course require-
ments. All hours remaining from the minimum 30 hours requirement will be
satisfied by courses listed in the catalog EN 529 through EN 699.

MASTER OF EDUCATION IN ENGLISH

The candidate for the MEd has the same thesis option as the candidate for
the MA. The MEd candidate must satisfy the following requirements: (1) A
Pennsylvania Teacher's Certificate in English or its equivalent from another
state (2) Three s.h. in Humanistic Studies: any course from FE 61 1 . 61 2. 61 3.
514 (3) Three s.h. in Behavioral Studies: EP 604. EP 573. EP 576. EP 578. EP
580. CE 629. CE 639. or EX 631 (4) Three hours m Research: GR 61 5 (5) Six
hours Specialization Core: EN 603 and EN 693; and (6) Three hours in bibli-
ographical methods: EN 674.

106 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

Depending upon choice of thesis options, the candidate will complete the
30 hour mininnunn requirement by taking from six to 12 hours of electives,
chosen from courses EN 529 through EN 699.

There is no foreign language requirement for the MEd.

For description of FE courses, see section on FOUNDATIONS OF EDU-
CATION; for EP courses, EDUCATIONAL PSYCHOLOGY; for CE courses,
COUNSELOR EDUCATION; for EX course, SPECIAL EDUCATION.

For description of OR courses, see entry under "GENERAL SERVICE
COURSES," page 41 .

DOCTOR OF PHILOSOPHY PROGRAMS

There are two distinct doctoral programs in English, one in English and
American literature, and the other in English Education designed for English
teachers in the community college. Both programs lead to a Doctor of
Philosophy in English.

I. Doctor of Philosophy in English and American Literature

The program leading to the Doctor of Philosophy in English and American
literature is designed for those who wish to teach at the college or university
level. As such, this plan of study places strong emphasis upon the humanistic
tradition in literature, for the values expressed therein are felt to be the
essential concern of a liberal arts education. A candidate for this degree is
expected.to acquire a broad knowledge in limited areas of study and to show
through the completion of an acceptable dissertation the ability to conduct an
independent investigation of a topic approved by the department. To become
a candidate the applicant must meet all The Graduate School requirements for
candidacy, as well as the special requirements of the English department.
Admission to course work beyond the master's degree does not constitute
admission to candidacy for the PhD program. No specific number of course
credits entitles a student to the degree, but a minimum of 60 semester hours of
credit, exclusive of research credits, must be earned beyond the bachelor's
degree. Applications for candidacy will be reviewed by a departmental com-
mittee after nine hours of graduate credit have been earned beyond the
master's degree and before 16 hours have been completed. In determining
whether or not an applicant should be accepted as a candidate forthe degree
of Doctor of Philosophy, an Advisory Committee will consider the applicant's
scores on the Graduate Record Examination, performance in course work,
and whenever applicable, performance as a teaching-intern.

On application for candidacy, the candidate will be assigned to an Advisory
Committee who will help the candidate prepare a plan of study for a compre-
hensive examination, both written and oral, which will be taken on the
recommendation of the Advisory Committee near the end of course require-
ments and before registering for EN 950 dissertation credits.

The linguistic requirement for PhD candidates, which must be completed
before the comprehensive examinations, may be satisfied by one of the
following comparative study options: (1 ) six graduate credits in theoretical or
applied linguistics; (2) six graduate credits in computer languages; (3) foreign
language proficiency as measured either by ETA or Foreign Language

Programs and Courses— 107
English

Department examinations. The student's Advisory Committee will attempt to
suit the language study to the student's needs as a teacher and researcher.
Sole authority in determining foreign language proficiency rests with the
Advisory Committee.

On approval of the Advisory Committee, a candidate may take as many as
nine graduate hours of course work in a minor field in support of major
research interest.

Although there are specific requirements for the degree, the professional
and educational background of a numberof students will make it necessary to
waive certain requirements to avoid needless duplication. Decisions to waive
requirements will be made by the student's Advisory Committee.

Candidates must demonstrate the capacity to teach effectively, either in
the departmental teaching-internship program, or through other acceptable
teaching experience. English is required of all candidates.

As this catalog is being prepared, the PhD program in English and Ameri-
can literature is undergoing revisions in order to strengthen its emphasis upon
the English teacher as humanist. Both requirements and course offerings can
be expected to change. A complete description can be obtained from the
English Department or from the Graduate School.

li. Doctor of Philosophy in English (Education)

The program which leadstotheDoctorof Philosophy in English is designed
for teaching English in the community college or the four-year college. The
pre-service candidate for this degree is expected to acquire a thorough under-
standing of the community college as an institution and to demonstrate, largely
through a semester's internship at a community college, the ability to teach
effectively.

The in-service candidate for this degree may have the internship waived
after a description and evaluation of his/her teaching experiences have been
accepted.

Upon admission to the program, the candidate will be assigned to a Pro-
gram/Evaluation Committee which will, in consultation with the candidate,
work out a program of study. The Program/Evaluation Committee will review
also the candidate's application for candidacy, which must be submitted after
nine hours of graduate credit have been earned and before 15 hours have
been completed. Another function of the Program/Evaluation Committee will
be to prepare a comprehensive examination, written and oral, for each candi-
date.

Although there are some general course and research requirements for
this degree, they may be waived by the student's Program/Evaluation Com-
mittee if they believe the student has already acquired the information or
specific competencies which these courses are designed to communicate or
develop. These general course requirements are as follows: EN 689, EN 692,
EN 631 , EN 603, a course in the teaching of literature, nine hours of elective
credits in psychology, sociology, communications media, etc.; a dissertation
related to English education; a semester's internship at a community college.

As this catalog is being prepared, the program is undergoing revision of
requirements and of course offerings. A complete description can be obtained
from the English Department or from the Graduate School.

108 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

COURSE DESCRIPTIONS

EN 529 HISTORY OF THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE 3 s.h.

Development of phonology, syntax and lexicon as well as rhetorical theories from Old
English through Modern English.

EN 542 CLASSICAL LITERATURE 3 s.h.

Ranges from drama to lyrics and epic poetry in translation.

EN 560 BRITISH LITERATURE TO 1500 3 s.h.

Intensive study of some major works of Old or Middle English.

EN 561 CHAUCER 3 s.h.

Ma)or works of Geoffrey Chaucer are studied as literature with emphasis upon
pronunciation, versification, language, and textual problems.

EN 565 BRITISH LITERATURE - RENAISSANCE (1500-1600) 3 s.h.

Investigation of an area of English Renaissance that is not currently treated in course
work.

EN 566 SHAKESPEARE

In addition to the plays and the scholarship on them, study of the historical theatrical
influences that affected Shakespeare.

EN 569 SEVENTEENTH CENTURY PROSE AND POETRY 3 s.h.

Major writers from the death of Elizabeth to 1 660, excluding Shakespeare and Milton.

EN 570 MILTON 3 s.h.

Major prose and poetry of John Milton and the religious and political controversies
reflected in Milton's work.

EN 579 ENGLISH ROMANTIC LITERATURE 3 S.h.

Works of the major poets and essayists from 1798 to 1832.

EN 580 VICTORIAN LITERATURE 3 s.h.

Examines major social, political, economic, and religious issues in the works of the
leading poets and prose writers from 1832 to 1890.

EN 581 SPECIAL TOPICS IN LANGUAGE AND LITERATURE 3 s.h.

Allows students to pursue subjects such as textual critcism, prosody, and computers
and literature not covered in detail in existing courses.

EN 590 LITERARY BRITAIN 3 or 6 s.h.

A three- or six-week's tour of major sites important to English literature Always
includes London, Stratford, and Cambridge.

EN 601 AMERICAN ENGLISH GRAMMAR 3 s.h.

Phonology, morphology and syntax of present-day English, various approaches to
analysis of English Grammar, and detailed consideration of problems of dialect and
appropriateness.

' EN 603 LINGUISTICS AND THE ENGLISH TEACHER 3 s.h.

Effects of modern linguistic theory on teaching of English, with special emphasis on
reading, composition, stylistic analysis, and dialect interference.

EN 611 MAJOR WRITERS 3 s.h

Concentrates on one or two major writers of American or British literature, such as
Twain, James, Wordsworth, Keats, etc

Programs and Courses— 109
English

EN 612 THE AMERICAN RENAISSANCE 3 s.h.

Works of major writers in mid-nineteenth century America.

EN 613 NATURALISM AND REALISM IN AMERICAN FICTION 3 s.h.

EN 614 MODERN AMERICAN FICTION 3 S.h.

Special studies in such figures as Dreiser, Anderson, Fitzgerald, Lewis, Dos Passes,
and Wolfe.

EN 615 TWENTIETH CENTURY AMERICAN DRAMA 3 s.h.

EN 616 AMERICAN LITERATURE TO 1870 3 s.h.

Major writers in Puritan period, early republic, and other phases up to and including
the Civil War.

EN 617 MODERN AMERICAN LITERATURE (from 1870) 3 s.h.

Study of particular author or group of authors; literary genre, literary movement,
restricted period of time, etc.

EN 631 SEMINAR IN LINGUISTICS 3 S.h.

Concentrates on a specific aspect of linguistics (e.g. sociolinguistics) to provide
stimulus for independent study.

EN 633 THE PSYCHOLOGY OF LANGUAGE 3 s.h.

An introduction to psycholinguistics for the English specialist, treating language as a
code, acquisition of language and patterns of normal and aberrant human language
behavior.

EN 672 EIGHTEENTH CENTURY PROSE AND POETRY 3 s.h.

Major figures such as Dryden, Pope, Swift, Johnson, Defoe, Fielding. Sterne, Smollett,
Burke, and Godwin.

EN 673 SEMINAR IN BRITISH DRAMA 3 s.h.

Ranges from medieval to modern drama; a thematic focus may sometimes be used.

EN 674 BIBLIOGRAPHICAL METHODS IN ENGLISH 3 s.h.

Practical training in special methods amd materials of research in English. Required
of all majors in English except those taking the PhD in English Education. Should be
taken early in the program.

EN 677 SEMINAR IN SHAKESPEARE 3 s.h.

Emphasis on individual study and research in primary and secondary sources.

EN 678 SEMINAR IN THE BRITISH NOVEL 3 s.h.

Focuses on novels of a given century; a thematic focus that ignores time divisions is
sometimes used.

EN 684 MODERN POETRY 3 s.h.

Study of Modern British or American or European poetry, or any combination of them.

EN 685 CRITICISM 3 s.h

Major statements of critical theory from Aristotle onward. Aims are both historical and
aesthetic.

EN 686 BLACK LITERATURE IN AMERICA 3 s.h.

Chronological study of Black American writing for students who have had little intro-
duction to Black literature. Emphasis on twentieth century.

110 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

EN 687 LITERATURE AND THE FILM 3 s.h.

Explores relationship between film and literature and the influences that each has
had on the other

"EN 689 ORIENTATION AND FIELD EXPERIENCE IN THE

COMMUNITY COLLEGE 3 s h.

Examines the community college from historical and philosophical perspectives.

Includes observations of classes and interviev^/s with staff at community colleges.

Specifically for students preparing for careers in the community college. To be taken

early in the program.

'EN 692 SEMINAR IN TEACHING BASIC COMMUNICATION SKILLS 3-6 s.h.
Instructs students in teaching of reading or of writing to adults. Reading/writing
taught in alternate semesters.

EN 693 SEMINAR IN TEACHING ENGLISH IN

THE SECONDARY SCHOOL 3 s.h

Explores recent development in teaching of language, composition, and literature.

EN 698 INTERNSHIP 3-12 s.h.

Practical experience in the student's area of interest, working under professional
supervision on the job. Special permission only, dependent upon needs of student's
program as well as personal and academic qualifications.

EN 699 INDEPENDENT STUDY 1-3 s.h.

Study of depth of topics not available through regular course work. Student works
with supervising professor on carefully planned, student-initiated project. Prior approval
necessary.

EN 850 THESIS 1-6 s.h,

EN 950 DISSERTATION 1-12 s.h.

NOTE: Special Topics in Language and Literature, and Major Writers, as well as all
seminars, may be scheduled more than once, because subject matter will
change with each offering of the course. More complete course descrip-
tions available from the department.

FOOD AND NUTRITION

The Master of Science Degree Program in Food and Nutrition is designed
to increase the student's denth of knowledge in food and nutrition, continue
professional growth through development of leadership ability, and increase
the student's capacity for independent action in scholarly and professional
pursuits. It may also lead to fulfilling the requirements for the American Dietetic
Association registration. Courses in intermediate nutrition and biochemistry
are required for entrance into the program, A faculty adviser will be assigned to
each student.

Professional Core: Elements of Reseach, 3 s.h, and Statistics I, 3 s,h. are
required of all students. Thesis, 4 s.h. is optional. With thesis, 30 s.h, are
required; without thesis, 33 s.h. are required for graduation.

Department Core: All students must choose 1 4 s.h, from courses: FN 544,
FN 558, FN 611, FN 642, FN 645, FN 646,

Programs and Courses —111
English
Food and Nutrition

University Core: All students may elect 4-10 s.h. from the lUP Graduate
Catalog with approval of their adviser.

COURSE DESCRIPTIONS

FN 510 FOOD, NUTRITION AND AGING 3 s h.

How food relates to health maintenance and special dietary problems during the
middle and later years.

FN 544 FOOD COMPOSITION AND BIOCHEMISTRY 3 s h.

Cover basic chemistry and biochemistry of essential components of food originating
from plant and animal sources. Pre-requisite CH 355.

FN 547 NUTRITIONAL ASPECTS OF FOOD PROCESSING 3 s.h.

Studies current known effects of food processing techniques on the nutritional value
and safety of food. Pre-requisites: FN 212, Bl 241

FN 558 ADVANCED HUMAN NUTRITION 3 s.h.

Nutritional needs and problems occuring during pregnancy, infancy, early childhood,
adolescence and aging. Pre-requisites: FN 212, CH 355, Bl 151.

FN 561 MICROWAVE COOKING TECHNOLOGY 3 s.h.

Examines the electronic technology, selection, care and use of the microwave oven.
Basic physical and chemical concepts related to microwave cooking Individual
research problem required. Two lectures, two lab hours per week.

FN 611 NUTRITION IN THE LIFE CYCLE 3 s.h.

Studies body functions at different stages of development under differing environ-
mental conditions and at various levels of biological organization.

FN 641 CULTURAL ASPECTS OF FOODS 3 s.h.

Investigation and analysis of historical, political, religious, ethnic, environmental, and
social influences affecting food habits and customs. Major cuisines of the world and
regional U.S. are included.

FN 642 CONTEMPORARY ISSUES IN FOOD AND NUTRITION 3 s.h.

Current information in foods and nutrition is investigated, analyzed and evaluated for
practical implementation

FN 643 SEMINAR IN CLINICAL DIETETICS 3 s.h.

Examines nutritional management of the hospitalized patient with emphasis on the
role of the dietitian. Research for a paper and seminar presentation required.

FN 645 PROTEINS, CARBOHYDRATES AND FATS IN NUTRITION 4 s.h.

Nutritional considerations of protein, carbohydrates and fat metabolism. In vitro and
in vivo analysis as well as physiologic and biochemical function of these nutrients.

FN 646 VITAMINS AND MINERALS 4 s.h.

Biochemical role of vitamins and minerals as co-factors in macronutrient
metabolism. Focus on biochemical and physiologic functions, research, and analytical
methods. Pre-requisite: FN 645.

FN 652 INTERNSHIP 1 -6 s.h.

Supervised work experience for Food and Nutrition majors. Permission: Department
Chairman.

112 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

FOREIGN LANGUAGES^

GERMAN

The programs leading to the MA and MEd degrees in German have a
number of goals in common and overlap in several areas. Both programs seek
to improve the candidate's proficiency in German and to increase the stu-
dent's knowledge of German culture and civilization. While sharing common
aims, each program is flexible enough to be tailored to the individual candi-
date's purposes and desires for pursuing graduate study.

A minimum of 30 semester hours of graduate work is required, including
three s.h. of Elements of Research (GR 61 5) for the MEd. The thesis is optional
(0-six s.h.). The remainder of the courses is to be taken in areas directly related
to the student's main field of study All candidates for advanced degrees in
German will also demonstrate their achievement and proficiency by success-
fully passing comprehensive oral and written examinations on all graduate
work in German completed at lUP.

Candidates for the Master of Arts degree must earn a minimum of 1 8 s.h of
credit in German courses (GM 61 0 through GM 653) and provide evidence of
proficiency in a second foreign language. Candidates for the Master of Edu-
cation degree must earn a minimum of 15 s.h. m German courses and suc-
cessfully complete one course in the area of Foundations of Education.

For description of GR courses, see entry under "GENERAL SERVICE
COURSES," page 41

Duisburg program: lUP students can take up to 1 0 credits at the Univer-
sity of Duisburg in the Federal Republic of Germany.

COURSE DESCRIPTIONS

GM610 HISTORY OF THE GERMAN LANGUAGE 3 s h.

History and development of German language, with special emphasis on relation-
ships with English. Analysis of annals in Gothic, Old High German, and Middle High
German using methods of historical and contemporary linguistics

GM 61 1 ADVANCED COMPOSITION & STYLISTICS 3 s.h

Development of abilities in German composition and stylistics which will lead to
greater facility and accuracy in writing German

GM612 ADVANCED ORAL PRACTICE 3 s.h

Designed to achieve fluency and accuracy in spoken German by using various
media to provide framework for guided discussions of current topics.

GM613 GERMAN PHONETICS 3sh

Analysis of physiological and linguistic factors of spoken German Practice on critical
areas of German pronunciation and intonation, with special emphasis on potential inter-
ferences between German and English.

'Potential applicants should discuss with the Graduate School the availability of course
offerings in the foreign languages before submitting an application for admission.

Programs and Courses— 113
Foreign Languages

GM 620 SEMINAR ON GERMAN LANGUAGE 3 s.h.

In-depth study of structure and grammar of tfie language

GM 630 SEMINAR ON GERMAN CULTURE 3 s.h

In-depth study of German culture from either an historical, fine arts perspective or
from an anthropological, sociological point of view. Independent research with oral
and/or written reports required.

GM 640 SEMINAR ON GERMAN LITERATURE 3 s.h.

In-depth study of particular author, or genre requiring independent research.
Seminar topics to vary on a rotating basis, depending on staff and student interest,

GM 653 ADVANCED METHODOLOGY 3 s.h.

Demonstrations and discussions of current teaching strategies to provide teachers
of German with greater expertise in dealing with problem in motivation, articulation, and
other pedagogical concerns. Topics vary from time to time, depending on background
and experience of participants involved.

GM 699 INDEPENDENT STUDY 1 -3 s.h.

SPANISH

The Spanish Division of the Foreign Languages Department offers pro-
grams of study leading to either the Master of Arts or the Master of Education
degree in Spanish Language and Literature. The MA degree is recommended
to those who plan to pursue studies towards the PhD degree. The MEd degree
in Spanish Language and Literature is designed especially for those who plan
a career as secondary school teachers or those already employed as
teachers in a school system. Geared to both full and part-time students, since
its inception in 1966, the program has served more than 100 graduate stu-
dents.

MASTER OF ARTS

IN SPANISH LANGUAGE AND LITERATURE

Candidates for the MA degree in Spanish Language and Literature must
successfully complete a minimum of 30 s.h. of which at least 24 s.h. are to
represent the area of concentration as well as a minimum of four different
literary epochs chosen from courses in Peninsular and/or Spanish American
literature. Required courses for the MA degree are: SP 600 or SP 601 and SP
606. Thesis is optional: if the candidate chooses the "No Thesis" option,
he/she must complete 33 s.h. with a minimum of 27 s.h. in the area of concen-
tration. For admission to degree candidacy the student must demonstrate a
reading knowledge of a second foreign language acceptable to the
department.

114 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

MASTER OF EDUCATION

IN SPANISH LANGUAGE AND LITERATURE

Candidates for the MEd degree in Spanish Language and Literature are
required to successfully complete 30 s h. with distribution as follows: A
mininnum of 15 s.h. in Spanish area studies which must represent courses
chosen from at least three different literary epochs in Peninsular and/or
Spanish American literature. One course in Foundations of Education (three
s.h.) to be selected from among: FE61 1 ,61 2, 61 3. 51 4. One course (three s.h.)
to be chosen from among the following Behavioral Studies: EP 604, EP 573, EP
576, EP 578, EP 580, CE 629, CE 639 or EX 631 OR 61 5 Elements of Research
is required of all students in the MEd program. Two courses or six s.h. from
among the following: FE 515, CtVI 600, SP 605 Required courses in Spanish
are: SP 600 or SP 601 and SP 606. if the student chooses the "No Thesis"
option, he/she must then complete 1 8 s.h. in Spanish or a total of 33 s.h. For
admission to degree candidacy the student must demonstrate a satisfactory
reading knowledge of a second foreign language acceptable to the depart-
ment.

For description of FE courses, see section on FOUNDATIONS OF EDU-
CATION; for EP courses, EDUCATIONAL PSYCHOLOGY; for CE courses,
COUNSELOR EDUCATION: for EX course, SPECIAL EDUCATION: and CM
course, COMMUNICATIONS MEDIA

For description of GR courses, see entry under "GENERAL SERVICE
COURSES," page 41.

Curriculum for the MA and MEd Degrees in
Spanish Language and Literature

I Spanish Language and Literature (Area of Concentration) Courses SP
600 through 699 provide subject matter content in the area of speciali-
zation for both the Master of Arts and the Master of Education degrees.
MA candidates are to complete 24 to 30 s.h. and MEd candidates a
minimum of 15 to 18 s.h, chosen from these courses some of which
represent required courses. FL 525 Valladolid Program for which six s.h.
will be allotted is optional provided that the candidate has not elected
the Valladolid program as an undergraduate.

II. Related Studies

A limited number of graduate credits may be elected from related areas
of study with departmental approval

COURSE DESCRIPTIONS

PL 521 LANGUAGE AND SOCIETY 3 s.h.

Salient facts of language and its fundamental role in development and continuity of
society and culture, including language families and tfieir characteristics, factors of
linguistic change and development, reciprocal influences of culture and language,
linguistic borrowing, psycholinguistics. and systems of writing. (Open to majors and
non-majors.)

Programs and Courses —115
Foreign Languages

FL 525 FOREIGN STUDY - VALLADOLID (Optional) 6 s.h.

Intensive study ot Spanish language and culture at the University of Valladolid, Spain,
from approximately January 7 to fVlay 30 For detailed description consult the lUP publi-
cation "The Pennsylvania — Valladolid Study in Spam Program."

SP 580 FOREIGN STUDY — JALAPA (Optional) 1 -3 s.h.

Intensive study of Spanish language and f\/lexican culture at the University of
Veracruz in Jalapa, Mexico, from approximately July 7 to August 20. Credits subject to
approval of the Director of the Program.

Hispanic Graduate Studies

Series 600-605: Philology, Stylistics, Grammar and Methodology.

SP 600 HISTORY OF THE SPANISH LANGUAGE 3 S.h.

Traces phonological, morphological, lexical and syntactical evoluation of Castilian
dialect from its origins in Vulgar Latin through its development, perfection and ultimate
recognition as the official language of Spam and Spanish America. Places Castilian
linguistically with relation to other Romance Languages and considers features peculiar
to Spanish of Latin America.

SP 601 ADVANCED GRAMMAR. COMPOSITION

AND CONVERSATION 3 s.h

Advanced grammar composition and oral fluency intended to substantially improve
understanding of Spanish grammar and syntax, increase vocabulary and command of
language, and to provide opportunity for acquisition of poise and ease of self-expres-
sion

SP 605 METHODOLOGY OF FOREIGN LANGUAGE TEACHING 3 s.h.

Improvement of teaching skills and an increased understanding and awareness of
implications of current research to foreign language teaching and learning theory as
well as development of strategies for testing and evaluation of student learning and
exploration of curncular innovations.

SP 606 METHODS OF RESEARCH, CRITICISM, AND STYLISTICS 3 s.h.

Acquaints students with tools of research in the field. MLA style sheet, histories of
literature, historical grammars, dictionaries, literary criticisms, recognized collections of
literary texts, critical editions and monograph studies as well as various scholarly
journals devoted to romance philology and literatures. Introduction tohistory of Spanish
literary criticism and to stylistics as a tool of literary analysis applied to representative
works of various epoch styles.

Spanish Peninsular Literature

Series 610-650

SP610 MEDIEVAL SPANISH LITERATURE 3 s.h.

Reading and discussion of various medieval genres: epic poetry (Julgana and
clerecia): lyric and didactic poetry: prose (Alfonso X and selections from the Cronica
general, the Partidas, the Cantigas, etc : Juan Manuel and the apologue); Danza
general de la Muerte, the debate and the medieval drama

SP615 PHOTO-RENAISSANCE LETTERS AND MASTERPIECES 3 s.h.

Critical appreciation of transitional literary forms of XV century Spam; poetry and the
Cancioneros and the Romancero, prose (history, biography and satiric-didactic litera-
ture, apologues). Special emphasis on Libro de buen amor and La Celestina.

116 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

SP 620 RENAISSANCE AND HUMANISM 3 s.h.

Consideration of cultural contributions of Spanish Christian Humanism together with
a careful study of Renaissance lyric poetry (Italianate and traditional veins); the epic; the
novel (in its various forms); Pre-Lopesque theater; the dialogue; ascetic and mystical
prose and poetry; history.

SP 625 THE SPANISH BAROQUE 3 s.h.

An insight into typical Baroque themes, motifs and stylistic devices through analysis
and interpretation of important works of XVII century authors. Poetry (lyric and epic);
prose (novel and novella); literary criticism and polemics; drama.

SP 626 GOLDEN AGE DRAMA 3 s.h.

Readings and intepretations of major dramatists (Lope and Calderon) and exami-
nation of XVII century drama, its peculiar national character, and its relationship to con-
temporary society and culture;

SP 630 NEOCLASSICISM AND ROMANTICISM 3 s.h.

Compares and contrasts cultural and ideological expression of XVIII century Spain
— both French cultural influence and popular reaction to the trend — as manifested in
the prose (polemic, erudite, narrative and philosophic), poetry and theater of the period
to artist and literary aesthetics of the first half of XIX century Spain as reflected in poetry,
novel, drama and literary perceptive of her imported Romanticism together with an
appreciation of the late romantic Becquer.

SP 635 COSTUMBRISM, REALISM AND NATURALISM 3 s.h.

Studies and analysis of "Articulos de costumbres" and especially several trends in
the novel of latter half of the XIX century in Spain. (Fernan Caballero, Alarcon, Valera,
Pereda. Palacio Valdes, Pardo Bazan, Blasco Ibanez, Clarin and Perez Galdos).

SP 640 GENERATION OF 1898 3 s.h.

A critical excursion into minds of the last XIX and early XX century novelists and
thinkers and their works. Emphasis on novels and essays of Unamuno, Ganivet, Azorin,
Baroja, Valle-lnclan, Ortega y Gasset and Perez de Ayala.

SP 645 MODERNISM, CONTEMPORARY AND
POST-CONTEMPORARY POETRY
Study and analysis of lyric poetry in Spam from Modernism and its evolution to
present

SP 650 SPANISH LITERATURE OF THE XX CENTURY 3 s.h.

Trends m Spanish Novel after Civil War A) 1940-1961: Tremendismo and
testimonial novel; Social Realism and Objectivism. B) 1 962 to present; reaction against
Social Realism and Objectivism; new tendencies. C) short story. D) study and interpre-
tation of Spanish theater from generation of 1898 to present.

Spanish American Literature and Culture

SP 581 SPECIAL TOPICS 3 s h

Study of an author, genre, epoch or literary movement.

Series 655-699

SP 655 PRE-COLUMBIAN LITERATURE AND SPANISH

AMERICAN CIVILIZATION 3 s.h.

Literature, art, myth and thought of Indian civilizations of Latin America with emphasis
on Aztecs, Mayas and Incas as well as history and culture of Spanish America, Spanish
American character, traditions and ideology from its origins to the present.

Programs and Courses— 117
Foreign Languages

SP 660 COLONIAL PERIOD 3 s.h.

Representative chroniclers, poets and dramatists from the letters of Columbus to end
of the XVI century together with a study of various literary genres during the XVII and
XVIII centuries in Spanish America with special emphasis on Baroque and Neoclassical
trends.

SP 665 ROMANTICISM AND GAUCHESQUE LITERATURE 3 s.h.

A detailed study of the Romantic period, its European influences and unique char-
acteristics of Romanticism in Spanish America with representative poets, novelists and
essayists read against the XIX century historical background. Development of
Gauchesque genre in Argentina and its characteristics, interrelated with the geograph-
ical, historical and social backgrund with emphasis on Gauchesque poetry,

SP 670 MODERNISM 3 s.h.

Modernistic movement of Spanish American literature history, and its relation to
certain European artistic trends and movements. Aesthetic principles of modernism
together with its renovation in themes, vocabulary, syntax and versification will be seen
as reflected in the criticism and works of the movement's outstanding authors,

SP 675 POST-MODERNISM AND AVANT-GARDE POETRY 3 s.h.

A study of the reaction against modernism as characterized by new techniques of
post modernistic poetry, followed by an analysis of historical and socio-cultural situation
of "avant-garde" movements. Discussion of characteristics of works of major Spanish
American "avant-garde" poets.

SP 680 REGIONALISTIC NOVEL 3 s.h.

A study of the "maestros" of Spanish American regionalism of the early XX century,
including novelists Gallegos, Rivera, Azuela, Guiraldes, Icaza, Algeria, etc.

SP 685 XX CENTURY SPANISH AMERICAN LITERATURE 3 s.h.

Literary expressions in Spanish America from end of the XIX century to present.

SP 690 CONTEMPORARY NOVEL AND SHORT STORY 3 s.h

Major contemporary novelists and short-story writers (Borges, Onetti, Cortazer,
Carpentier, Rulfo, Garcia Marquez, etc.), with an examination of their major themes,
techniques and stylistic features.

SP 695 THE SPANISH AMERICAN ESSAY 3 s.h.

Development of theory and ideological essay from the last two decades of the XIX
century to present with stress on contemporary period. Essays will be read both as a
literary genre and as a vehicle of ideas against the historical background.

SP 699 INDEPENDENT STUDY 1-3 s.h.

118 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

FOUNDATIONS OF EDUCATION

The Foundations of Education Department seeks to expose its students to
a systematic inquiry into educational theories and practices through a philo-
sophical, sociological, historical, and comparative analysis. Foundations
study generates criteria for judgment and helps to formulate a Gestalt of
various subjects. It also helps to develop an integral cross sectional view of
education, while augmenting the construction, clarification, and evaluation of
educational goals necessary for development of effective methods of instruc-
tion. Furthermore, it broadens perspectives and deepens analysis of policies
and programs which help educational personnel find meaning and value in all
educational activities.

COURSE DESCRIPTIONS

FE514 COMPARATIVE FOUNDATIONS OF EDUCATION 3 s,h.

Educational theories and practices in different nations will be studied. Educational
purposes, curriculum, methods, administration, school systems, teacher education, and
other educational features in America and those in other nations, will be analyzed,
evaluated and compared

FE515 CURRICULUM DEVELOPMENT 3 s.h.

Analysis of philosophical, sociological, and psychological basis for creation of cur-
riculum patterns, K-1 4, Includes utilization of technological devices, critical examination
of basic concepts underlying determination of objectives, selection and organization of
subject matter and of learning experiences in general. Current curriculum research will
be analyzed, as will existing instructional materials and programs.

FE 595 INTERNATIONAL EDUCATION STUDIES PROGRAMS 3 s.h.

A travel-seminar conducted in a foreign country and designed to afford educators
and students of education the opportunity to investigate teaching-learning process in
cultural settings other than their own. Particular attention to such current educational
issues as theories of curriculum development, methodology, teacher education, and
changing value systems

FE611 HISTORICAL FOUNDATIONS OF EDUCATION 3 s.h.

Study of historical development of American education. European influences on
philosophies and practices of American schools will serve as a background. Emphasis
on development of education in America as influenced by various individuals and
schools of thought. Historical trends will be related to current problems and practices in
education

FE612 PHILOSOPHICAL FOUNDATIONS OF EDUCATION 3 s.h.

Analysis and evaluation of basic philosophies and their impact upon education.
Nature, value, means and ends of education and some other fundamental phases of
schooling will be thoroughly examined. Stress on essentials enhancing an individual
working philosophy of education; basic ideas heightening a sound philosophy for
American schools

FE613 SOCIAL FOUNDATIONS OF EDUCATION 3 s.h.

Social and cultural forces which influence education. Particular stress on current
problems as they relate to entire educational system and to curricular problems and
practices in today's schools.

Programs and Courses —119
Foundations of Education
Geography and Regional Planning

FE616 PROFESSIONAL NEGOTIATIONS IN EDUCATION 3 s h.

Study dimension of professional negotiations process in educational sector Instruc-
tional tools will be case studies, lecture-discussion and reading assignments. Guide-
lines of public policy affecting public employer-employee relations will also be evalu-
ated and analyzed.

FE 699 INDEPENDENT STUDY 1-6s.fi.

GEOGRAPHY AND REGIONAL PLANNING

Degree progranns provide students with common core of course work in
geographic philosophy, research, and techniques. Students may elect to take
a subject matter concentration in regional development, regional planning, or
cartography.

Graduates of the program are employed by the state and federal govern-
ment, city, county and regional planning commissions, private consultant
firms, business and industry, and secondary schools, colleges and univer-
sities. Knowledge of spatial location patterns and processes and environ-
mental concerns; the planning field, its organization, and operation; and geo-
graphic and cartographic skills, including computer application is of value to
the graduate in the job search.

Students usually hold bachelor's degree in geography or one of the social
sciences. Persons with degrees in education, science or business find a
degree in geography of value.

Three master's programs are offered. The MA and MS degrees in geog-
raphy require a common core of courses. Thereafter, the MA candidate is free
to take any geography course offered; the MS candidate elects a concentra-
tion. The MEd in geography is available to educators.

Students may elect a thesis or non-thesis option. A minimum of 30 s.h. is
required for the degree with thesis; 36 s.h. are required without a thesis. Stu-
dents may apply course work in related fields to the degree with their adviser's
permission

MASTER OF ARTS AND MASTER OF SCIENCE
IN GEOGRAPHY

I. Core Program (nine s.h.); Thought and Philosophy in Geography and
Planning; Elements of Research in Geography and Planning; Quantita-
tive Techniques in Geography and Planning.

II. Electives and/or Thesis (21 -27 s.h.)

A. The MA candidate elects 1 5-20 s h. in geography and relatedfields
with the thesis (one to six s.h.) and 27 s.h. without thesis.

720 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

B. The MS candidate takes a concentration in regional development,
regional planning and cartography (12 s.h. minimum), elects three
to nine s.h^ in geography and related fields with thesis (one to six
s.h ) and 1 5 s.h. without thesis. Six s.h. in internship may be included.

MASTER OF EDUCATION IN GEOGRAPHY

I. Professional Development Area: (nine s.h.) Humanistic Studies (three
s.h. from the following): FE 61 1 ; FE 61 2; FE 61 3; FE 51 4; Behavioral
Studies (three s h. from the following): EP 604; EP 573; EP 576; EP 578;
EP 580: CE 629; CE 639; EX 631 ; Research (three s.h. required of all
students): GR 615.

II. Specialization Core (six s.h from the following list): FE 515, CM 600,
GE 670

III. Subject Area and/or Thesis: 15 s.h. in geography.

For description of FE courses, see section on FOUNDATIONS OF EDUCA-
TION; for EP courses, EDUCATIONAL PSYCHOLOGY; for CE courses,
COUNSELOR EDUCATION: for EX course, SPECIAL EDUCATION for CM
course, COMMUNIATIONS MEDIA

For description of GR courses, see entry under "GENERAL SERVICE
COURSES." page 41.

COURSE DESCRIPTIONS

GE 51 1 THOUGHT & PHILOSOPHY IN GEOGRAPHY & PLANNING 3 s h

History of the disciplines, great ideas, leading professionals, and unresolved issues
are dealt with.

GE513 CARTOGRAPHY 3 s.h.

Develops ability to map and diagram human and environmental phenomena. Special
maps, charts, and diagrams will be considered as required by students. Recommended
for all master s candidates

GE514 MAP & PHOTOGRAPH INTERPRETATION 3 s.h

Develops skill in extracting information and synthesizing data from maps and aerial

photographs as applied to geologic, land use, economic and transportation problems,

GE515 REfvlOTE SENSING 3 s.h.

Methods of remote sensing such as thermal sensing, multi-spectral scanning,
satellite imagery, side-looking airborne radar imagery, and additive color analysis and
their applications, particularly as applied to geographic and planning problems are
studied-

GE 531 POPULATION GEOGRAPHY 3 s h.

Spatial variations in numbers, characteristics and dynamics of human population,
models and theoretical constructs relevant to demographic structures and processes
are studied.

Programs and Courses— 121
Geography and Regional Planning

GE 532 URBAN GEOGRAPHY 3 s.h.

Analysis of city types, patterns and functions as influenced by geographic conditions
and other factors. City planning techniques and field study are utilized.

GE 534 POLITICAL GEOGRAPHY 3 s.h.

Geographic factors and conditions are analyzed as they relate to character and

function of states Political institutions are evaluated in light of geographic conditions.

GE 540 CONSERVATION: ENVIRONMENTAL ANALYSIS 3 s.h.

Problems of exploitation and utilization of regional resources, i.e.: soils, minerals,
forests, and wildlife in relation to population growth and regional planning and develop-
ment

GE 550 REGIONAL GEOGRAPHY 3 s.h.

Various regions of the world may be dealt with, such as Latin America. Africa, or
South Asia when there is sufficient student demand. Physical, environmental, cultural
and population patterns are considered.

GE 551 GEOGRAPHY OF PENNSYLVANIA 3 s.h.

Regions of Pennsylvania are examined in detail to identify man-environment
relationships. Soils, topography, climate, vegetation, population and economic patterns
are studied.

GE 560 INTRODUCTION TO PLANNING 3 s.h.

Introduction to field of planning on city, metropolitan, regional and county levels.
Included are: intergovernmental context and legislative basis for planning: the compre-
hensive plan: plan implementation: and the planning agency.

GE 561 PLANNING: BASIC STUDIES & ANALYSIS 3 s.h.

Research, analytical design and plan-making techniques in urban and regional plan-
ning. Examines basic items necessary to prepare urban and regional comprehensive
plans Prerequisite: GE 560.

GE 562 PLANNING: DEVELOPIVlENT OF PRINCIPLES & THEORY 3 s.h.

Examines process of city planning during ancient, medieval, renaissance and
modern periods. A review of early planning in America, as well as present city planning is
included. Prerequisite: GE 560.

GE 563 PLANNING: DESIGN 3 s.h.

Presents concepts of city, subdivision and transportation design in relation to
topography, natural resources, and other physical elements Prerequisite GE 560.

GE 564 LAND USE POLICY 3 s.h.

Basic concepts of land use policy at the national, regional, county and local levels are

treated Analysis is made of the various land use policies

GE 571 AEROSPACE WORKSHOP 3 s.h.

Workshop conducted with visiting aerospace authorities on space, environment,
history of flight, flight problems, satellites, space probes, space exploration, etc. Flight
training included.

GE 581 /

681 SPECIAL TOPICS 3 s h

Topical courses offered on an experimental basis Check department schedule for

these offerinas

122 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

GE 610 ELEMENTS OF RESEARCH IN GEOGRAPHY

& REGIONAL PLANNING 3 s.h.

Elements and techniques of scientific research, as applied to geographic and plan-
ning problems, are studied- A research proposal is developed.

GE 612 QUANTITATIVE TECHNIQUES IN GEOGRAPHY

AND PLANNING 3 s.h.

Descriptive and inferential statistical techniques applied to spatial distribution and
spatial association of physical and cultural phenomena and testing of spatial theoretical,
constructs.

GE617 FIELD TECHNIQUES IN GEOGRAPHY AND PLANNING 3 s.h.

Field techniques are evaluated. Field tools and techniques are used in the study of a

specific area. Emphasis is upon skill and interpretation of spatial patterns of phenomena.

GE 620 SPATIAL STRUCTURE OF THE ECONOIVIY 3 s.h.

The spatial organization of economic systems is studied. Various processes that give
rise to these systems and their spatial interdependencies will be explored. Some topical
and regional examples of spatial structure will be used as case studies.

GE 621 AGRICULTURAL GEOGRAPHY 3 s.h.

World agricultural patterns are the core of this course. Specific problems will be
studied in view of both the countries involved and world environment,

GE 622 INDUSTRIAL GEOGRAPHY 3 s.h.

Spatial aspects of industry are considered. Emphasis is placed on the locational
patterns of industry particularly as they relate to resource assessment.

GE 623 REGIONAL DEVELOPMENT 3 s.h.

Theory of and the policy implications of the spatial aspects of development in various
regions of underdevelopment in the world.

GE 630 CULTURAL GEOGRAPHY 3 s.h.

Literature and methods of cultural geography. Topics include population, settle-
ments, human ecology, culture areas, and related features.

GE 633 SETTLEMENT GEOGRAPHY 3 s.h.

Settlement patterns and processes: origins, diffusion, classification, pioneer, settle-
ment planning, and agricultural colonization,

GE 665 URBAN PLAN IMPLEMENTATION 3 s.h.

Considers zoning, improvement programs, housing codes, building codes method-
ology and application of administrative procedures, federal and local urban renewal pro-
grams, site selection, program administration. Prerequisite: GE 560.

GE 666 URBAN PLANNING SEMINAR 3 s.h.

Will vary in content according to students enrolled and their interest. Prerequisite: GE
560,

GE 670 PROFESSIONAL PROBLEMS IN GEOGRAPHIC EDUCATION 3 s,h.

Classroom problems and discussion centered about new viewpoints in geography
Individual reports, group discussion and research included.

GE 680 SEMINAR 3-6 s.h

Seminars on various topics will be offered occasionally. Topics might be new trends
in planning, cartographic theory or spatial aspects of service industries.

Programs and Courses — 123
Geography and Regional Planning
Geoscience

GE 698 INTERNSHIP 3-12 s.h.

Professional learning experience with emphasis on practical application of
academic background Open to students who have completed at least 12 s.h. of grad-
uate work with a minimum of 3 0 GPA. Six s.h. only applicable to degree programs.

GE 699 INDEPENDENT STUDY 1 -6 s h

Independent research and study under faculty direction Interested students should
apply to director of graduate studies.

GEOSCIENCE

Tine department offers an MA in geology which requires a nninimum of 30
s.h. of approved graduate study including a four to six s.h. connmittee thesis. A
further requirennent is a five s.h. (minimum) summer geology field camp
course, an experience which should be part of every geologist's background.
A summer field course taken as an undergraduate will satisfy this requirement.
The summer field course will not satisfy any part of the department's 30 s.h.
geology or geoscience requirements, although it may, in some cases, earn
graduate credit.

Applicants are expected to have an undergraduate degree in science and
to have had math through calculus and a year of both general chemistry and
physics. Any significant undergraduate course deficiencies may have to be
remedied.

COURSE DESCRIPTIONS

GS511 SEDIMENTARY PETROLOGY 3 s.h.

Determination and interpretation of gram size parameters: an introduction to clays
and clay mineralogy: hand lens and petrographic microscope study of marine
phosphorites, carbonates, siliceous sediments, heavy minerals, and sandstones with
emphasis on interpreting ancient depositional environments.

GS512 STRATIGRAPHY 3 s.h.

Study of layered rocks with emphasis on the guiding principles of stratigraphy, the
evaluation of unconformities, the principles and problems of correlation, and selected
stratigraphy problems.

GS 520 PENNSYLVANIA GEOLOGY 3 s.h.

Diversity and abundance of geologic phenomenon within the state will be used to
apply basic geologic concepts of time, rock types and structures and geomorphic
processes. Extensive field trips will be an integral part.

GS 522 IGNEOUS & METAMORPHIC PETROLOGY 3 s.h.

Study of rock phyla and their chemical and spatial relationships in the earth. Special
attention of the genesis, mineral composition, and classification of rock types. Ecology
of igneous, sedimentary, and metamorphic rocks is studied in detail. Prerequisite:
Mineralogy

124 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

GS 524 GLACIAL GEOLOGY 3 s.h.

Study of phenomenon of glaciation, including study of glacial movement, glacial
deposits, and an investigation of possible causes of glaciation. A working acquaintance
withi glacial land forms is provided by means of field trips to glaciated region of N.W.
Pennsylvania

GS 526 STRUCTURAL FIELD GEOLOGY 3 s h.

Includes; techiniques of geologic field work sucfi as measuring sections, use of aerial
pfiotograpfis, and a field project involving compilation of a geologic map, cross sections,
and geologic report

GS 527 GEOf\/IORPHOLOGY 3 s h.

Landforms and processes and principles tfiat govern botfi tfieir origin and their
subsequent development Prerequisite: Structural Geology.

GS 530 PALEONTOLOGY 3 s.h

A morphological study of ma|or invertebrate life forms of geologic past and their
distribution in space and time. Prerequisite: Historical Geology or Zoology.

GS 535 ECONOMIC GEOLOGY 3 s h

Study of earth's metallic and non-metallic mineral resources with regard to
processes of formation, methods of extraction (mining and drilling methods), methods of
treatment, uses, and economic and environmental factors,

GS 536 GEOLOGY OF THE NORTHERN ROCKIES 3 s.h.

A field study of the major geologic features and relationships involved in the develop-
ment of the northern Rocky Mountains. National Park and Monument areas of South
Dakota, Wyoming and Montana are included among the areas investigated. Prerequi-
site: Permission of instructor.

GS 540 PETROLEUM GEOLOGY 3 s.h.

An introduction to the geology of petroleum, its origin, migration, entrapment and
production. The laboratory is designed to provide practical experience in sub-surface
mapping techniques and the use and evaluation of geophysical logging devices.

GS 541 THE SOLAR SYSTEM 3 s.h.

Characteristics and behavior of planets and their satellites, asteroids, meteors,
comets, and other phenomena of the solar system. One of the major topics will be to
investigate and criticize several of the theories of its origin. It will require sometreatment
of celestial mechanics but will not require a background of calculus.

GS 542 THE SIDEREAL UNIVERSE 3 s h

Characteristics and classification of the stars, their assemblage in groups and
galaxies and their evolution Techniques of gathering data are examined to gam an
understanding of the role of the telescope, spectroscope and photometer in astronom-
ical research Lab exercises and night observations are a part of the course. Credit will
be given only to those for whom the course represents an area of study for which credit
has not previously been recorded

GS 543 CARBONATE GEOLOGY FLORIDA 3 s h

Two weeks of field study in Florida Keys Will be conducted from base camp in Florida
Keys and will consist of both land and water works as the different carbonate environ-
ments in the Keys, Florida Bay, and the Atlantic reef tract are studied.

GS 550 OPERATION OF THE PLANETARIUM 1-2 s.h

Designed to acquaint student with the operation and use of the Spitz Planetarium A
satisfactory instructional program or show for a public group will demonstrate accom-
plishment of course objectives. Prerequisites: One year astronomy or equivalent

Programs and Courses —125
Geoscience
Health and Physical Education

HEALTH AND PHYSICAL EDUCATION

The master of science degree in sport sciences is designed to attract stu-
dents from the non-teaching professions as well as the teaching profession. It
is discipline-oriented with provisions for the student to choose between two
major areas of emphasis: professional specialization and sport studies.
Options for professional specialization are provided in sport management,
sport broadcast journalism, and aquatics administration and facilities man-
agement. Options in sport studies are interdisciplinary in nature and tailored to
meet individual needs and interests.

Requirements for Admission — To be admitted to the Health and
Physical Education Department, the applicant must have completed the
requirements for a bachelor's degree from an accredited college or university
and fulfill the general requirements for admission to The Graduate School for a
master's degree as discussed in this bulletin.

Requirements for Candidacy — Acceptance into The Graduate School
permits a student to take course work in the department. If a student wishes to
become a degree candidate, he/she must complete the Application to Candi-
dacy and forward this form to the dean of Health Services after having suc-
cessfully completed six hours of course work in the department.

MASTER OF SCIENCE IN SPORT SCIENCES

Students may choose between a thesis or non-thesis curriculum
depending upon individual preference and needs.

I. Thesis Degree Requirements (30 s.h.)

A. Core Courses (20-24 s.h.): HP 600, HP 601 , HP 602, HP 603, GR 61 5,
GR 516, HP 850.

B. Electives (six-10 s.h.)

Students may, with the advise and consent of an adviser, select
electives from any of the approved graduate level courses.

II. Non-Thesis Degree Requirements (36 s.h.)

A. Core Courses (18 s.h.): HP 600, HP 601, HP 602, HP 603, GR 615,
GR 516.

B. Electives (18 s.h.)

Three semester hours from HP 631 , HP 632, HP 633, PH 634, HP 635,
HP 636, HP 680, or HP 681. Fifteen semester hours from any of the
approved graduate level courses with the advise and consent of an
adviser.

For description of GR courses, see entry under "GENERAL SERVICE
COURSES," page 41 .

126 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

COURSE DESCRIPTIONS

HP 600 HISTORY OF PHILOSOPHY OF SPORT 3 s.h.

A functional approach to an understanding of sport and human movement during the
course of civilization with emphasis on formation of a constructive philosophical
approach to present day problems,

HP 601 SPORT AND SOCIETY 3 s.h.

Designed to acquaint the student with the reciprocal relationships between sport and
physical activity as it affects man's development in the societies and cultures out of
which sport emerges.

HP 602 SPORT PSYCHOLOGY 3 s.h.

Study of the psychological effects and implications of man's participation in sport and
physical activity. Emphasis is on personality and motivational dynamics as they relate to
sport involvement in human behavior.

HP 603 PHYSIOLOGICAL BASIS OF SPORT 3 s.h.

An examination of the physiological and psychological factors that influence

performance in sport with an emphasis on the analysis of various training techniques.

HP 631 MOTOR LEARNING 3 s.h.

Psychological principles of learning are applied to the learning of motor skills.
Focuses on integration of the learning process, the individuality of the learner, and task
and instructional procedures.

HP 632 ASSESSMENT OF HUMAN PHYSIOLOGICAL FUNCTIONS 3 s.h.

Study of various physical fitness components, their contribution to a person's well
being and how to measure and evaluate physical fitness.

HP 633 KINESIOLOGICAL PRINCIPLES 3 s.h.

Scientific study of human motion with particular attention given to analysis of sports
techniques and discussion of kinesiological concepts.

HP 634 CURRENT LITERATURE IN SPORT 3 s.h.

Review of current literature in physical education and sport. Requires the submission
of an article for publication

HP 635 SPORT MANAGEMENT 3 s.h.

Theory and practice of human management with applications to sport; formal
structure of organizations, goal-setting, organizational personality, group processes and
leadership styles.

HP 636 THE CURRICULUM IN PHYSICAL EDUCATION

AND SPORT 3 s.h

Study of historical and contemporary factors that influences curriculum development
In physical education and sport in various social institutions. Emphasis on theoretical
bases for curriculum development.

HP 641 ADMINISTRTION OF AQUATICS PROGRAMS 3 s.h.

Examines the organizational procedures, administrative techniques and practices
employed in aquatics with special emphasis on adapted, competitive, instructional,
recreational, social and water safety programs

HP 642 DESIGN AND OPERATION OF AQUATICS FACILITIES 3sh

Elements and principles of planning, design and operation of swimming pools, water-
front facilities and related equipment necessary for the aquatic administrator.

Programs and Courses — 127
Health and Physical Education
History

HP 680 SEMINAR 3 s.h.

Specific subjects will be considered through readings, reports, discussions and
guest presenters. A paper will be required. A specific title will be listed in the schedule of
classes. May be repeated.

HP 681 SPECIAL TOPICS 1-3 s.h.

Topics may be considered that are not available through other course offerings.
Prerequisite: Permission of Instructor.

HP 690 INTERNSHIP 3-6 s.h.

Prerequisite: Graduate Faculty approval. Prospectus must be presented by the
student. Objective is to provide an in-depth experience in an area of interest to the stu-
dent under guidance of a faculty member and a cooperating supervisor.

HP 699 INDEPENDENT STUDY 1 -3 s.h.

Prerequisite: Approval of faculty member, department chairperson, school dean,
associate provost. Students may study intensively a subject of their interest under the
guidance of a faculty member with the appropriate expertise. Prospectus must be
presented by the student.

HP 850 THESIS 3-6 s.h.

HISTORY

The Master of Arts Degree in History is designed to give students both
breadth and depth in that academic discipline. As a terminal degree it pre-
pares teachers for the secondary schools and community colleges. Also
business and industry are seeking students with social science or humanities
majors because of their superior organizational and communication skills.

MASTER OF ARTS IN HISTORY

A minimum of 30 semester hours is required, or 36 semester hours for
those electing not to write a thesis. Within these general requirements is a six
to nine semester hour research requirement consisting of HI 61 4 (or a substi-
tution approved by the department) and a combination of seminars and/or
thesis hours. The remaining hours are selected from the subject matter
courses. Six semester hours may with approval be from related disciplines.
Failure to consult with the department prior to registering for courses may
delay the completion of a master s degree.

128 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

COURSE DESCRIPTIONS

HI 501 HISTORY OF GREECE 3 s.h.

Will analyze major political, social, economic and cultural developments in ancient
Greek civilization from Bronze Age to death of Alexander,

HI 502 HISTORY OF ROME 3 s.h.

Will trace Roman history from early Republic down to fall of Empire. A study of a
civilization from its inception to its collapse.

HI 503 MEDIEVAL EUROPE I, 400-900 3 s.h.

History of early Medieval Europe, from decline of Rome to beginnings of High Middle

Ages; emphasis on political, social, economic, religious, and intellectual developments.

HI 504 MEDIEVAL EUROPE II, 900-1350 3 s.h.

History of late Medieval Europe, from High Middle Ages to Renaissance period;
emphasis on political, social, economic, religous, and intellectual developments.

HI 505 RENAISSANCE AND REFORMATION 3 s.h

History of Europe from ca 1250; rise of commercial city. Kings, and pressures on
Christian Church to 1600 Some consideration of technology and voyages

HI 506 EARLY MODERN EUROPE 3 s.h.

Greatness of France under Louis XIV; Sweden; Thirty Years' War Emergence of
modern society; French Revolution.

HI 507 HISTORY OF EUROPE, 1815-1914 3 s.h.

Study of Europe in nineteenth century, with emphasis on the emergence of major
thought patterns. Romanticism. Nationalism, Socialism, and Positivism.

HI 508 20TH CENTURY EUROPE 3 s.h.

Political, economic, and diplomatic trends of Europe since 1900, with major
emphasis on causes and results of war, and search for security.

HI 520 HISTORY OF ENGLAND TO 1688 3 s.h.

Survey of growth of English nation, with emphasis on political, social, and economic
developments leading to 17th century conflict between Crown and Parliament.

HI 521 HISTORY OF ENGLAND, 1688-PRESENT 3 s.h.

Survey of growth of England as a democratic constitutional monarchy. Attention
directed to colonial America and English — U.S. relations, as well as to imperial expan-
sion and England's role in 20th century world. Cultural history is included.

HI 522 FRENCH REVOLUTION AND NAPOLEON 3 s.h.

Development of the Grand Monarchy; brief sketch of Old Regime, concentration on
the Revolution and Empire, with emphasis on politics, dipolmacy, and economics.
Readings and brief papers.

HI 523 MODERN FRANCE 3 s.h.

Investigation of political, cultural, economic, and social developments since 1815.
Discussions and readings

HI 524 HISTORY OF GERMANY TO 1848 3 s.h.

Study of evolution of German nation from its prehistoric origins, emphasizing
medieval and early modern phases to 1848.

Programs and Courses — 129
History

HI 525 HISTORY OF GERMANY. 1849-1970 3 s.h

Study of development of modern Germany from the Revolution to 1848. including
imperial, republican and totalitarian phases, to post-War formation of East and West
Germany.

HI 526 HISTORY OF RUSSIA 3 s.h

General survey of Russian history, culture, and institutions. Special consideration
given to study of historical forces formative of Revolution of 1917.

HI 527 HISTORY OF SOVIET RUSSIA 3 s.h.

General survey of contemporary Soviet history, culture, and institutions. Special con-
sideration given to study of communist theory and its place in current Russian historiog-
raphy.

HI 531 MODERN MIDDLE EAST 3 s.h.

Survey of changes that have taken place in Middle East and in Islam since eighteenth
century and of contemporary problems in that region.

HI 535 HISTORY OF FAR EAST 3 s.h.

History of China and Japan from ancient times Buddhism, medieval Japan. Chinese
Communism, industrialization. Some consideration of peripheral Asia from 1500.

HI 540 COLONIAL AMERICA 3 s h

Survey of original thirteen states from their inception as colonies within the British
empire to 1 763. the eve of independence Attention given to their political development;
economic position within the empire: relations with Indians: and evolution of their social,
educational and religous life.

HI 541 THE AMERICAN REVOLUTION 3 s.h

Study of history of United States from beginnings of revolutionary crisis m 1763
through adoption of the constitution and the administration of John Adams. Special
emphasis is given the causes and civil war aspects of the revolution, and the constitu-
tional-political development of the new nation.

HI 542 EARLY UNITED STATES REPUBLIC 3 s.h.

Survey of United States history from 1 783 to 1850. with special attention on consti-
tutional, political, economic and social trends.

HI 543 CIVIL WAR AND RECONSTRUCTION 3 s.h.

Study of failure of American democracy to cope with issues of mid-nineteenth
century, followed by political, economic, military, and social developments during War
and reconciliation of North and South.

HI 544 HISTORY OF U.S. 1876-1900 3 s.h

Stresses reaction of various segments of heterogeneous population of rapid indus-
trialization, urbanization, and corporation of Amencan life and emergence of US as a
world power: special attention to formation of new institutions.

HI 545 HISTORY OF U.S., 1900-1929 3 s.h.

Emphasis on political, social, economic, and diplomatic developments m American
history between 1900 and 1929.

HI 546 RECENT UNITED STATES HISTORY 3 s.h.

Study of political, economic, and cultural changes m American life since 1929:
examines roots of social problems facing us today Some recent foreign policy trends
also studied.

730 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

HI 550 HISTORY OF LATIN AMERICA: COLONIAL PERIOD,

1450-1820 3 s.h.

Study of life of people, Indian cultures, conquest by Spaniards and Portuguese,
government during Colonial Period, and Wars of Independence.

HI 551 HISTORY OF LATIN AMERICA: NATIONAL PERIOD,

1820-PRESENT 3 s,h.

Study of hiistory of nations whicfi have emerged since independence: emphasis on
economic, political, cultural, and social developments of these nations, as well as rela-
tions of these nations to others in the Hemisphere.

HI 560 HISTORY OF PENNSYLVANIA 3 s.h.

Emphasizes the cultural, economic, political, and social development of our state in
its various periods from colonial to today. Special attention given to diversity of Pennsyl-
vania's people, their institutions, and problems,

HI 561 DIPLOMATIC US HISTORY, 1 771 -1 900 3 s.h.

Traces foreign relations of United States from independence to emergence as a
world power. Topics concentrate on themes of commercial relations, political isolation,
expansion, and debate over imperialism.

HI 562 DIPLOMATIC US. HISTORY 1900-PRESENT 3 s.h.

Treats primarily our 20th century involvement in world affairs and domestic debate
over that involvement. Special emphasis will be placed on role of interest groups and
increasing power of Executive Department over Foreign Affairs.

HI 563 THOUGHT AND CULTURE IN EARLY AMERICA 3 s.h.

Selected topics in early American intellectual and cultural growth, with emphasis on
Puritanism, Enlightenment. Cultural Nationalism, and Romantic Movement.

HI 564 THOUGHT AND CULTURE IN MODERN AMERICA 3 s.h.

Selected treatment of historical development of modern American movements in
social and political thought, religion, philosophy, fine arts, and literature.

HI 565 HISTORY OF THE EARLY AMERICAN WORKING CLASS 3 s.h.

Description and analysis of nature and significance of the U.S. working class in the
1 8th and 1 9th centuries Work settings and communities of workers will be examined as
well as unions such as the National Labor Union and Knights of Labor.

HI 566 HISTORY OF THE MODERN AMERICAN WORKING CLASS 3 s.h.

Description and analysis of nature and significance of the U.S. working class in the
20th century. Work settings and strikes will be examined and analyzed as well as unions
such as the United Mine Workers and United Auto Workers, and leaders including
Samuel Gompers, John L. Lewis, and George Meany.

HI 567 ECONOMIC HISTORY OF U.S. 3 s.h.

Historical development of economic institutions in American life since Indepen-
dence: emphasis on farming, labor, transportation, banking and manufacturing.

HI 568 U.S. URBAN HISTORY 3 s.h.

A survey of American cities from their beginnings to present emphasizing relation-
ship of urban history of social science theory, and stages and process of city develop-
ment.

HI 569 WOMEN IN AMERICA 3 s.h.

Surveys of religious, legal, political, social and popular culture perspectives of
womanhood in America from colonial times to the present.

Programs and Courses— 131
History

HI 570 HISTORY OF ISLAMIC CIVILIZATION 3 s,h^

An approach to learning about a non-Western culture; Mohammad. Arabs, Muslims
as creators to a great civilization from rise ot Islam to 1 800: emphasis on cultural institu-
tions and their interrelationships within Middle East

HI 581 SPECIAL TOPICS IN HISTORY 3 s,h

Studies of unique interest, such as the American Jew. Great Wars, History ot Base-
ball. Christian perspective, and the Detective Novel in history,

HI 590 HISTORY OF WOMEN 3 s h.

Explores religious, legal, political, and mythical dimensions of women in society from
ancient to modern times, including non-Western, and European experiences.

HI 591 FILM AS CULTURAL, INTELLECTUAL. AND SOCIAL HISTORY 3 s,h.

This course deals with the cinema as social, cultural and intellectual history from its
origins to the present day.

SS 599 CONTEMPORARY EUROPE 3 s h

A study/tour program in Europe, commonly of three weeks duration each summer.
Itinerary differs, but normally includes London. Pans, Florence. Rome. Austria and
Switzerland, Program atmosphere is informal and always fun and tiring (lots of walking).
Informal lectures on site, guided tours. Academic work includes reading before depar-
ture and keeping a daily log,

HI 600 READINGS IN HISTORY 3-6 s.h

Direct readings of historical materials, focused on a general topic.

HI 601 HISTORY SEMINAR 3-6 s.h

Area research, culminating in a formal paper.

HI 614 RESEARCH METHODS 3 s h.

Investigation ot library systems, reference works, bibliographies, how to compile a
bibliography, organizing research, use of statistics, style systems in printing,

HI 681 SPECIAL TOPICS FOR GRADUATE STUDIES 3 s.h.

Studies of unique interest, such as the American Jew, Great Wars. Christian
perspective, and detective novels in history.

HI 692 HISTORY INTERNSHIP 1-6 s.h.

With departmental approval, students are attached to local or national government or
private agencies doing directive, bibliographical, archival, or museum work. Advising
professor meets with intern regularly and determines what papers or reports will be
required.

HI 699 INDEPENDENT STUDY 3 s.h.

Student selects topic for individual study with an instructor.

HI 850 THESIS 3-6 s h

132 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

HOME ECONOMICS EDUCATION

The Graduate Program in Home Economics Education leads to a Master of
Education Degree. The primary purpose of the program is to further develop
professional competencies essential for more responsible leadership roles.

For admission, a student must have completed a baccalaureate degree in
home economics with major in home economics education or with a minimum
of 35 s.h. of home economics, 1 9 s.h. in education, including home economics
education and student teaching, and a minimum of three s.h. in educational
psychology. The degree must be from an approved institution.

Food and Nutrition majors who have a BSdegreefrom an approved institu-
tion may be admitted to this program. Graduates with a Food Management and
Nutrition background will not be qualified to teach in the public schools nor will
this degree help them to meet state certification requirements for teaching
Home Economics. However, students can become better qualified for
leadership positions in their area of specialization.

Upon admission, students will be assigned an adviser. The student and
adviser will outline a tentative program of studies. Any deviation from degree
requirements shall have the written approval of the adviser and coordinator of
the program.

Prior to the time the student is admitted to degree candidacy, he/she must,
in consultation with his/her adviser and coordinator, select the thesis or no-
thesis option.

Thesis Option: Candidates will complete 30 s.h. of approved course work
plus a two or four s.h. thesis. The selection of and the proposal for research
shall be approved by the adviser and other members of his/her Graduate
Committee. The research shall be carried on by the candidate under the
direction of the research adviser and/or committee members.

Non-Thesis Option: In lieu of thesis, candidate must complete 33 s.h. of
approved course work and two extensive research papers. One research
paper will be required in HE 676 and the other research paper will be in another
home economics course selected by the candidate and approved by the
adviser and the Coordinator.

MASTER OF EDUCATION IN HOME ECONOMICS

Students should complete 30 s.h. of work (thesis option) or 33 s.h. of work
(no thesis option) from the following areas: Nine s.h. in Professional Develop-
ment including one course in Humanistic studies selected from FE 514, 61 1,
61 2, or 61 3: one course in Behavioral Studies selected from EP 604, 573, 576,
578, 580 or CE 629, 639 or EX 631 ; and GR 61 5 Elements of Research; six s.h.
in a Specialization Core including HE 674 and 676; six to nine s.h. selected
from courses HE 670, 671 , 672 through 699; HE 672 is required of any student
who has not completed a course in evaluation; and nine s.h. in a home
economics subject matter concentration. Courses for the subject matter con-
centration may be selected from two or more subject areas of home eco-
nomics or all courses may be selected from one subject area of home
economics.

Courses HE 533, 677, or 697 may be counted for Home Economics Educa-
tion or subject matter concentration depending on focus of course.

Programs and Courses — 133
Home Economics Education

Dual-level courses taken at the undergraduate level cannot be repeated on
the graduate level for graduate degree credit

A maximum of six s.h. may apply toward degree requirements but only one
to four s.h. may be applied in any one subject matter area. A maximum of four
s.h. may be applied for any tour.

COURSE DESCRIPTIONS

General Courses

General courses may be used to meet the requirements for subject matter or home
economics education depending upon the focus.

HE 533 TOUR IN HOME ECONOMICS 1 -6 s.h.

Aspects of home economics are studied in relation to the culture of areas toured.
Consult brochures, summer sessions catalogs, or chairperson for special offerings

HE 652 INTERNSHIP 1 -6 s.h.

Supervised work experience for majors,

HE 677 SEMINAR IN HOME ECONOMICS 1 -3 s.h.

Seminars in selected topics.

HE 697 WORKSHOP IN HOME ECONOMICS 1-6 s.h.

Provides opportunities for experienced educational personnel to concentrate their
study on common professional problems.

HE 699 INDEPENDENT STUDY IN HOME ECONOMICS 1-6 s.h.

Student will pursue an independent study in an area of home economics not
previously studied and for which the student and adviser identify a need.

Human Development And The Family

HE 517 INFANT DEVELOPMENT 3 s.h.

Study of characteristic developmental changes of human infants from birth to
approximately two and one-half years.

HE 526 TECHNIOUES OF PARENT EDUCATION 3 S.h.

Focuses on scope and aims of parent education movement. Methods of helping
families become more effective in their parent-child relationships are examined,

HE 527 ADMINISTRATION OF CHILD DEVELOPMENT CENTERS 3 s.h.

Development of competencies needed to administer child care programs. Focuses
on program philosophy, curriculum materials, parent and community involvement, staff
selection and training, admissions and grouping, proposal writing, budgeting and
finance, government regulations, reporting and record-keeping.

HE 620 PROBLEMS IN FAMILY LIVING 3 s.h.

Emphasis is placed on solving problems created by social change. New knowledge
from science, medicine, sociology, economics, art and psychology is utilized to improve
family living. Problems concerned with food, clothing, shelter, managment, and family
relationships are investigated.

134 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

HE 621 FIELD WORK IN FAMILY LIFE OR

IN HUMAN DEVELOPMENT 3 s.h.

Designed to study individual and family interaction. Methods of working with various
types of fannilies through an analysis of research, scientific literature, and community
programs are studied. Advanced graduate students plan and participate in laboratory-
type work with individual families (Permission of instructor for non-majors.)

Education

HE 670 HOME ECONOMICS IN AMERICAN EDUCATION 3 s.h.

Present status of home economics is reviewed in terms of the profession's history
and philosophy. Role and contribution of home economics at the elementary, secon-
dary, post-secondary levels are reviewed and evaluated, trends and issues are investi-
gated.

HE 671 HOME ECOMONICS IN HIGHER EDUCATION 3 s.h.

Contemporary programs at college level are evaluated in terms of major issues,
trends, and problems in higher education. Emphasis is placed on problems of
curriculum development, effective teaching, guidance and evaluation in professional
home economics.

HE 672 EVALUATION IN HOME ECONOMICS 3 s.h.

Evaluative methods and techniques designed to measure a comprehensive range of
home economics educational objectives are studied. Special attention to use and con-
struction of teacher-made tests and evaluative devices.

HE 673 SUPERVISION AND ADMINISTRATION IN

HOME ECONOMICS 3 s.h.

Deals with principles, methods, and techniques of supervision in home economics.
Special attention is given to basic concepts in supervision such as human relations,
communication process, decision-making and leadership strategies.

HE 674 ADVANCED METHODS OF TEACHING

HOME ECONOMICS 3 s.h.

Various models of classroom leaching are studied with emphasis on procedure,
equipment, and materials used in the improvement of instruction. Implications of current
trends and issues relevant to classroom education are discussed.

HE 675 SPECIAL PROBLEMS IN HOME ECONOMICS 3 s.h.

Specific problems with curriculum, teaching, learning experiences and evaluation
are stressed. Each student will research a special problem or area of interest.

HE 676 CURRICULUM DEVELOPMENT IN HOME ECONOMICS 3 s.h.

Special attention is focused on realistic curriculum decisions and using innovative
procedures.

HE 690 RESEARCH IN HOME ECONOMICS 3 s.h.

Methodology is introduced and studied in terms of research problems. Reports by
home economics, behavioral science, and education researchers are analyzed and
evaluated. Designed to assist the student in defining a thesis. Student should complete
HE 676 before scheduling this course.

Programs and Courses — 135
Labor Relations

LABOR RELATIONS

The Master of Arts in Labor Relations is a multidisciplinary graduate degree
progrann designed to prepare professional practitioners in \he field of labor
relations in public and private management, unions, government agencies,
and mutual and service organizations. The 42 s.h. program consists of a
required core of 27 s.h. and elective course offerings totaling 15 s.h.

In consultation with the adviser, each student will individually build the
elective sequence of the program of study by choosing 15 elective s h, from
among Labor Relations courses and courses approved by the adviser offered
by other departments.

Students wishing to integrate theory and practice in the field are strongly
encouraged to elect an internship. Certain students with exceptional back-
ground in labor relations work experience or previous course work may qualify
for exemption from some courses. As part of their professional growth, stu-
dents may also participate in the research and training activities of the Penn-
sylvania Center for the Study of Labor Relations operated by the School of
Continuing and Non-Resident Education.

COURSE REQUIREMENTS FOR THE M.A. DEGREE

I. Required Core 27 s.h. in LR 61 0, LR 611 , LR 61 2, LR 61 3, LR 61 5, LR 61 9,
LR 625, LR 641, and EC 530.

II. Elective Area: 15 s.h. chosen from other elective courses in Labor Rela-
tions, or from related departments with the approval of student's adviser.

LABOR RELATIONS

LR 526 CASE STUDIES IN LABOR-MANAGEMENT RELATIONS 3 s.h.

Study of labor management relationships in a variety of organizational setting
through utilization of the case study technique.

LR 557/ LABOR AND BUSINESS IN POLITICS

PS 557 3 s h

Analysis of labor and business involvement in politics with special attention to the
involvement of labor and business in Pennsylvania and national politics.

LR 581 SPECIAL TOPICS IN LABOR RELATIONS 3 s.h.

According to student demand, special graduate courses on selected topics.

LR 610 EMPLOYEE RIGHTS UNDER LAW 3 s.h.

A review of the legislated rights and benefits of employees in terms of their impact on
labor and management in the collective bargaining process,

LR 61 1 DEVELOPMENT AND THEORIES OF THE LABOR

MOVEMENT 3 s.h.

Institutional and theoretical overview of the development of the American labor
movement with special emphasis on major labor movement theorists, (Alternative: HI
566).

136 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

LR612 LABOR RELATIONS PRACTICE AND ADMINISTRATION 3 s h.

Practice and administration of labor relations focusing on tfie operation and internal

relationshiips of the individuals involved and upon thie application of labor relations skills.

LR613 FUNDAMENTALS OF AMERICAN LABOR RELATIONS 3 s.h.

Introduction to tfie terms, tfieories. and practice of Labor Relations in tfie United
States

LR615 DISPUTE SETTLEMENT 3 s.fi

Review of tfie theories underlying and legislation supporting labor arbitration,
emphasizing development of advocacy skills through simulations of actual disputes.
Prerequisite: LR 613

LR618 SEMINAR: CURRENT ISSUES IN LABOR RELATIONS 3 s.h.

Detailed examination of current professional issues in the field.

LR619 RESEARCH METHODS IN LABOR RELATIONS 3 s.h.

Nature of and major outlets for contemporary research in labor relations as well as
the historical development of research in the field. Elements of statistics and quantita-
tive interpretations are introduced.

LR 620 INTERNSHIP 3 s.h

Field experience in labor relations. An internship log and term paper are required.

LR 621 LABOR RELATIONS IN THE PUBLIC SECTOR 3 s.h.

Developments in federal, state, and local labor relations including: presidential
orders and federal agencies; survey of the states; Pennsylvania Acts 111 and 195;
effects of public sector fact-finding and arbitration.

LR 622 DISCRIMINATION IN EMPLOYMENT 3 s.h.

Investigation of employment discrimination in the United States with special attention
to the roles of government, industry, and labor and the impact of federal intervention
since 1960.

LR 623 STRUCTURE AND GOVERNMENT OF UNIONS 3 s.h.

The union examined as an institution, with a focus on its organizational structure;
administration; relationships with the employer, its members, and its state and national
affiliates. Particular unions will be chosen for case study. Prerequisites: LR 613.

LR 624 COMPARATIVE LABOR RELATIONS 3 s.h.

International dimensions of labor relations are explored by examining the labor-
management relations in a foreign country or region Prerequisites: LR 613.

LR 625 PROCESSES OF COLLECTIVE BARGAINING 3 s.h.

Survey of current laws, principles and procedures in use in modern collective
bargaining; and evolving trends.

LR 631 HUMAN RESOURCE MANAGEMENT IN THE PUBLIC SECTOR 3 s.h.

Human resource management systems with a special examination of public sector
organizations.

LR 632 COMPENSATION AND BENEFIT ADMINISTRATION 3 s.h.

Study of the field of compensation management and benefits administration in the
public and private sectors. Special emphasis on the input of collective bargaining in the
development and administration of compensation and benefit systems and the neces-
sary skills to function as a professional in the field.

Programs and Courses — 137
Labor Relations
Mathematics

LR 640 NEGOTIATIONS 3 s,h

A course on negotiations theory and practice which applies negotiations strategies
from a variety of fields in hands-on sinnulations of collective bargaining in labor relations.
Prerequisites LR 613

LR 641 CONTRACT ADfVllNISTRATION 3 s h

Analysis of the practices and responsibilities of labor and management in the mutual
performance of a collective bargaining agreement, with primary attention given to the
process of grievance resolution Prerequisites: LR 613.

LR 650 ALTERNATIVE WORK STYLES 3 s.h.

Review of efforts to increase worker participation in certain levels of managerial
decision making in private and public production or service enterprise, through shares in
ownership, through seats on boards, through shop level team work, etc Results will be
considered from the point of view of productivity, of worker satisfaction, of social utility.
Prerequisite: LR 613

LR 681 SPECIAL TOPIC IN LABOR RELATIONS 3 s.h.

According to student demand, special graduate courses on selected topics.

LR 699 INDEPENDENT STUDY 3 s.h.

Students will select one or more topics of critical importance in labor relations and will
meet with faculty for independent reading, analysis, and evaluation. Prerequisites:
Approval of department chairperson, dean and provost.

LR 850 THESIS 3-6 s.h.

For students writing the thesis. LR850 should be scheduled for the semester in which
the student plans to complete his/her work. The thesis may be a non-committee thesis
(1 -3 s h.), with one faculty member serving as the student's adviser: or a committee
thesis (1-6 s.h,).

MATHEMATICS

The Mathematics Departnnent offers the Master of Education degree with
nnajor in mathematics and the Master of Science degree.

The Master of Education program is specifically designed for secondary
mathematics teachers. Its purpose is to provide an opportunity for students to
increase their knowledge of mathematics and to become aware of research
and innovations in mathematics education.

The course requirements for the Master of Science program are quite
flexible and include an option of six s.h in an area related to mathematics. This
flexibility allows the program to serve many purposes, including appropriate
choices for secondary mathematics teachers, for persons preparing for
employment in areas of applied mathematics, and for students who will pursue
further graduate work in mathematics.

Each graduate student will be assigned an academic adviser to aid in
selecting the most appropriate program. Approval of the adviser is required for
all courses leading to the master's degree

738 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

MASTER OF EDUCATION IN MATHEMATICS

A minimum of 30 s.h. is required for the Master of Education degree.
Courses taken must satisfy the following requirements.

1 . One course (three s.h.) from FE 51 4, 611 , 61 2, 61 3

2. One course (three s.h.) from EP 604, EP 573, EP 576, EP 578, EP 580,
CE 629, CE 639, EX 631

3. GR 615, Elements of Research (three s.h.)

4. Six s.h. from MA 651, MA 652, MA650, MA654. With special permission
from the adviser, EM 651 and EM 652 are acceptable for this require-
ment.

5. A minimum of 15 s.h. of mathematics content courses. All three s.h.
graduate mathematics courses are considered content courses with
the single exception of MA 600, MA 521 and MA 576 are required unless
comparable courses have been completed at the undergraduate level.

For descriptions of FE courses, see section on FOUNDATIONS OF EDU-
CATION; for EP courses, see EDUCATIONAL PSYCHOLOGY; for CE course,
COUNSELOR EDUCATION; for EX course, SPECIAL EDUCATION; for EM
courses, MATHEMATICS FOR ELEMENTARY SCHOOL TEACHER.

For description of GR courses, see entry under "GENERAL SERVICE
COURSES," page 41.

MASTER OF SCIENCE IN MATHEMATICS

Every candidate for the Master of Science degree in Mathematics must
complete at least 30 s.h. of graduate work. These courses must satisfy the fol-
lowing criteria:

1 . The course MA 600, Methods of Research in Mathematics is required of
all students.

2. The two courses MA 576, Abstract Algebra I and MA 521, Advanced
Calculus I, are required unless comparable courses have been com-
pleted at the undergraduate level.

3. The student may select 27 s.h. of content courses in mathematics or
21 s.h. of content courses and six s.h. in a related area. The department
accepts the optional thesis as a content course. The student must have
the adviser's approval of the courses elected in a related area.

COURSE DESCRIPTIONS

MA 521 -522 ADVANCED CALCULUS 1, II 3, 3 s.h.

A rigorous investigation of continuity; differentiation, and integration on real p-dimen-
sional space. The Riemann-Stieltges integral, infinite series, and infinite series of func-
tions are also studied. Prerequisite: Permission of the adviser.

Programs and Courses — 139
Mathematics

MA 523-524 COMPLEX VARIABLES I, II 3. 3 s h

Introduces fundamental concepts of complex analysis and includesfollowingtopics:
complex numbers, functions, sequences, analytic functions, elementary functions,
complex integration, power series, Laurent series, singular points, calculus of residues,
infinite product and partial fraction expansion, conformal mapping, and analytic contin-
uation Prerequisite Permission of the adviser.

MA 527 TOPOLOGY 3 s.h

Basic topological concepts, including some topological invariants Relationships
between topology and other disciplines of mathematics are discussed. Prerequisites:
Differential & Integral Calculus

MA 545 PROGRAMMING MODELS IN OPERATIONS RESEARCH 3 s h.

Prerequisites two semesters of calculus

Development of deterministic mathematical models for managerial and social
sciences with relevant computational techniques Three hours lecture per week.

MA 546 PROBABILISTIC MODELS IN OPERATIONS RESEARCH 3 s.h

Prerequisites: two semesters of calculus. MA 563 or equivalent.
Development of probabilistic mathematical models for managerial and social

sciences with relevant computational techniques Three hours lecture per week.

MA 553 THEORY OF NUMBERS 3sh

Elementary properties of divisibility, congruences. Chinese remainder theories,
primitive roots and indices, quadratic reciprocity. Diphantine equations, and number
theoretic functions. Prerequisites: Differential and Integral Calculus

MA 563 MATHEMATICAL STATISTICS I 3 s h

Probability theory necessary for an understanding of mathematical statistics is
developed: applications of the theory are given, with emphasis on binomial. Poisson. and
normal distributions. Distributions of sums and a central limit theorem are developed.
Three hours lecture per week. Prerequisite: Differential & Integral Calculus,

MA 564 MATHEMATICAL STATISTICS II 3 s.h.

Multivariate distributions, properties of the moment generating function, change of
variable technique, Chi-square distribution, estimation, confidence intervals, testing
hypotheses, contingency tables, goodness of fit. Many practical applications. Use of
calculating machines were appropriate. Three hours lecture per week. Prerequisite
MA 563.

MA 565 TOPICS IN STATISTICS 3 s h

Correlation and regression from applied and theoretical points of view, bivanate
normal distribution, small sample theory Student's t and F distributions, analysis of
variance, nonparametric methods. Many practical applications Use of calculating
machines or computers where appropriate Three hours lecture per week Prerequisite
MA 564

MA 571 LINEAR ALBEGRA 3sh

Theory of vector spaces and linear transformations and applications to linear equa-
tions, determinants, and characteristic roots are studied.

MA 576-

577 ABSTRACT ALGEBRA I. II 3. 3 s h

Basic algebraic structures such as groups, rings, integral domains, and fields

Designed to develop the students ability to construct formal proofs and to work within an

abstract axiomatic system Polynomial rings, factorization and field extension leading up

to Galois Theory.

140 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

MA 581-

583 TOPIC SEMINARS IN MATHEMATICS 3 s.h.

Special topics which go beyond the scope of regularly offered courses. Offered on
basis of student interest and available staff. The student may take more than one Topic
Seminar with the written approval of the adviser. Prerequisite; Consent of the instructor.

MA 600 METHODS OF RESEARCH IN MATHEMATICS 3 s.h.

Review of literature and recent research in mathematics. Emphasis is on the use of
periodicals and other library resources. Each student will complete an independent
study of an approved topic, including a written report.

MA 625-

626 REAL VARIABLES I, II 3, 3 s.h.

Classical theory of functions of a real variable and of measure and integration theory.
Prerequisite; MA 522 or its equivalent.

MA 631 FOUNDATIONS OF MATHEMATICS I 3 s.h.

Designed to acquaint the student with logical techniques used in proof and set
theory. Topics include symbolic logic, rules and inference, validity of arguments, algebra
of sets, cardinal numbers, the well-ordering property, and the Axiom of Choice.

MA 632 FOUNDATIONS OF MATHEMATICS II 3 s.h.

Properties of axiom systems including consistency, independence, and complete-
ness for prepositional calculus and first-order predicate calculus. Prerequisites; MA 631
and at least six s.h. of graduate level mathematics.

MA 641 DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS 3 s.h.

Special solvable non-linear equations with solutions based on operator techniques,
the Laplace transform, or infinite series. Numerous applications to physical problems.
Three hours lecture per week Prerequisite; Differential & Integral Calculus.

MA 650 HISTORY OF MATHEMATICS 3 s.h.

Men and ideas that have shaped the course of events m mathematics are examined.
Major attention is given to developing activities for secondary school mathematics
classroom which incorporate the historical viewpoint.

MA 651 SEMINAR IN TEACHING JUNIOR HIGH SCHOOL

MATHEMATICS 3 s.h.

Explores problems of teaching mathematics at junior high school level. Emphasis on
a discovery, laboratory-oriented approach to teaching. Prerequisite; Permission of the
instructor.

MA 652 SEMINAR IN TEACHING SENIOR HIGH SCHOOL

MATHEMATICS 3 s.h.

National and international forces shaping today's mathematics programs, curricu-
lum development and research, art of generating interest, formation of concepts, proof,
problem solving, generalization, and evaluation. Special attention to teaching of topics
from algebra and calculus, and to modern approach of teaching geometry and
trigonometry. Prerequisite; Permission of the instructor.

MA 654 CURRICULUM & SUPERVISION IN MATHEMATICS 3 s.h.

Basic principles underlying an effective mathematics curriculum are examined from
both a theoretical and an experimental viewpoint. Role of supervisor as a source of
stimulation, leadership, and expertise in teaching of mathematics is investigated.

Programs and Courses —141
Mathematics
Mathematics for the Elementary School Teacher

MA 655 PROJECTIVE GEOMETRY 3 s.h.

An introduction to Klein s formulation of geometry of tfie invariant tfieory of a given set
under a given group of transformations and develops proiective spaces of 1 and 2
dimensions and comes and quadratic forms. Prerequisites: Undergraduate courses in
linear algebra and geometry

MA 656 AFFINE GEOMETRY 3 s h.

Examines affine and metric geometries based on an axiom system stated in terms of
linear algebra, wfiich leads to important theorems of classical geometry. Prerequisites:
Undergraduate courses in linear and abstract algebra

MA 677 TOPICS IN ABSTRACT ALGEBRA 3 s h

Topics in group tfieory, ring theory, and study of modules. Prerequisite: MA 577.

MA 690 INDEPENDENT STUDY IN MATHEMATICS 3 s.h

Under the guidance of faculty member, a student may study some area of mathe-
matics not in the regular courses.

MATHEMATICS FOR
ELEMENTARY SCHOOL TEACHERS

The program leading to a Master of Education degree in Mathematics for
Elementary School Teachers is designed to give the elementary and middle
school teacher both depth and breadth in the mathematical concepts
essential to a contemporary school mathematics program. An integral part of
the program will be to familiarize the students with recent developments in cur-
riculum, instruction, and implementation of contemporary mathematics pro-
grams in the elementary schools. Upon completion of the program the student
will be prepared to serve as a coordinator, resource person or in other leader-
ship roles in an elementary or middle school mathematics program. For
teachers in the public schools, the program meets the credit requirements for
instructional Level II certification.

Each person admitted to the program will be assigned an adviser who will
assist the student in selection of the course work best suited to the student's
background and professional aspirations.

A minimum of 30s. h. is required for the Master of Education in Mathematics
for Elementary School Teachers Degree. Courses taken must satisfy the fol-
lowing requirements:

I. Professional Development Area — nine s.h. as listed below:

A. Humanistic Studies — three s.h should be selected from the course
listings for the Foundations of Education department.

B. Behavioral Studies — three s.h. should be selected from a list of
approved courses (consult adviser). Course descriptions are under the
appropriate departmental listings for the Educational Psychology,
Counselor Education, Special Education, and Elementary Education
departments.

142 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

C. Educational Research — three s.h.
GR 615 Elements of Research.

II. Specialization Core — six s.h. required from EM 650, 651, 652.

III. Subject Matter Concentration Area — 11-15 s.h.

A minimum of 1 5 s.h. will usually be selected from the courses listed if
the student elects not to write a thesis. If the student elects to write a thesis,
1 1 semester hours will be taken in the Subject Matter Concentration Area.
Courses other than those with "EM" department label (such as MA 654)
may be taken to meet the Subject Matter Concentration Area requirements
with the adviser's consent. MA courses are listed in the MATHEMATICS
section.

IV. Thesis (optional) — two to four s.h.

A student may elect to writeathesisfortwo to fours. h. after consultation
with his/her adviser. This decision must be made at the time the student is
admitted to candidacy for the degree.

Thesis credits will be determined by the adviser in consultation with the
student. No more than three s.h. may be received for a noncommittee
thesis.

For description of GR courses, see entry under "GENERAL SERVICE
COURSES," page 41.

INTERNSHIP PROGRAM AS PART OF THE
MASTER OF EDUCATION IN MATHEMATICS
FOR ELEMENTARY SCHOOL TEACHERS
DEGREE PROGRAM

lUP in cooperation with selected school systems offer a graduate level
Internship Program as part of the Master of Education in Mathematics for
Elementary School Teachers degree. This program is intended to provide a
limited number of well qualified graduate students with teachina experiences
in a K-8 mathematics program while completing the requirements for the
Master of Education in Mathematics for Elementary School Teachers degree.

The professional work experiences of the interns will earn graduate credit
and therefore will be subject to review and evaluation by a faculty member
from the University, as well as being under the supervision of designated
public school personnel.

Information regarding the Internship Program may be obtained from:
Director of Graduate Studies in Mathematics for Elementary School Teachers,
Mathematics Department, lUP, Indiana, PA 15705.

COURSE DESCRIPTIONS

EM 517 INTRODUCTION TO PROBABILITY AND STRATEGIES 3 s.h.

Introduces students to elementary concepts of probability which will enable them to
analyze data, make predictions and determine what concepts may be used with
children. Prerequisite: MA 152 or equivalent.

Programs and Courses — 143
Mathematics for the Elementary School Teacher

EM 520 PRE-CALCULUS MATHEMATICS I 3 s.h^

Examines the function concept as applied to elennentary real number functions and
graphing techniques for these functions Topics include real number functions such as
absolute value, step, linear quadratic and other polynominal functions, trigonometric
and other periodic functions, exponer>tial logarithmic functions and all other inverse
functions. Students will examine curricular materials that develop function concepts in
grades K-8. Prerequisite: MA 152 or equivalent

EM 550 MATHEMATICS FOR EARLY CHILDHOOD 3 s h.

Study of a child-centered, activity-oriented, mathematics program for early child-
hood education. Students gather and construct manipulative materials and become
familiar with commercially produced materials. Prenumber activities, number activities,
numeration, operations on whole numbers, fractional numbers, geometry, measure-
ment, problem solving. Prerequisite: MA 151 or equivalent.

EM 556 PRINCIPLES OF GEOMETRY I 3 s.h.

Students become acquainted with an informal, intuitive approach to geometry.
Activities and materials for teaching geometncial concepts to children are an integral
part of the course. Prerequisite: MA 152 or equivalent.

EM 557 INTRODUCTION TO NUMBER THEORY 3 s.h

Introduction to topics in elementary number theory including: basic operations and
properties of integers; divisibility properties of integers; modular arithmetic and con-
gruences; diophantine equations; interesting relationships among numbers; appli-
cations of number theory in elementary school mathematics. Prerequisite: MA 152 or
equivalent.

EM 558 INTRODUCTION TO LOGIC AND LOGICAL GAMES 3 s.h.

Introduction to some basic ideas, terminology and notation of logic Topics con-
sidered: symbolic logic, with special emphasis on algebra of propositions; applications
of Boolean Algebra such as algebra of sets and switching circuits; and introduction to
quantification theory and its value in determining validity of mathematical arguments,
inference schemes and logical puzzles and a consideration of other topics in logic
suitable for a K-8 mathematics curriculum. Prerequisite: MA 152 or equivalent.

EM 559 COMPUTER RELATED TOPICS IN

THE ELEMENTARY AND MIDDLE SCHOOL 3 s.h.

This course is intended to provide teachers with the concepts and techniques

necessary to teach computer related topics in children in the elementary and middle

schools. Participants will work with elementary school children throughout the

semester. Prerequisites: MA 152 or equivalent (or consent of instructor).

EM 571 BASIC CONCEPTS OF ALGEBRA 3 s.h

Concepts of basic algebraic structures such as group, ring integral domain, field and
vector space are studied within the context of the mathematical maturity of the student.
Other topics include relations and functions, polynomials and polynomial equations,
systems equations and inequalities. Consideration given to development of these con-
cepts in the mathematics curriculum Prerequisite: MA 152 or equivalent.

EM 601 BASIC CONCEPTS IN MATHEMATICS I 3 s.h.

For students who have not taken MA 1 51 or an equivalent course as undergraduates.
Will give a good understanding or development and structure of systems of numeration
up to and including the set of real numbers.

EM 602 BASIC CONCEPTS IN MATHEMATICS II 3 s.h.

For students who as undergraduates have not taken MA 1 52 or an equivalent course.
Will give a basic understanding of algebraic properties of different mathematical
systems and help the student to understand how properties of systems are interrelated.
Prerequisite: EM 601 or equivalent.

144 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

EM 603 TEACHING THE METRIC SYSTEM 3 s.h.

A course designedforelementary and /or middle school teachers that will thoroughly
acquaint them with the SI Metric System as the general public will use it and provide
opportunity to investigate and create activities suitable for their students. Secondary
teachers unfamiliar with the SI System or with methods of teaching the system will find
this course very beneficial also.

EM 650 CURRICULUM AND INSTRUCTION IN

ELEMENTARY SCHOOL MATHEMATICS 3 s.h.

Gives the experienced elementary teacher access to latest literature, equipment,
materials and procedures. Topics include: experimental programs that have made an
impact on teaching and learning; criteria for selection of suitable new texts for a school
district; ways of implementing a contemporary progra; investigation, discussion, demon-
stration and evaluation of manipulative aids.

EM 651 THE LABORATORY APPROACH TO

TEACHING MATHEMATICS 3 s h.

Development of lab approach to the teaching of mathematics. Includes both an
intensive study of techniques, organization, and supervision of laboratory activities and
the practical design construction and implementation of materials.

EM 652 DIAGNOSIS AND REMEDIAL TEACHING OF MATHEMATICS 3 s.h.

Examines why some children have difficulty in learning mathematical concepts and
presents tools and techniques for diagnosing and remediating common difficulties in
elementary and middle school mathematics. Course valuable for those teaching in
elementary, middle school or remedial programs.

EM 681 SPECIAL TOPICS 3 s.h.

Special topics which go beyOnd the scope of regular offered courses. Offered on
basis of student interest and available staff. The student may take more than one Special
Topics offering with the written approval of the adviser. Prerequisite: Consent of the
instructor.

EM 699 ELEMENTARY MATH — INDEPENDENT STUDY 1-6 s.h.

Under the guidance of a faculty member, a student may study some area of mathe-
matics or mathematics education not covered in the regular courses.

MUSIC AND MUSIC EDUCATION

The graduate progrann in music provides the student with opportunities to
innprove his/her skills as teacher, performer or scholar beyond the bachelor's
degree. Upon acceptance by The Graduate School, each student consults the
Director of Graduate Studies in Music who will help to plan the sequence of
courses, and who will be responsible for the formation of the thesis or recital
committee.

Programs and Courses — 145
Music and Music Education

Admission: Undergraduate degree with major in music or its demonstrated
equivalent is required. Placement examinations will be required in theory,
music history, piano proficiency and principal performing medium. The
adviser will use the results of these examinations to determine areas of
deficiency and to prescribe specific electives. Upon completion of course
work, each student will schedule a comprehensive oral examination with a
faculty committee.

MASTER OF ARTS IN MUSIC

Core Courses: MU 600, MU 516 (MU 618 for Music Education) and

MU 632 nine s.h.

Major Concentration:
I. Music History and Literature — Courses (four) are selected from the
following:
MU 503, MU 504, MU 505, MU 507, MU 508, MU 510, MU 618 12 s.h.

II. Music Theory and Composition — Courses (four) are selected from the
following:
MU 511, MU 512, MU 513, MU 514, MU 515, MU 618 11-12 s.h.

III. Music Performance — Applied music courses in the major performance
area

AM 601-771 12 s.h.

IV. Music Education — MU 61 9 and MU 620 are required; with recital or thesis,
two or three additional courses are selected; without recital or thesis, up to
four additional courses are selected from the following:

MU 501, MU 502, MU 628, MU 629, MU 631, MU 633, MU 634,

MU 635, MU 636, MU 537, MU 540-550 10-14 s.h.

Elective Courses:

If major concentration is I, II, or III, courses totaling six s.h. are selected
according to students' needs and interests.

If major concentration is IV, select a music theory or history course (3 s.h.)
and applied music study in students' major or minor performance area
(4 s.h.)

Thesis or Recital:

GR 850 Thesis — If major concentration is I or II 3-4 s.h.

(Optional if major concentration is IV) 2-4 s.h.

GR 851 Recital — If major concentration is III 4 s.h.

(Optional if major concentration is IV) 2-4 s.h.

For description of GR courses, see entry under "GENERAL SERVICE
COURSES," page 41 .

746 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

MASTER OF EDUCATION IN MUSIC EDUCATION

I. Professional Development Area (nine s.h.)

A. Humanistic Studies (three s.h.) — One of the following: FE 611 , FE 61 2,
FE613, or FE 514

B. Behavioral Studies (three s.h.) — One of the following: EP 604, EP 573,
EP 576, EP 578, EP 580, CE 629, CE 639, or EX 631.

0. Research (three s.h.)

GR 615 Elements of Research

II. Specialization Core (six s.h.) — Two of the following:

FE 515 Decision Making Curriculum Development 3 s.h.

CM 600 Seminar in Learning Resources 3 s.h.

Departmental Methods Course(s) 3-6 s.h.

Departmental Curriculum Course(s) 3-6 s.h.

III. Subject Area and/or Electives and/or Thesis (15 s.h.)

A. Required Courses — Music Education Core (nine s.h.)

MU 618 Comprehensive Musicianship 3 s.h.

MU619 Methods of Comprehensive Musicianship 3 s.h.

MU 620 Foundations of Music Education 3 s.h.

B. Elective Courses (six s.h. selected from the following list)

MU 501 Advanced Choral Conducting 2 s.h.

MU 502 Advanced Instrumental Conducting 2 s.h.
MU'628 Contemporary International Approaches to

Elementary Music Education 2 s.h.

MU 629 Advanced String Pedagogy 2 s.h.

MU 631 Administrative Problems in Music Education 2 s.h.

MU 633 Comparative Choral Methods 2 s.h.

MU 634 Practicum in Instrumental Music 2 s.h.

MU 635 Psychology of Music Education 2 s.h.

MU 636 Advanced Technology of Music Teaching 2 s.h.

MU 537 Techniques of the Marching Band 2 s.h.

MU 540-550 Summer Music Workshop (content varies) 1-3 s.h.

AM 601-771 Applied Music 1-4 s.h.

Other approved elective

C. Thesis or Recital (optional) 2-4 s.h.

For description of FE courses, see section on FOUNDATIONS OF EDUCA-
TION: for EP courses, EDUCATIONAL PSYCHOLOGY: for CE courses,
COUNSELOR EDUCATION: for EX course, SPECIAL EDUCATION: for CM
course, COMMUNICATIONS MEDIA.

For description of GR courses, see entry under "GENERAL SERVICE
COURSES," page 41.

Programs and Courses — 147
Music and Music Education

COURSE DESCRIPTIONS

MU 501 ADVANCED CHORAL CONDUCTING 2 s.h.

Material will Include large choral works with and without accompaniment. Student will
be expected to develop skills m reading score

MU 502 ADVANCED INSTRUMENTAL CONDUCTING 2 s.h.

An Intensive study of large instrumental works. Skill development of each individual
will be stressed

MU 503 MUSIC OF THE BAROQUE ERA 3 s.h.

A survey of music from about 1600 to 1750.

MU 504 MUSIC OF THE CLASSICAL ERA 3 s.h.

A survey of music from about 1725 to about 1827.

MU 505 MUSIC OF THE ROMANTIC ERA 3 s.h.

A survey of music from about 1800 to 1910.

MU 506 VOICE PEDAGOGY 3 s.h.

Techniques in teaching voice.

MU 507 MUSIC OF THE 20TH CENTURY 3 s.h.

A survey of the principal stylistic trends in music from 1900 to the present.

MU 508 MUSIC OF THE 16TH CENTURY 3 s.h.

A survey of music from about 1500 to about 1600.

MU 509 PIANO PEDAGOGY 3 s.h.

Survey of current and significant past developments in teaching of piano, both
privately and In small and large classes. The various piano methods are analyzed,
compared, criticized, and adapted to each Individual's use.

MU510 SEMINAR IN MUSIC 3 s.h.

Subject matter will change each semester. Students will make presentations and
write an extensive research paper Seminar may be repeated provided subject matter Is
not (with departmental approval) An In-depth study can be made of narrowly defined
areas, such as life and /or works of a specific composer or group of composers.

MU 511 COMPOSITION 3 s.h.

Composition of Music in various song forms through the rondos and the larger sonata

allegro form Careful analysis of similar forms of major composers. Instruction will be

highly individualized and will depend considerably on personal interest of the student.

MU512 ADVANCED ORCHESTRATION 3 s.h.

Consideration to problems of scoring for full symphony orchestra, string orchestra
and chamber orchestra. Students will produce a full score and orchestra parts so that
orchestration may be tested by actual playing by the University Symphony.

MU 513 ADVANCED BAND SCORING 3 s.h.

Problems of scoring for modern concert band. In addition, problems of scoring for
brass band, woodwind choir, and percussion ensemble will be considered

MU514 ADVANCED CHORAL ARRANGING 2sh

Four-part writing for chorus. Five. six. seven, and eight-part wnting will comprise large
part of the course. Special consideration will be given to problem of writing for men s and
women s voices

148 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

MU515 CANON, DOUBLE COUNTERPOINT, AND FUGUE 3 s.h.

Application of contrapuntal techniques, through analysis and creative writing.
Included will be study and writing of two- and three-voice canons; two- and three-part
inventions; and two-, three-, and four-voice fugues.

MU516 ANALYTICAL TECHNIQUES 3 s.h.

Study of representative compositions of various periods, with emphasis on formal
harmonic and stylistic analysis. Student will develop basic analytical techniques neces-
sary for analysis of music of any period.

MU 535 MUSIC FOR THE EXCEPTIONAL STUDENT 3 s.h.

Develops music education skills, techniques and materials for the mentally, physi-
cally or neurologically handicapped student, and the gifted student. Designed for majors
in music education, special education, or elementary education.

MU 537 TECHNIQUES OF THE MARCHING BAND 2 s.h.

Theory and practical application of fundamentals of precision drill. Also, this course
deals with building "half-time shows," materials and instrumentation of the marching
band.

MU 540-550 SUMMER MUSIC WORKSHOP 1 -3 s.h.

Concentration in special interest areas. Content varies.

MU 551 ITALIAN/ENGLISH DICTION 2 s.h.

MU 553 FRENCH DICTION 2 s.h.

MU 554 GERMAN DICTION 2 s.h.

MU 575 MUSIC ENSEMBLES 1 s.h.

Various music department ensembles are open to qualified graduate students.

MU 600 BIBLIOGRAPHY OF MUSIC 3 s.h.

Introduces graduate students to various types of music, music literature and bibli-
ographical tools which exist and which may be used in research in music. As a project,
each student will prepare an extensive annotated bibliography of a music subject within
his special interest

MU618 COMPREHENSIVE MUSICIANSHIP 3 s.h.

Combines undergraduate concepts and skills in music theory, literature, and
performance at an advanced level using an integrated approach. Prepares student to
function in a variety of musical roles.

MU619 METHODS FOR COMPREHENSIVE MUSICIANSHIP 3 s.h.

Includes learning strategies, experiences, and activities appropriate for introducing
Comprehensive Musicianship at elementary and secondary school levels.

MU 620 FOUNDATIONS OF MUSIC EDUCATION 3 s.h.

Study of historical, philosophical and social foundations of music education including

current trends in educational thought and their implications for school music program.

MU 622 COMPOSITION II 3 s.h.

MU 623 COMPOSITION III 3 s.h.

Programs and Courses — 149
Music and Music Education

MU 628 CONTEMPORARY INTERNATIONAL APPROACHES TO

ELEMENTARY EDUCATION 2 s h

An introduction to new developments m elennentary, music education practices

based on techniques originated by Carl Orff in Germany. Zoltan Kodaly in Hungary and

Shinichi Suzuki in Japan Authentic adaptations of music and materials in lecture,

demonstration and workshop situations.

MU 629 ADVANCED STRING PEDAGOGY 2 s.h.

Study of specific techniques and problems of teaching violin, viola, cello, and double
bass in both individual and class situations.

MU 631 ADMINISTRATIVE PROBLEMS IN MUSIC EDUCATION 2 s.h.

Review of conventional administrative organization of music education in public
schools. Role of music director, music specialist, consultant, and music resource
teacher will be carefully defined. Consideration of problems of scheduling in public
school Current issues concerned with music education and public education in general
will be considered including curriculum development.

MU 632 RESEARCH TECHNIQUES IN MUSIC 3 s.h.

Study of research techniques appropriate for music and music education including
selection of research problem, collection of data, types of research, survey of current
research studies in music education and use of library in connection with research
problems. Elements of statistics are introduced as needed to interpret research reports.
As part of requirements, student will prepare a written plan for research project or
thesis.

MU 633 COMPARATIVE CHORAL MEHTODS 2 s.h.

Materials and procedures of preparation of vocal groups for public performance.
Several accepted, yet contrasting, approaches will be considered, ranging from the
Christiansen technique to that of John Finley Williamson. Special attention to program
building.

MU 634 PRACTICUM IN INSTRUMENTAL MUSIC 2 s.h.

Consideration of those materials and procedures which have been proven by actual
use in the United States. These various approaches will be compared and critically
analyzed by the class Rehearsal techniques, efficient use of time and basic motivation
will be stressed.

MU 635 PSYCHOLOGY OF MUSIC EDUCATION 2 s.h.

An analysis of latest evidence produced byfield of psychology in music education as
applied in actual classroom situations.

MU 636 ADVANCED TECHNOLOGY OF MUSIC EDUCATION 2 s.h.

Examination and application of modern communications media and their role in
music education. Development of an experimental sound lab. use of electronic devices,
synthesizers and computers. Application of systems approach and programmed
learning to music education

MU 699 INDEPENDENT STUDY IN MUSIC 1-6 s.h.

750 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

APPLIED MUSIC (AM 601 -771 ) 1 -4 s.h^

The following courses will be taught in form of private lessons geared to individual
student and aiming at maximum progress of each student, depending on background of
the student and time available. The student should for any series of lessons use the first
number in programming for the first time, the second number for the second time, etc.

AM 601

651

701

751

Private Piano

AM 602

652,

702,

752

Private Organ

AM 603

653,

703,

753

Private Harpsicord

AM 605.

655,

705,

755

Private Voice

AM 606.

656,

705,

756

Private Violin

AM 607,

657,

707,

757

Private Viola

AM 608,

658,

708,

758

Private Cello

AM 609,

659,

709,

759

Private Bass Viol

AM 610,

660,

710,

760

Private Flute

AM 611,

661,

711,

761

Private Clarinet

AM 612,

662,

712,

762

Private Oboe

AM 613,

663,

713,

763

Private Bassoon

AM 614,

664,

714,

764

Private Saxophone

AM 615,

665,

715,

765

Private Trumpet

AM 616,

666.

716,

766

Private French Horn

AM 617,

667,

717.

767

Private Trombone

AM 618,

668,

718,

768

Private Baritone Horn

AM 619,

669,

719,

769

Private Tuba

AM 620,

670,

720,

770

Private Percussion

AM 621,

671,

721,

771

Private Guitar

PHILOSOPHY

Graduate courses in Pt^ilosophy are primarily designed to provide elective
study in an unfamiliar discipline for teachers in the public scfiools. No graduate
degree in Pfiilosophy is offered. Degrees toward v^/hich credit in these courses
may be used are indicated in the curriculum requirements sections of the
catalog. Research or thesis work may be done in Philosophy with approval of
the student s major program adviser.

COURSE DESCRIPTIONS

PH 580 READINGS IN RELIGIOUS THOUGHT 2 s h.

An examination of religion as a vital human phenomenon Treating both classical and
contemporary themes, origin of western theological thinking, alienation: contemporary
atheism: definitions of deity in western and eastern religions: the sacred, origins of
religion.

PH 581 SPECIAL TOPICS

1-3 s,h.

Programs and Courses — 151
Philosophy
Physics

PH 582 PROBLEMS OF ETHICS 2 s.h.

Rational justification of moral judgments Analysis of function and meaning of moral
language (Staff)

PH 583 AMERICAN PHILOSOPHIC THOUGHT 2 s h.

Study of more influential and original philosophies developed in America from
colonial period to present (Staff)

PH 584 PHILOSOPHY SEMINAR 2 s.h.

Area research in the discipline, considering various facets of a central problem.
Students doing a thesis or research project in Philosophy will register for this course.
(Staff)

PH 585 PROBLEMS IN LOGIC 2 s h

Difficulties of meaning (semantics), formal structures of reasoning (syntactics), and
nature of truth finding (empirics) Fallacy.

PH 599 INDEPENDENT STUDY 1-6 S.h.

PHYSICS

The graduate program in physics offers a choice of three degrees: a Master
of Education, a Master of Arts, and a Master of Science. The student obtaining
a master s degree for fulfillment of certification requirements usually selects
either the Master of Education Degree or the Master of Arts Degree. The
student obtaining a master's degree for additional preparation for research, an
industrial position, or further graduate work will usually select the Master of
Science Degree.

With a wide range of possible courses and research areas available, the
student is required to have the consent of his/her department adviser before
selecting a course or initiating a research project. Adviser assignments are
made as soon as the acceptance of a graduate student reaches the physics
department. The graduate student should arrange appointments with his/her
adviser by contacting the secretary in the physics office.

Almost any combination of educational goals can be met.

MASTER OF EDUCATION IN PHYSICS

I. Professional Development Area — nine s.h.

A Humanistic Studies (three s.h.) — One course must be selected from
FE 514, 611, 612, 613.

152 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

B. Behavioral Studies (three s.h.) — One course must be selected from
the following: EP 604, EP 573, EP 576, EP 578, EP 580, CE 629, CE 639,
EX 631 .

C. Research Coursework (three s.h.) — Students in this program must
enroll in GR 615.

II. Specialization Core — nine s.h.

Students in this program must enroll in the following three courses for three
s.h. each: PY 51 1 , PY 51 2, SC 576.

III. Thesis (optional) — zero to four s.h.

Each student may undertake an individual research and complete an
acceptable thesis under the direction of one of the Graduate Faculty. The
semester hour requirement is fulfilled by enrolling in PY 850 for the proper
number of semester hours as decided jointly by the student and his/her
thesis adviser.

IV. Subject Area and/or Electives — eight to 15 s.h.

With the written approval of the graduate adviser, the student may com-
plete the 30 s.h requirement* by choosing from among any of the remaining
courses in The Graduate School.

For description of FE courses, see section on FOUNDATIONS OF EDUCA-
TION; for EP courses, EDUCATIONAL PSYCHOLOGY; for CE courses,
COUNSELOR EDUCATION; for EX course, SPECIAL EDUCATION.

For description of GR courses, see entry under "GENERAL SERVICE
COURSES," page 41.

*lf the option of "no thesis" is exercised, an additional three s.h. are required
bringing the total requirement to 33 s.h.

MASTER OF ARTS IN PHYSICS

This program is the most flexible of the three graduate degree programs
offered by the Physics Department. Each student's program is designed to
meet his or her individual needs by the student and adviser working together.

The educational goals of students in many categories can be met while the
student is working to attain his/her degree. Several examples of the category
of student who may select this degree program are:

1 . The student whose undergraduate training is in Physics Education,
Physical Science Education, orScience Education with a strong profes-
sional education component. This student may need more content than
professional education. In this program the student may, with the con-
currence of his/her adviser, enroll in exactly that ratio of content
courses to professional eductaion courses which are necessary to
attain his/her goals.

Programs and Courses— 153
Physics

2. The student who holds a teaching certificate in a field other than physics
but IS a secondary school physics teacher. These students often require
formal course work in a number of areas of Physics in order to have
Physics added to their certificate. This is normally a requirement of their
school district and/or the Commonwealth. This program allows them to
meet this requirement while working toward a degree.

3. The student who wishes to enroll in a cooperative program including
those programs with internshipcomponents Students may earn eightto
12 s.h. during a semester while interning under one of the special pro-
grams instituted by the University.

SUBJECT MATTER — 15 s.h. minimum.

Required coursework in Physics is to be selected from the Graduate
Physics courses whose course number is 51 0 or greater. This selection must
have the prior approval of the student's academic adviser and a notation of
such approval is to appear in the student's folder.

ELECTIVES — 11 to 18 s.h.

The student may complete the requirements for an MA by selecting, with
the approval of his/her adviser, from among the offerings of The Graduate
School. The number of credits selected for electives depends upon the option
exercised under Research and Thesis.

RESEARCH AND THESIS OPTION

Each Master of Arts student must complete degree requirements in one of
the following two ways:

A. Undertake an individual research problem and complete an acceptable
thesis. For this option the student must schedule PY 600 for two s.h. and
PY 850 for at least two s.h. If he/she selects this option he/she will have
completed a minimum of 30 s.h. including these two courses for the
degree.

B. Decide, with the approval of his/her academic adviser, that he/she
does not wish to undertake such a research problem. If this option is
exercised, the student will not do athesis but mustcompletea minimum
of 33 s.h, of coursework.

For description of PY 850, see page 41 .

MASTER OF SCIENCE IN PHYSICS

Admission Requirements. Any student meeting the requirements of The
Graduate School and having either a BA or BS with the major in physics will
be permitted to initiate study m this curriculum. Students having other
degrees that provide sufficient preparation in mathematics and physics
may be permitted to initiate study with approval of the Chairperson of
Physics

754 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

II. Subject Matter Concentration
A minimum of six courses to be selected with the approval of the adviser
from the follwing: PY 536, PH 601 -602, PY 634, PY 641 , PY 651 , PY 652,
PY 661 -662.

III. Research Requirement

Each Master of Science student is required to undertake an individual
research problem and complete an acceptable thesis under the direction
of one of the Graduate Faculty. The semester hour requirement is normally
fulfilled by scheduling PY 600 and PY 850.

IV. Comprehensive Examination

The student is expected to pass a comprehensive examination.

V. Free Electives

The student may complete the 30 s.h requirement by choosing from
among any of the offerings of The Graduate School, with, of course, the
advice and approval of his/her graduate adviser

For description of PY 850, see page 41

COURSE DESCRIPTIONS

PY 507 INTRODUCTION TO MATHEMATICAL PHYSICS I 3 s h

Designed to provide background needed for most 500 level courses. Student will
acquire skills in problem solving in areas of mechanics and wave motion utilizing
calculus and vectors. Prerequisite: Permission of adviser

PY 508 INTRODUCTION TO MATHEMATICAL PHYSICS II 3 s h.

A continuation of PY 507 Develops skills in problem solving in areas of electricity and
magnetism utilizing vectors and calculus Prerequisite: Permission of adviser.

PY510 INTRODUCTION TO THEORETICAL PHYSICS 3 s.fi.

Application of mathematical methods to physical theory in area of mechanics,
electricity and magnetism, including partial differentials, vector calculus, and non-
cartesian coordinate systems. Intended primarily for individuals in the MEd program.
Prerequisite Permission of adviser,

PY 51 1 SECONDARY SCHOOL PHYSICS LABORATORY

PRACTICE 1-3 s.h.

Designed not only to give the student training in use of PSSC and Harvard Project
Physics Laboratory materials, but also to increase his/ her ability to make the lab a more
effective teaching tool,

PY 512 CURRICULUM DEVELOPMENTS IN SECONDARY

SCHOOL PHYSICS 3 s.h.

Includes an intensive study of developments, such as PSSC and HPP, Philosophy,

methodology and cognitive theory behind each curriculum will be considered. The lab

equipment, experiments, and visual aids for each will be studied in their proper setting,

PY 520 ADVANCED LABORATORY PRACTICE 3 s.h

Experimental Physics Experiments are made available to supplement student's
previous training. Data interpretation and experimental techniques are emphasized.
Topics can include but are not limited to various methods of measurement and analysis
of radioactivity, interferometry. spectrometry, microwave optics. NMR. mechanical
vibrating systems, and thermal properties.

Programs and Courses — 155
Physics

PY 531 MODERN PHYSICS 3 s.h.

An introduction to particle and wave properties of matter, atomic structure, quantum
mechanics and the quantum mechanical model of the atom.

PY 533 THERMAL AND STATISTICAL PHYSICS 3 s.h,

A unified approach to study of thermodynamics through use of statistical mechanics.
Temperature, entropy, chemical potential and free energy are introduced and applied to
a monatomic ideal gas and systems of fermions and bosons m quantum and classical
regions.

PY 535 ELECTRONICS 4 s.h.

DC and AC circuits, diode circuits, and transistors circuits, such as the common
emitter and emitter follower amplifiers, are extensively covered. Negative feedback,
operational amplifiers, oscillators, and digital logic are introduced These topics are dis-
cussed in lecture and investigated by the student in the lab.

PY 536 ADVANCED ELECTRONICS 3 s.h.

Field effect transistors, noise problems, grounding and shielding, applications of
digital logic, digital to analog to digital conversion techniques, transmission lines, and
RCA 1 10A applications. Two one-hour lectures and one three-hour lab Prerequisite:
PY 535

PY 541 ANALYTICAL MECHANICS I 2 s.h.

Kinematics, particle dynamics, gravitation, free and forced harmonic motion. Treat-
ment of these topics utilizes vector calculus and differential and integral calculus.

PY 542 ANALYTICAL MECHANICS II 2 s.h.

Central-force motion, high energy collisions, special relatively.

PY 545 OPTICS 3 s.h.

Mam concepts of modern optics utilized in areas of geometrical, wave and quantum
optics. Includes presentation of illustrative examples in areas of laser technology,
complex optical systems, interferometry, and spectroscopy.

PY 551 ELECTRICITY AND MAGNETISM I 2 s.h.

Coulombs Law. electrostatic potential. Gauss Law, dielectrics will be presented
using vector calculus m a modern field formalism. Prerequisite: PY 510.

PY 552 ELECTRICITY AND MAGNETISM II 2 s.h.

Biot and Savart s Law. induced emf. vector potential, displacement current, special
relativity and electromagnetic radiation will be presented using techniques introduced in
PY 551 Prerequisite: PY 551

PY 561 QUANTUM MECHANICS I 3 S.h.

Introduction to theory of linear vector spaces, linear operators, eigenvalues, eigen-
vectors and eigenfunction and their application to the harmonic oscillator, hydrogen
atom, electron in a magnetic field, scattering and perturbations. Prerequisites: PY 222
and PY 331.

PY 565 INTRODUCTION TO NUCLEAR PHYSICS 3 s.h.

Survey of introduction nuclear physics including: nuclear size, mass, types of decay,
models, forces, elementary particles, reaction theory

PY 599 SPECIAL STUDIES 1-6 s.h.

A special topic may be offered at the discretion of the department to fulfill a special
necessity.

156 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

PY 600 METHODS OF RESEARCH IN PHYSICS 2 s.h

Offers the student practical training in special nnethocis and nnatenals of research in
physics. Emphasis on types of research, use of physics and physics-related journals
and library facilities. Prerequisite; Permission of department

PY 601 THEORETICAL PHYSICS I 3 s.h.

Serves as a perparation in mathematical physics for graduate student. Included will
be vector analysis, curvilinear coordinate systems, infinite series, complex variables
and the calculus of residues, ordinary and partical differential equations. Prerequisite:
Permission of department.

PY 602 THEORETICAL PHYSICS II 3 s.h.

A continuation of PY 601 , covering Tensor analysis, matrices, group theory, Sturn-
Liouville Theory, special functions. Fourier Series, integral transforms. Green's Func-
tions, integral equations. Prerequisite: PY 601 .

PY 634 STATISTICAL MECHANICS 3 s.h.

A quantum approach to statistical mechanics. Fermi, Bose, ideal gas and imperfect

gas systems are investigated Selected topics in kinetic theory of gases, transport

phenomena, magnetic systems and liquid helium. Co-requistie: PY 561 or its equivalent.

PY 641 ADVANCED MECHANICS I 3 s.h.

Includes the following topics: LaGrange's Equations, Hamilton's Principle. Two body
central force, Euler's Theorem, Small Oscillations, Hamilton's Equations, canonical
Transformations. Prerequisite: PY 312 or its equivalent.

PY 642 ADVANCED MECHANICS II 3 s.h.

Rigid body mechanics, including Angular Momentum, Euler's equations. Preces-
sions, Special relativity. Covariant four dimensional formulation, Covariant Langragian
formulation, Hamilton-Jacoby Theory, Introduction to classical field theory. Prerequi-
site: PY 641 or equivalent.

PY 651 ADVANCED ELECTROMAGNETIC THEORY I 3 s.h.

Solution of boundary value problems using Green's functions and separation of
variables techniques. Cartesian and spherical coordinate systems, multipole expan-
sions, macroscopic electrostatics and magnetostatics, Maxwell's equations and plane
electromagnetic waves. Prerequisite: PY 323 or equivalent.

PY 652 ADVANCED ELECTROMAGNETIC THEORY II 3 s.h.

Solution of electrostatic problems using cylindrical coordinates. Green's function for
time-dependent wave equation, conservation laws, wave guides and resonant cavities,
special Theory of Relativity, simple radiating systems and diffraction. Prerequisite:
PY 651.

PY 657 SOLID STATE THEORY 3 s h.

Quantum approach to solid state. Topics include second quantization of fermion and
boson systems, electron theory of metals, electron-phonon interactions, and super-
conductivity. Selected subjects in thermal transport, magnetic phenomena. Co-requi-
site: PY 561 or its equivalent.

PY 661 QUANTUM MECHANICS I 3 s.h.

Fundamental concepts of quantum mechanics, theory of representations and linear
vector spaces, relationship between quantum and classical mechanics. Approximation
methods for stationary problems with applications to central potentials.

PY 662 QUANTUM MECHANICS II 3 s.h.

Approximation methods for time dependent problems with application to scattering
and transition theory. Elementary theory of many particle systems with applications to:
molecules and chemical bonds, fundamentals of the quantum theory of solids, Dirac
theory.

Programs and Courses — 157
Physics
Political Science

PY 690 RESEARCH PROBLEMS IN PHYSICS 1 -6 s.h.

Introduction to advanced research problems through individual assignment.
Prerequisite: Permission of department.

SCIENCE COURSES

SC 575 THE GROWTH OF SCIENCE AND ITS CONCEPTS I 3 s.h.

Traces development of science and its concepts from early beginnings to time of
Newton. Interaction of science and mathandtheir impact on growing society of Western
Civilization is treated in a non-mathematical manner. Three hours lecture per week.

SC 576 THE GROWTH OF SCIENCE AND ITS CONCEPTS II 3 s.h.

Influence and development of concepts of science in Western Civilization are
studied from Newton to present time. While the concurrent development of mathematics
is considered, stress is placed on the non-mathematical understanding of basic con-
cepts Three hours lecture per week.

POLITICAL SCIENCE

The Political Science Departnnent offers the MA in Public Affairs degree,
with concentrations in Political Studies, International Studies, and Public

Affairs.

MASTER OF ARTS IN PUBLIC AFFAIRS

The MA in Public Affairs program is designed for part-time and full-time stu-
dents who are seeking or are engaged in professional careers as adminis-
trators, project directors, staff analysts, supervisors in government and in
human service agency delivery systems, and teachers in the Social Sciences.

The MA in Public Affairs degree requires a minimum of 30-39 s.h. including
a research and/or internship requirement. In order to complete a program for
his or her particular professional needs, however, a student may be required to
complete specific courses, not for graduate credit, in statistics, accounting,
business administration, computer skills, foreign language, economics,
political science, psychology, and sociology. The student should have suf-
ficient preparation in the social science, or equivalent professional experi-
ence, in order to perform satisfactorily in the program. These requirements
may be satisfied by prior course work, correspondence courses, qualifying
examinations, or undergraduate courses offered at lUP. These preparatory

758 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

requirements will be determined by the Political Science Department upon
formal application to The Graduate School and may be completed after
admission to The Graduate School prior to admission to candidacy for degree.

Students select one of three concentrations for course work: (A) Political
Studies (24 s.h. in Political Science); (B) International Studies (24 s.h. in
Political Science, with at least 1 2 in international and comparative areas, and
Foreign Language reading competency established by exam); (C) Public
Affairs (30 s.h including PS 570 and PS 571 and two of thefollowing courses;
PS 555, 666, 673, or a course in Public Financial Management, and a Com-
puter Science course, and a Statistics course, and 1 2 credits of electives —
See Department for approved list.)

The Research Requirement (six to nine s.h.) may be met by scheduling SS
61 4 or GR 61 5 or PS 674 plus three s h. thesis credit; or six s.h. Internship (with
Research Project), PS 695, (required for students with Public Affairs Major).

For description of SS course, see SOCIAL SCIENCE

For description of GR courses, see entry under "GENERAL SERVICE
COURSES," page 41.

COURSE DESCRIPTION

PS 520 INTERNATIONAL LAW 3 s.h.

Study of the development, nature, and function of international law, including recent
trends.

PS 521 INTERNATIONAL ORGANIZATIONS 3 s.h.

Inquiry into purposes, structures, and actions of contemporary international political
organizations, such as United Nations, regional and functional organizations.

PS 544 SCIENCE TECHNOLOGY AND PUBLIC POLICY 3 s h.

Focuses on the interactions of science, technology and politics as they impinge on
the public decision-making process. Technology generated socio-political problems
are investigated on local, state, national, and international level, the adequacy of political
processes and institutions for solving problems m the technological age is questioned.

PS 550 THE PRESIDENCY 3 s.h.

Examines the Office of President with attention to constitutional foundations, evolu-
tion, structure powers, and functions. Comparisons are made between presidential and
parliamentary systems and between offices of President and Governor.

PS 551 THE LEGISLATIVE PROCESS 3 s h.

Legislative process in the US with emphasis on Congress and the Pennsylvania
General Assembly. Focus on organization and function of legislative bodies, with
American legislative institutions compared with those of other nations.

PS 552 PUBLIC OPINION 3 s h.

Nature of public opinion within political system. Attention to formation of public
opinion, expression, propaganda, mass media, interest groups, and polling

PS 553 AMERICAN POLITICAL PARTIES 3 s.h.

Role of people, parties, and pressure groups in politics of American democracy
Attention to sectional and historic roots of national politics, voting behavior, pressure
group analysis, and campaign activities

Programs and Courses — 759
Political Science

PS 554 METROPOLITAN PROBLEMS 3 S.h.

Analyzes multiplicity of problems facing our metropolitan areas such as urban
renewal, shrinking tax base, federal aid to cities, subsidized mass transit, municipal
authorities, and political consolidation.

PS 555 FEDERALISM 3 s h.

Explores the characteristics of federal system of government with emphasis on
theories, origins, institutions, and problems in intergovernmental relations in the U.S.;
federal systems in other nations; and trends.

PS 556 MASS MEDIA IN AMERICAN POLITICS 3 s.h.

Variant theories of the symbiotic relationship between American politics and the
press are examined in the light of the American colonial-national experience. The
special constitutional rights given to the media are explored, with particular attention to
radio-TV.

PS 557 LABOR AND BUSINESS IN POLITICS 3 s.h.

An in-depth study and analysis of labor and business involvement in politics is the
focus of the course. Special attention will be given to the involvement of labor and
business in Pennsylvania politics as well as to the relationship between the two
competing groups — conflict or cooperation.

PS 558 JUDICIAL PROCESS 3 s.h.

Explores nature and limits of judicial power, courts as policy-making bodies, selec-
tion of judges, decision process, external forces impinging on the courts, and role of
Supreme Court in its relationship with Congress, the Presidency, and federalism.

PS 559 CONSTITUTIONAL LAW AND CIVIL LIBERTIES 3 s.h.

Study of civil liberties and civil rights issues through leading Supreme Court deci-
sions. Topics include First Amendment rights, procedural due process and the Bill of
Rights, and equal protection problems.

PS 560 CLASSICAL POLITICAL THOUGHT 3 s.h.

Evolution of Western political tradition of Constitutionalism from Plato and Aristotle to
Locke and Montesquieu: religious and rational foundations; medieval theories of
authority and representation; early modern theories of state and sovereignty. Concepts
of law, natural rights, liberty, equality, and justice are treated in detail.

PS 561 MODERN POLITICAL THOUGHT 3 s.h.

Development of Western political thought since the mid-1 6th century; classic
liberalism conservative thought; modern irrational ideologies such as facism and
national socialism; socialist thought; contemporary collectivist liberalism.

PS 562 AMERICAN POLITICAL THOUGHT 3 s h.

Develops an understanding of American political thinkers from the Puritans through
the current Afro-American writers. Political phenomena is examined relating to past
writings and inferences are made for future political behavior.

PS 570 INTRODUCTION TO PUBLIC ADMINISTRATION 3 s.h.

Examines the environment of public administration; organizational structure, execu-
tive functions, the politics and tools of administration, personnel processes, financial
administration and the problems of democratic control of bureaucracy.

PS 571 ISSUES IN PUBLIC ADMINISTRATION 3 s.h.

Intensive study of role of agencies and their administrators in determining and devel-
oping public policy Public administration in practice is emphasized by utilizing case
studies.

160 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

PS 580 SOVIET POLITICS 3 s.h.

Essential features of Communist party and government of U.S.S.R., including

geographical and historical background and ideological and theoretical foundations.

PS 581 SPECIAL TOPICS 1 -3 s.h.

In depth study of a specific problem or topic not regularly treated in courses. May be
repeated.

PS 582-

587 POLITICAL SYSTEMS 3 s.h.

Comparative study of government and politics of a selected region.

PS 582 AFRICA

PS 583 ASIA

PS 584 MIDDLE EAST

PS 585 CENTRAL AND EASTERN EUROPE

PS 586 ATLANTIC COMMUNITY

PS 587 LATIN AMERICA

PS 588 POLITICAL-MILITARY STRATEGY 3 s.h.

Deals with national security problems including decision-making and budgeting,

levels of strategy, the utility of force, and the impact of the military on American Society.

PS 589 DEVELOPING NATIONS 3 s.h.

Deals with the political characteristics of emerging nations: the impact of economic
and social change upon political structure; evolving patterns of political development;
and techniques of nation-building.

PS 631 HUMAN RESOURCE MANAGEMENT IN PUBLIC SECTOR 3 s.h.

This course is an in-depth study of human resource management systems with
special focus on public sector organizations. Emphasized will be the development of an
understanding of traditional functional systems as well as skills necessary to success-
fully manage such systems.

PS 666 PUBLIC POLICY ANALYSIS 3 s.h.

Examines public policy using analytical tools and policy models. Considered within
this framework are values and resources, the cultural-political environment, the policy-
making process, evaluation methods and their application to major policy areas.

PS 670 FOREIGN POLICY STUDIES 3 s.h.

Considers selected problems in international affairs. Emphasis on those problems
and conflicts which have evolved in the post-war era, particularly as they relate to posi-
tion of the United States in world affairs. Specific problems are approached both in terms
of countries involved and the existing balance in world economic, ideological, and
power structure.

PS 672 COMPARATIVE POLITICAL STUDIES 3 s.h.

Theory, structure, politics, and problems of selected foreign governments are
analyzed from comparative point of view. Special emphasis on comparing and con-
trasting ideas and institutions with those of the U.S.

Programs and Courses —161
Political Science
Professional Growth
Psychology

PS 673 REGIONAL POLITICAL STUDIES 3 s.h.

Examines structure and function of state, county, and municipal governments.
Emphasizes understanding and analysis of problems faced by government at local
levels, Pennsylvania governmental forms as stressed and compared w/ith thiose of ottier
states

PS 674 SCOPE AND METHODS 3 s,ti

Exposes the student to approaches, methods, tools, focus, and boundary lines of
political science study As a research methods course in graduate political science, it
should be scheduled early in program,

PS 695 POLITICAL SCIENCE INTERNSHIP 1 -6 s.h.

Practical experience in government and politics. Students are individually assigned
to a cooperating local or state government agency, political party, or interest group, or to
a federal or international agency when arrangements can be made. Students report
periodically to professor in charge, and undertake reading assignments and write such
reports and papers as the professor may require. Prerequisite: Must have approval of
instructor and department chairperson. Course is offered when arrangements for intern-
ship can be made with cooperating agencies. Required (six s.h.) for Public Affairs con-
centration

PS 699 INDEPENDENT STUDY 1-3 s.h.

Readings and written assignments on a specific topic determined by student and
instructor in charge. May be repeated.

PS 850 THESIS 1 -3 s.h.

NOTE: No more than 50 per cent of credits counted toward graduate degree may be in
500-level courses.

PROFESSIONAL GROWTH

The Professional Growth program leading to an MA, MS, or MEd is a highly
restricted and specially structured course of studies determined by the stu-
dent and his/her advisory committee. A four s.h. committeethesis is required,
as well as the course GR 615 Elements of Research. For further information
write Professional Growth Degree. The Graduate School, lUP, Indiana, Penn-
sylvania 15705.

PSYCHOLOGY

The Psychology Department offers a Master of Arts degree with concen-
trations in three areas: General Experimental, Clinical, and Community
Psychology. The areas of concentration are so designed that graduates will be
prepared to either immediately assume responsibilities in appropriate profes-
sional settings or proceed to doctoral level study. The department also offers
courses open to students following other degree programs in The Graduate
School.

162 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

MASTER OF ARTS IN PSYCHOLOGY

In addition to meeting the requirements for admission to The Graduate
School, a student intending to work toward a Master of Arts in Psychology must
have earned a B average or higher in courses taken in psychology, taken
GRE's, and have submitted the Psychology Department admission form.

After completion of 18 hours of graduate work in psychology at lUP a
student must formally apply to the Psychology Department's Graduate Admis-
sions Committee for admission to degree candidacy. At this time, the appli-
cant must have attained at least 3.0 GPA, present satisfactory scores on the
Graduate Record Examination (both Aptitude and Advanced Tests) and
receive recommendations from faculty members familiar with his/her work. In
applying for candidacy specific courses must be included as part of the
approved credits. These courses and further information on candidacy are
included in the "Psychology Graduate Student Handbook" which is distributed
to all new graduate students and is available from the department. Moreover,
in the clinical concentration there is an evaluation of each graduate student
which forms the basis for the recommendation for candidacy. The student
should also submit for approval a complete course program planned in
consultation with his/her adviser. A recommendation to not grant candidacy
may result in probation or dismissal from the department's program.

The Psychology Department has established guidelines for the registration
and completion of the thesis, transfer to another concentration within the
Psychology MA program, academic good standing, full time student status, the
appeals process, and other academic matters. These guidelines are
explained in the "Psychology Graduate Student Handbook." The MA in
Psychology will be awarded at the successful completion of 45 s.h. work in the
Clinical or Community concentrations or 33 s.h. work in the General Experi-
mental Concentration.

Course requirements for the different concentrations include a six s.h,
thesis and the following:

Clinical Concentration — PC 601 , PC 641 and 642, PC 643 and 644, PC
646, plus specified electives and Practicum for nine to 1 2 s.h. The clinical
concentration is a license acceptable program in Pennsylvania,

Community Concentration — PC 601 , 602 and 603, PC 640, PC 654, or PC
569, and Practicum for nine to 12 s.h.

General-Experimental — PC 601 and 602.

COURSE DESCRIPTIONS

PC 510 HISTORICAL TRENDS IN PSYCHOLOGY 3 s.h.

Comprehensive overview of historical antecedents of contemporary psychology.
Prerequisite' Psychology major.

PC 554 DEVELOPMENTAL PSYCHOLOGY 3 s.h.

A comprehensive study of human growth and development from conception to
death Major research findings and developmental theories will be considered.

Programs and Courses— 163
Psychology

PC 556 THE PSYCHOLOGY OF PERSONALITY 3 s.h

An overview of integration of tfie major theories of personality.

PC 557 ABNORfVIAL PSYCHOLOGY 3 s h.

Thieories of pathological behavior with reference to clinical and experimental data.

PC 545 PRINCIPLES OF BEHAVIOR MODIFICATION 3 s.h.

Applications of learning theory principles in changing maladaptive behavior, both on
the individual and group units. Prerequisite: Permission.

PC 558 SOCIAL PSYCHOLOGY 3 s h.

A scientific approach to the study of behavior and experience of individuals in rela-
tion to other individuals, groups and culture.

PC 561 MOTIVATION 3 s.h.

A systematic study of how behavior is initiated, sustained, directed, and terminated.
Lab projects are conducted. Prerequisites: Course in Experimental Psychology,
Psychology major or permission.

PC 562 PHYSIOLOGICAL PSYCHOLOGY 3 s.h.

The relationship between behavior and the anatomy and physiology of the nervous
system. Lab projects are conducted. Prerequisites: Course in experimental psychology;
Psychology major or permission.

PC 563 HUMAN COGNITION: PERCEPTION 3 s.h.

The interaction of sensory and cognitive events in production of awareness of the
world. Lab projects are conducted. Prerequisites: Course in experimental psychology;
Psychology major or permission,

PC 564 PSYCHOPHARMACOLOGY 3 s.h.

Survey of the theoretical and empirical foundations of psychopharmacology. Topics
include discussions of basic principles of pharmacology, theories of drug action, struc-
ture and function of the nervous system with special emphasis on current findings on
neurotransmitters and the site of action of psychoactive drugs. Prerequisite: 1 2 hours of
psychology,

PC 565 CONDITIONING AND LEARNING 3 s h.

The focus IS on animal research with discussion of classical conditioning, discrimi-
nation learning, and aversive control of behavior. Lab projects are conducted Prerequi-
sites: Course in experimental psychology; Psychology major or permission.

PC 566 HUMAN COGNITION: LEARNING 3 s.h.

The methodology employed in areas of verbal learning and retention, encoding,
storage, and retrieval processes Lab projects are conducted Prerequisites: Pscychol-
ogy major or permission.

PC 567 ANIMAL BEHAVIOR 3 s.h.

Behavior of various animal species and men are examined from the position of evolu-
tion of behavior as adaptation to a changing ecology.

PC 568 LEARNING THEORIES 3 s.h

A review of current research and theoretical developments m psychology of learning

PC 569 INDUSTRIAL/ORGANIZATIONAL PSYCHOLOGY 3 s.h.

Study of psychological principles in an organizational setting of behavior; application
of psychological principles to individual behavior and experience in organizations.

164 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

PC 574 ADULT DEVELOPMENT AND AGING 3 s.h.

A review of theories and research which apply to young, middle, and later adulthood,
with particular emphasis on old age.

PC 578 PSYCHOLOGY OF DEATH AND DYING 3 s.h.

Emphasizes the theories and research which delineate the psychological factors
affecting the dying person as well as those people close to someone who is dying.
Psychological, social and cognitive factors affecting one's attitude toward death and
approaches to coping with dying and death are studied. Prerequisite: Departmental
consent.

PC 581

681 SPECIAL TOPICS 3 s.h.

Designed to examine a special topic in depth. Students prepare presentations repre-
senting selected research areas. Departmental consent.

PC 601 RESEARCH METHODS IN PSYCHOLOGY I 3 s.h.

The design, statistical analysis, and report of laboratory experiments will be studied.
Prerequisite: Undergraduate courses in statistics areexperimental psychology.

PC 602 RESEARCH METHODS IN PSYCHOLOGY II 3 s.h.

An intuitive presentation of the methods, the use of computer programs, and appli-
cations of psychological research of selected multivariate techniques. Prerequisites:
PC 601 or equivalent familiarity with analysis of variance and correlation or regression
techniques.

PC 603 EVALUATION RESEARCH 3 s.h.

Introduction to the methodological issues involved in validly assessing the effective-
ness of intervention programs relevant to psychology (e.g., human service programs),
including a consideration of how the results of evaluation research can be used to
improve such programs. Students will participate in either actual or simulated evalu-
ation research projects. Prerequisite: Permission.

PC 635 ADVANCED PSYCHOPATHOLOGY 3 s.h.

An in-depth study of the description, causes, and treatment of behaviors considered
abnormal by our society. The course integrates and extends previous materials in
abnormal behavior, assessment, therapy, research methodology, and professional
practice. Prerequisites: Previous undergraduate course in Abnormal Psychology;
Permission.

PC 636 PSYCHOLOGY OF LEARNING 3 s.h.

Examination of classical and operant conditioning, and their basis for behavior modi-
fication techniques.

PC 640 COMMUNITY PSYCHOLOGY 3 s.h.

An introduction to community psychology as an ecological approach to the under-
standing and changing of behavior, an emphasis on prevention rather than treatment of
disorders, and a concern with a wide variety of human problems.

PC 641 PSYCHOLOGICAL ASSESSMENT I 3 s.h.

Beginning course in theoretical issues and development of skills in assessing
psychological functioning and in report writing. Beginning emphasis on intellectual
assessment followed by the development of an increasing variety of assessment tools.
Prerequisites' Permission.

PC 642 PSYCHOLOGICAL ASSESSMENT II 3 s.h.

Continuation of PC 641 with increased emphasis on development of skills in areas of
objective and projective tests, behavioral observations, and self-report measures, and
other assessment techniques. Prerequisites: PC 641; Permission.

Programs and Courses — 165
Psychology

PC 643 METHODS OF INTERVENTION I 3 s.h.

Methods of studying and improving competency in interpersonal skills as a neces-
sary ingredient in most models of tfierapy, sucfi as psychioanalysis. client centered,
behiavior modification, etc Emphiasis placed on theory, research, and personal com-
petence in communication Prerequisite: Departmental consent.

PC 644 METHODS OF INTERVENTION II 3 S.h.

Emphasis is placed upon the systematic study and application of social influence
techniques to the modification of clinical problems. A broad spectrum of cognitive,
physiological and behavior change procedures are studied and evaluated with regard to
their cost and effectiveness. A general problem-solving model for decision making,
case evaluation, and accountability is advanced. Prerequisites: Methods of intervention
I: Departmental consent.

PC 646 CLINICAL GROUP TECHNIQUES 3 S.h.

Provides instruction and experience in a variety of group techniques. Includes lec-
tures, demonstrations, and participation in group exercises useful in the clinical psy-
chology profession Prerequisite: Permission.

PC 650 PLANNED SOCIAL CHANGE 3 s h.

Comparative evaluation of strategies for changing human behavior Emphasis on
techniques which alter the environmental context in which the behavior occurs.

PC 652 ENVIRONMENTAL PSYCHOLOGY 3 s.h.

The relationship between human behavior and its environmental context. Emphasis
on the role of physical and social environments in creating and perpetuating social
problems.

PC 654 THEORY AND RESEARCH IN ORGANIZATIONAL

PSYCHOLOGY 3 s.h.

The study of the effects of the work situation and of personal, interpersonal, and
structural variables upon individual behavior and experience in organizations. Prerequi-
site: Industrial psychology, or industrial sociology, introductory coursework in psy-
chology and in behavioral science statistics.

PC 670 PROFESSIONAL ISSUES 3 s.h.

An examination of professional problems in the field of clinical psychology. Includes
topics such as training philosophies, licensure, legal issues such as involuntary commit-
ment and expert witness, ethical standards, and professional organizations. Prerequi-
site: Departmental consent,

PC 675 ADVANCED PSYCHOLOGICAL PRACTICUM 1 -12 s h.

Provides graduate students with experience in applied settings. Prerequisite: Permis-
sion of Graduate Admission Committee, variable depending on setting.

PC 699 INDEPENDENT STUDY IN PSYCHOLOGY 1 -6 s.h.

Individual students develop and conduct research studies in consultation with a
faculty member. Prerequisites: Psychology major, departmental consent.

PC 850 THESIS 1-6 s.h.

A six s.h thesis is required in each concentration. The thesis proposal must be
approved by the end of the third full semester of graduate work or at the completion of 36
s.h.

766 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

READING

There is a continuing need for qualified and properly certified Reading
Specialists and Reading Supervisors in the public and parochial schools, at
both elementary and secondary school levels.

In keeping with these demands. lUP provides and directs the formal
learning experiences of the Reading Specialist and Reading Supervisor at the
graduate level. These learning experiences entail classroom and clinical
instruction and field experiences by faculty members who are sincere and
dedicated to the students and the programs. In addition, the faculty members
represent a marked balance with a variety of backgrounds and areas of
expertise — reading, elementary and secondary education, psychology and
reading research.

Students seeking a Master of Education degree with a major in reading and
who desire certification as Reading Specialists are required to complete a
minimum of 36 s.h. of course work selected from the curriculum designed for
the preparation of Reading Specialists.

A student who wishes to secure reading specialist certification and does
not desire a Master of Education degree may do so by formulating a program
upon admission to The Graduate School. The program for each student will be
formulated based on the student's needs, educational experiences and
teaching experiences. All students who desire certification are required to
either take the required courses as outlined in Program for Reading Specialist,
or demonstrate or document the competencies required in the program.

Criteria for final recommendation for certification of program enrollees are
as follows:

1. Mastery of competencies determined through the use of oral and /or
written examination administered by Reading Faculty. Overall grade
point average of B; in both ED 602 and 603, a grade of B is required.

2. Recommendation of Reading faculty.
Procedures for Admission

An applicant must first be admitted to The Graduate School as a qualified
student. Upon receipt of an acceptance letterthe Coordinator of the Graduate
Reading Program will send the applicant the necessary forms for the Reading
Program and the name of his/her adviser Applicants may be requested to
report for an interview with the Reading Faculty.

Upon admission to the Reading Program, each student should arrange to
meet with his/her adviserto formulate an approved program of courses. (Note
that GR 61 5 Elements of Research should be taken during the first 1 2 s.h. of
graduate work.)

Acceptance into The Graduate School only permits a student to take
course work in a department. If a student wishes to become a degree candi-
date, he/she must complete the Application to Candidacy form and forward
this form to The Graduate School within the first 1 2 s.h of course work in the
department.

Programs and Courses — 167
Reading

READING SPECIALIST PROGRAM

I. Professional Development (nine s.h.)

A. Humanistic Studies (three s.h.): FE 611, FE 612, FE 613. FE 514.

B. Behavioral Studies (three s.h.): EP 604*, EP 573*, EP 576*, EP 578*,
EP 580, CE 629, CE 639. EX 631.

C. Research (three s.h.): GR 615

II. Specialization Core (six s.h.): ED 600**, ED 601**

III. Subject Area*** (21 s.h.): ED 602**, ED 603**, ED 51 0**. ED 607, ED 508.

ED 620. ED 699. ED 697. ED 698**. EL 644, EL 647. EL 648. EL 655.
EN 631 . EN 633, EX 631 . EX 665, EX 666.

'Students will select one for certification.
**Required of students seeking certification.
***lf thesis option is selected, minimum is 17 s.h.

For description of FE courses, see section on FOUNDATIONS OF
EDUCATION: for EP courses, EDUCATIONAL PSYCHOLOGY: for CE
courses, COUNSELOR EDUCATION:for EXcourses, SPECIAL EDUCATION:
for EL courses, ELEMENTARY EDUCATION: for EN courses, ENGLISH

For description of GR courses, see entry under "GENERAL SERVICE
COURSES." page 41.

READING SUPERVISOR PROGRAM

Procedures for Admission

Students must possess a reading specialist certificate. Before applying for

supervisor's certification, the person must have five years experience as a
reading specialist.

Program

Students will plan their program on an individual basis with the Coordinator
of Reading. A minimum of 18 s h. beyond the MEd program is required. Stu-
dents may be required to take additional courses for competencies not
achieved at the MEd level.

A. Required Courses: EL 631; EL 653: ED 670: EP 662 or CE 629.

B. Electives: (Select Two): ED 604: ED 605: ED 620: ED 699: ED 697:
EL 632: EL 644; CE 645.

For description of EL courses, see section on ELEMENTARY EDUCATION:
for EP courses. EDUCATIONAL PSYCHOLOGY: for CE courses. COUN-
SELOR EDUCATION.

COURSE DESCRIPTIONS

ED 508 READING IN THE CONTENT AREAS 3 s h.

Provides techniques for reading specialists to work with teachers m Doth elementary
and secondary schools for developing competencies in subject matter areas as part of
the regular classroom instruction Open. also, to classroom teachers — elementary and
secondary levels

768 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

ED 510 THE TEACHING OF READING IN THE

SECONDARY SCHOOL 3 s.h.

Emphases include reading improvement practices with developmental, corrective

and remedial readers in the middle, junior and senior high schools. Attention to both

college, preparatory students and those needing survival skills as well as to work with

related professional personnel. A mini-practicum in developmental reading is included.

ED 600 BASIC FOUNDATIONS OF READING INSTRUCTION 3 s.h.

Emphasis on nature of reading process; nature of learner; advancement of pupil's
reading skills; how pupil learns to read; what teacher can do when pupils fail to learn to
read.

ED 601 DIAGNOSIS AND REMEDIATION OF

READING DISABILITIES 3 s.h.

Students will appraise reading difficulties of individuals with emphasis on general
principles and types of diagnosis appropriate to classroom and clinic. Examination and
administration of diagnostic instruments as well as methods and materials used in
remediation at the elementary and secondary level will be discussed and demonstrated.
Prerequisite; DE 600 (applies to Reading majors only.)

ED 602 READING PRACTICUM: DIAGNOSTIC CASE STUDIES

(Clinical Experience I) 3 s.h.

Students will administer and interpret a battery of diagnostic instruments, both formal
and informal, to a small group of children. Emphasis will be placed on interview and
observation techniques as well as diagnostic teaching. A needs assessment for each
child will be completed. All work will be done under the supervision of the Reading
Specialist Program faculty. Prerequisites: ED 600. ED 601. and ED 510.

ED 603 READING PRACTICUM: REMEDIAL CASE STUDIES

(Clinical Experience II) 3 s.h.

Students will complete an in-depth needs assessment as well as design and
implement a remedial program for a small group of children. Emphasis will be placed on
the application of specialized remedial techniques. All work will be done under the
supervision of Reading Specialist Program faculty. Prerequisites; ED 600, ED 601 , and
ED 510.

ED 604 REMEDIATION OF SEVERE READING DISABILITY CASES 3 s.h.

Analysis and treatment of severely disabled readers under the supervision of
specially prepared University personnel Prerequisite Permission of Coordinator.

ED 605 ORGANIZATION AND ADMINISTRATION OF

READING PROGRAMS 3 s.h.

Emphasis on patterns of organization, approaches to instruction and use of
appropriate materials which can be adopted to operation of a total school reading pro-
gram in meeting individual, group and special needs of students.

ED 607 INSTRUCTIONAL MATERIALS IN READING FOR

CHILDREN AND YOUTH 3 s.h.

Designed to guide teachers, librarians, principals, reading specialists, and other

curriculum workers in viable choices of appropriate materials for reading instruction.

ED 620 READING INSTRUCTION FOR THE

CULTURALLY DISADVANTAGED 3 s.h.

Emphasizes the sociological, psychological, linguistic, and educational variables
that affect the disadvantaged reader.

Programs and Courses — 169
Reading
Science for the Elementary School Teacher

ED 670 PRACTICUM AND SEMINAR FOR READING SUPERVISORS 3 s.h.

A supervised field experience relevant to the duties of the reading supervisor in
elementary and secondary schools, provides students the opportunity to translate
theory into practice Prerequisite: Permission of Coordinator.

ED 697 SEMINAR IN SPECIAL PROBLEMS IN READING 3 s.h.

Topics such as reading disability, preschool reading instruction and adult literary
programs will be covered.

ED 698 RESEARCH SEMINAR IN READING 3 s.h.

Designed to insure that students be able to read and understand reading research
and statistical applications related to the field of reading. Students will interpret "t" test,
AOV, repeated measures and correlations Emphasis on application and understanding
of statistical information and not solving mathematical formulas,

ED 699 INDEPENDENT STUDY IN READING EDUCATION 1-3 s.h.

The student with cooperation of the reading faculty member with whom he/she
expects to work and his/her reading faculty adviser, engages in a study individually or
with a small group on some problem or field not clearly defined in existing courses.
Prerequisite: Permission of Coordinator.

SCIENCE FOR THE
ELEMENTARY SCHOOL TEACHER

The program leading to a Master of Education Degree in Elementary
Science is designed to give elementary teachers depth and competency in the
content areas of the physical and biological sciences. The assemblage of
courses cited below should prepare the student for work as an Elementary
Science resource person within his/her school or school district. Except for
GR 615, GS 602, and GS 561 all of these courses are not open to majors in
Biology, Chemistry, or Physics.

Following admission to The Graduate School, each candidate will be
assigned an adviser who will assist the student in planning an approved
program of courses.

MASTER OF EDUCATION

IN ELEMENTARY SCIENCE

This program is not intended for certification in science at the secondary
level. It is designed to provide the elementary teacher with an opportunity to
increase his/her ability to teach science at the elementary level. Students
working for this degree with a major in Elementary Science will complete 30
s.h, of work in accordance with the following divisions if a thesis is completed.
If no thesis is selected, 33 s.h. must be completed.

170 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

I. Professional Development Area (nine s.h.)
A^ Humanistic Studies (three s.h.) — One of the following: FE 61 1 , FE 61 2,
FE 613, or FE 514

B. Behavioral Studies (three s.h.) — One of the following: EP 604, EP 573,
EP 576, EP 578, EP 580, CE 629, CE 639, EX 631 or EX 638.

C. Research (three s.h.)

GR 615 Elements of Research

II. Specialization Core — (six s.h.)

III. Subject Area and/or thesis — (15-18 s.h.)

Subject Matter Concentration Area — 1 5-1 8 s.h. of work in subject matter
content are to be selected from the following courses except that a more
advanced course may be required by the adviser if the background of the
student warrants: ES 61 0-61 1 . ES 630. ES 640, ES 650. ES 660, ES 664,
ES 666, ES 674, ES 680, ES 688, ES 692, GS 602. GS 561 , EM 651 , Ml 500.

For description of FE courses, see section on FOUNDATIONS OF EDU-
CATION, for EP courses, EDUCATIONAL PSYCHOLOGY; for CE courses,
COUNSELOR EDUCATION: for EX course, SPECIAL EDUCATION: for GS
courses, GEOSCIENCE: for Bl and Ml courses, BIOLOGY: for EM course,
MATHEMATICS FOR ELEMENTARY SCHOOL TEACHER

For description of GR courses, see entry under "GENERAL SERVICE
COURSES," page 41.

COURSE DESCRIPTIONS

ES610 EDUCATION IN THE OUT-OF-DOORS 3 s.h.

Specifically designed to teach the elementary teacher to coordinate all of the
elementary subjects into lessons taught m the out-of-doors that cannot ordinarily be
taught in the classroom (Summers only.)

ES 61 1 EDUCATION IN THE OUT-OF-DOORS 3 s h.

Specifically designed to teach the elementary teacher to coordinate all of the
elementary subjects into lessons taught in the out-of-doors that cannot ordinarily be
taught in the classroom (Summer only).

ES 630 QUANTITATIVE TOOLS FOR EL. SCIENCE 3 s.h

Proficiency m quantitative aspects of science Emphasis on practical problem
solving related to typical lab data Instruments, instrument calibration, graphing, and
graph interpretation (interpolation and extrapolation). Area under the curve idea and
meaning of slope on a graph will be explored extensively. Concentrated instruction m
use of slide rule, use of logarithms and significant figures as tools to achieve above
objectives, (Wolfe)

ES 640 CHEMISTRY IN ELEMENTARY SCIENCE EDUCATION 3 s h

Principip"^ of chemistry through lab and.or tield-centered experiences relevant to
teaching chemistry in elementary school. Recommended for all elementary education
majors (Zambotti)

ES 650 PHYSICS IN ELEMENTARY SCIENCE EDUCATION 3 s.h

Development of basic concepts in physics on a quantitatively plausible basis
appropriate for elementary science. Lab work is designed to develop an understanding
of force, work, and energy, and conservation of energy in mechanical thermal and
electrical systems Operational definitions and formulation and use of physical models,
(Riban)

Programs and Courses — 171
Science lor the Elementary School Teacher

Social Science

ES 660 BOTANY IN ELEMENTARY SCIENCE EDUCATION 3 s h

Introduction to anatomy and life processes of plant cells, tissues, and organs Con-
sideration to selected algae, bacteria, fungi, mosses, ferns and their allies and seed
plants Recognition of groups of local plants, their economic importance and health
implications are emphasized Lab studies will include practical uses of plants (Schrock)

ES 664 ZOOLOGY IN ELEMENTARY SCIENCE EDUCATION 3 s h

A lab and field study which surveyspnnciplesandtheory of zoological taxonomy and
study of representative invertebrate and vertebrate taxa Emphasis on freshwater and
terrestrial forms which may be observed or collected in Western Pennsylvania.
Homologous structures are compared and their functions are studied Principles of
embryology, genetics and animal behaivor are introduced (Mentt)

ES 666 CONSERVATION IN ELEMENTARY SCIENCE EDUCATION 3 S.h.

A new concept m conservation-corrective and preventive conservation for man's
survival Problems of pollution and population are central theme. Field work is required.
(Ferrence or Hue)

ES 674 METEOROLOGY IN ELEMENTARY SCIENCE EDUCATION 3 s h.

A descriptive analysis of fundamentals of weather, including: composition and
structure of atmosphere, radiation, heat budget, cloud and rain physics, circulation
patterns, storm structures, air pollution, and biometeorology. Familiarization with
weather instruments, maps and records, as well as activities applicable to elementary
science (Prince)

ES 680 ASTRONOMY IN ELEMENTARY SCIENCE EDUCATION 3 s h.

A descriptive and qualitative study of stellar and solar system astronomy including
telescopes and space travel at a level adaptable to the elementary school classroom
and techniques for their presentation Three hours lecture and/or lab. (Sutton)

ES 688 FIELD NATURAL HISTORY OF WESTERN PA. 3 s.h

Bus and automobile travel throughout Western Pennsylvania Places of interest in
ecology, geology, conservation, and nature study will be visited Offered in pre- or post-
session only. Travel may require the student to be away from campus for several days at
a time. A travel assessment based upon needs will be made (Ferrence)

ES 692 ELEMENTARY SCIENCE CURRICULUM 3 s.h.

Various approaches to teaching of elementary science and bases for these
approaches New curricula being used in elementary schools will be examined and
critiqued. (Moore)

SOCIAL SCIENCE

MASTER OF EDUCATION IN SOCIAL SCIENCE

The Master of Education degree in Social Science is designed to give
secondary teachers greater depth and competency in the subiect nnatter.
methodology and research techniques of the social sciences.

Each student admitted to The Graduate School will be assigned an adviser
in the Social Science Division. All courses must be approved by that adviser.

172 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

Students working for this degree have two options for completing the pro-
gram: (1 ) 30 s.h. of work in accordance with the MEd program description on
page 38; (2) 36 s.h. of work with no thesis. Courses in subject matter concen-
tration must be elected in three of five social sciences (Economics,
Geography, History, Political Science, Sociology/Anthropology). See course
listings in this catalog under each of those headings.

COURSE DESCRIPTIONS

SS 581 SPECIAL TOPICS: FOREIGN STUDY 1-6 s.h.

Directed foreign study that involves travel and observation outside the United States.
Areas visited and itineraries vary from year to year. Background reading, lectures and
briefings, diary or evaluative paper. In recent years, Argentina, India, the Soviet Union
and countries of Western Europe have been tour destinations. For details on projected
tours direct inquiries to Director, Center for International Studies.

SS610 NEW APPROACHES IN SOCIAL SCIENCE INSTRUCTION 3 s h.

Develop innovative curriculunn materials by applying concepts from the latest

research in the behavioral and social sciences. Plan strategies for use of such materials

in the classroom. Explore the methods available for analyzing the teaching process.

SS614 RESEARCH METHODOLOGIES IN THE SOCIAL SCIENCE 3 s.h.

Techniques of locating and using source materials, evaluation of evidence, organi-
zation of tested data, and exposition of tested data according to approved forms are
discussed. Methodologies of value to students in various disciplines of social sciences
are explored.

SS 680 SOCIAL SCIENCE SEMINAR 3 s.h.

Research in methodology of social science in the secondary schools. Restricted to
MEd candidates. Prerequisite: GR 615.

SS 699 INDEPENDENT STUDY 1-3 s.h.

Independent research and study under faculty direction. Interested students should
apply to director of graduate studies.

SOCIOLOGY

Sociology is the study of societyand human social relationships. Advanced
training in sociology should enable the student to think critically and reflec-
tively about the social world and to be able to use the knowledge acquired in a
variety of ways: Sociology is relevant to a number of careers. Many students
plan to affiliate themselves with professional social service, governmental, or
research organizations, while other students pursue academic sociological
careers. The MA program in Sociology is designed to serve these various
needs and interests of students.

Programs and Courses —173
Social Science
Sociology

MASTER OF ARTS IN SOCIOLOGY

In addition to graduate school admission requirements, the student should
have completed at least 1 2 hours of undergraduate sociology courses with an
average grade of B or better. In individual cases the department may allow a
promising student to enter the program with deficiences. Such deficiencies
must be made up by taking specific courses at the discretion of the depart-
ment in addition to the required total number of course hours.

All MA students are required to complete the two basic core requirements:
SO 664 Research Seminar in Sociology, and SO 667 Contemporary Socio-
logical Theory. Beyond the completion of these two courses, the MA in
Sociology allows the student two options:

Thesis Option: In addition to the two core courses, students will complete
an additional 1 8 s.h. of coursework (1 2 s.h. of which must be in sociology) and
a six s.h. thesis (SO 850)

Non-Thesis Option: In addition to the two core courses, students will
complete an additional 30 s.h. of coursework (21 s.h. of which must be in
sociology).

Students planning further academic work in sociology may find the thesis
option most helpful, while those going on to community-related work might find
the non-thesis option most beneficial. Specific programs of study are planned
by student and assigned faculty adviser when the student enters the program.
Students may later alter their program of studies in consultation with their
advisers. Such flexibility in structuring the curriculum, we believe, will best
serve students.

No more than one-third of a student's work toward the MA may be in dual-
level (500) courses. Therefore, those selecting the thesis option are limited to
nine s.h. of dual-level coursework, while those selecting the non-thesis option
Will be permitted no more than 1 2 s.h. of dual-level coursework. Furthermore,
students whoenrolledfordual-level courses while undergraduates at lUP may
not repeat the same courses for credit as graduate students.

For description of OR courses, see entry under "GENERAL SERVICE
COURSES," page 41.

COURSE DESCRIPTIONS

so 522 CULTURE AND PERSONALITY 3 s.h.

Study of personality traits unique to prescribed cultural or institutional settings. Sub-
ject matter includes socialization, emotional expression, kmesics, deviant roles, cultural
aspects of mental disturbance, and value orientation. Some attention given to research
methods employed in the discipline.

SO 534 POPULATION PROBLEMS 3 s.h.

Major forces of population change examined Problems of excessive population
growth rates outside of US, and declining growth rates in US analyzed. Threats to
ecological stability discussed.

174 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

SO 542 SOCIAL AND CULTURAL ASPECTS OF

HEALTH AND MEDICINE 3 s.h.

Review of fields of medical sociology and anthropology: Focuses on such topics as
social background of illness, folk medicine, cultural differences in perceptions of health,
and social organization of health facilities.

SO 543 DEVELOPMENT OF SOCIAL THEORY 3 s.h.

Examination of historical development of social theory with special attention to the
classical theorists and theoretical ideas which have contributed most significantly to
modern sociology

SO 557 SOCIOLOGY OF AGING 3 s.h.

Introduction to various problems faced in the process of growing older. Attitudes of
society toward elderly and social and cultural impact of an aging U.S. population
examined

SO 559 THE DEVELOPMENT OF SOCIAL SERVICES 3 s.h.

Examination of genesis and implementation of health, welfare, and employment
policy with particular reference to who benefits from such policy and who does not.

SO 581 SPECIAL TOPICS; SEMINAR IN SOCIOLOGY 3-6 s.h.

See SO 681 for course description

SO 654 SOCIAL INEOUALITY 3 s.h.

Examines central theoretical perspectives on inequality. Considers such topics as
nature of social classes and inequality in the U.S.. characteristics of working class, poor,
and super-rich, and sexual inequality.

SO 656 SOCIAL CHANGE 3 s h.

Explores nature and consequences of social change, types of changes individuals
might want in US and how these might be implemented Also discusses lessons to be
learned from various social change efforts

SO 660 SOCIOLOGY OF POWER 3 s.h.

Examines social power of groups and classes with particular emphasis on the
sources of power and the ways in which power is exerted

SO 662 THE SOCIOLOGY OF DEVIANCE 3 s.h.

Relationship between individual deviance and social and cultural factors examined.
How different groups set limits for acceptable behavior analyzed in comparative and
historical context.

SO 663 ISSUES IN RACIAL INEQUALITY 3 s.h.

Focuses on current situation of minorities m US Efforts to improve conditions for
minorities in employment, housing, education, and police protection receive special
attention.

SO 664 RESEARCH SEMINAR IN SOCIOLOGY 3 s h.

Examination of diverse research designs in the social sciences Focuses on under-
standing and critique of designs and on integration of theory and research Special
attention given to development of thesis proposal Required for MA in Sociology.

SO 667 CONTEMPORARY SOCIOLOGICAL THEORY 3 s h.

Examination of major systems of sociological theory and major theoretical contro-
versies vying for attention in contemporary sociology Emphasis given to theories in
macrosociology. especially functionalism. neo-Marxian conflict theory, and societal
evolutionism Required for MA in Sociology.

Programs and Courses — 175
Sociology
Special Education and Clinical Services

SO 674 COMPARATIVE URBAN STUDIES 3 s.h.

Reviews sociological analysis of urbanism and urbanization. Growth and problems of
cities investigated and comparative approach stressed throughout. Various research
methods and theoretical orientations considered.

SO 676 COMPARATIVE MACROSOCIOLOGY 3 s.h.

Detailed comparative analysis of major institutional features of entire range of human
societies, from band and tribal, through agrarian, to industrial societies. Course organ-
ized in an historical or evolutionary framework Seeks basic theoretical understanding of
forces responsible for organization and transformation of human societies.

SO 681 -

581 SPECIAL TOPICS SEMINAR IN SOCIOLOGY 3-6 s.h.

Seminar focuses on specialized areas in the discipline not covered by regular
courses Students will do extensive reading in the area. Course may be repeated under
different subtitles.

SO 690 READINGS IN SOCIOLOGY 3 s.h.

Students report and develop extensive bibliographies on assigned readings for depth
understanding of a specific sociological concept, process, or problem.

SO 699 INDEPENDENT STUDY IN SOCIOLOGY 1 -3 s.h.

Students wishing to specialize beyond course-work are encouraged to work on a
one-to-one basis with faculty members in independent study. Students may elect up to a
total of six s.h. of independent study.

SPECIAL EDUCATION AND CLINICAL SERVICES

This Departnnent offers a graduate program leading to the Master of Edu-
cation Degree in Education of Exceptional Children or in Speech Pathology.
The Department also offers the Master of Science degree in Exceptionality or
in Speech Pathology. A graduate level of competency in these major areas is
in accord with national standards now emphasized by professional organi-
zations such as the Council for Exceptional Children and the American
Speech and Hearing Association.

The MEd degree requires a course in Foundations of Education and
practicum experiences in appropriate settings. The Master of Science degree
is based upon an individual program which integrates academic as well as
practicum experience with selected community agencies. For details on the
supervisory certificate, applicants should contact the department chair-
person.

176 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

MASTER OF EDUCATION

IN EDUCATION OF EXCEPTIONAL CHILDREN

This graduate program offers majors Master of Education options in one of
the following areas of concentration: (1 ) Mentally Retarded, (2) Emotionally
Disturbed, (3) Learning Disabled, (4) Gifted/Talented. As a prerequisite for
completion of the MEd degree, the first three major options require Pennsyl-
vania comprehensive teaching certification in Education of Mentally and/or
Physically Handicapped. Candidates vi/ith teaching certification in otherfields
will be required to complete additional semester hours toward such certifi-
cation, depending on individual background. The fourth concentration area
requires Pennsylvania teaching certification in an elementary or secondary
field.

All four concentration areas require nine s.h. in Professional Development
selected from the approved list, including three s.h. in Foundations of Edu-
cation, three s.h. selected from the course list in Behavioral Studies, and three
s.h. in Research (GR 61 5). All four concentration areas also require six s.h. in
Specialization Core, including EX 640 for the first three areas, as well as the
specialization courses in each area: EX 623 for the Mentally Retarded, EX 665
for the Emotionally Disturbed, EX 666 for the Learning Disabled, and EX 664 for
the Gifted/Talented.

All four concentration areas require a minimum of 21 s.h. in Subject Area
course work unless the thesis option is selected. Advisement is required for
course selection, and workshops are not to be considered applicable for
degree requirements.

For description of GR courses, see entry under "GENERAL SERVICE
COURSES," page 41.

MASTER OF SCIENCE IN EXCEPTIONALITY

Professional training is provided for those who wish to gain competencies
for working with mentally and/or physically handicapped adults and their
families in the community or in various agencies and organizations. Adviser
recommendation should be obtained prior to enrollment. Course selection and
degree candidacy is based upon individual background and employment
goals. Candidates for the Master of Science degree will select a minimum of
21 s.h. in Subject Matter Concentration including six s.h. in EX 685 Practicum,
EX 522, EX 630, EX 631 , and PC 640 or EX 645. They will also complete a
minimum of three s.h. in GR 61 5 Elements of Research as well as three to six
hours of Interrelated Study selected according to student needs.

For description of PC course, see section on PSYCHOLOGY.

For description of GR courses, see entry under "GENERAL SERVICE
COURSES," page 41 .

Programs and Courses— 177
Special Education and Clinical Services

COURSE DESCRIPTIONS

EX 500 EDUCATION OF EXCEPTIONAL CHILDREN

IN REGULAR CLASSES 3 s.h.

Intended for graduate students who are teaching regular classes, and other school
personnel who do not have a background ot formal course work in the general area of
exceptionality. Included will be specific vocabulary and etiology of handicapping condi-
tions as they relate to regular class teachers in understanding the nature of problems.
Concepts of mainstreaming and resource room teaching will be included

EX 524 LEARNING DISABILITIES AND THE

LANGUAGE PROCESSES 3 s h.

Designed for students pursuing the concentration in learning disabilities. Skills are
taught to help the student evaluate learning disabled children, with a major emphasis on
language processes

EX 530 PHYSICAL DISABILITIES AND PSYCHOLOGICAL HANDICAPS 3 s.h.
Principles and practices in rehabilitation, with attention to contributions of teachers,
counselors, nurses, social workers, psychologists, speech therapists, and other profes-
sional workers.

EX 557 SEVERE AND PROFOUND RETARDED AND

MULTIDISABILITIES 3 s.h.

An analysis of curriculum and program content for the trainable mentally retarded

ranging from preschool age to adult ages. Directed toward students and teachers who

plan to teach the retarded in public schools, institutional facilities, and/or sheltered

workshops.

EX 564 PRESCHOOL EDUCATION OF THE HANDICAPPED 3 s.h.

Development of intervention strategies, assessment of prescriptive planning for, and
curricular programs for the preschool aged handicapped child from infancy to five years
of age. Prepares needed teachers for preschool programs for the handicapped.
Satisfies state and federal priorities where the emphasis is being placed for the educa-
tion of preschool handicapped.

EX 580 SELECTED PROBLEMS AND RESEARCH 1 -3 s.h.

Students will review critically recent developments in the field. Opportunity is
afforded for independent readings and limited research reports. A student may identify a
topic for subsequent development as his/her thesis or research project. Prerequisites:
EX 631 , EX 639, EX 640.

EX 599 INDEPENDENT STUDY IN SPECIAL EDUCATION 1-3 s.h.

Individual students develop research studies in consultation with a faculty member.
Departmental consent required.

EX 623 CURRICULUM AND METHODS 3 s.h.

Designed to provide an in-depth understanding of current curriculum levels for all
retarded students. Curriculum guides are evaluated and analyzed in relation to present
and future programs. Some consideration to subject matter at elementary and
secondary levels, relationship between academic subjects and vocational skills;
emphasis on clinical and diagnostic approach in curriculum design.

EX 625 VOCATIONAL AND CAREER OPPORTUNITIES

FOR THE HANDICAPPED 3 s.h.

Designed to develop competencies in the area of pre-vocational and vocational edu-
cation of the handicapped. A review of career and occupational alternatives for the
handicapped, as well as techniques and skills required for obtaining and maintaining
employment.

178 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

EX 630 ORGANIZATION AND ADMINISTRATION OF PROGRAMS

FOR EXCEPTIONAL CHILDREN 3 s.h.

Principles, practices, and problenns of administration and supervision as they relate
to developing and maintaining special education programs. Criteria are analyzed for use
in evaluation of local programs. Functions of administrators and supervisors in school
systems are compared according to rural, urban, or statewide responsibilities. Prerequi-
sites: EX 623, 640. (Required for administrators and supervisors.)

EX 631 PSYCHOLOGY EXCEPTIONAL CHILDREN AND

YOUTH 3 s.h.

Designed as a basic course in the psychosocial and psychoeducational adjustment

of exceptional individuals. Consideration given to general needs and assessment of all

exceptional persons as well as to specific needs of those with unique mental and/or

physical conditions.

EX 632 GUIDANCE AND ADJUSTMENT FOR THE EXCEPTIONAL 3 s.h.

Home, school, and community influences are analyzed in family adjustment to the
presence of an exceptional child. Family reactions are considered in behavioral dif-
ferences among children with various degrees of exceptionalities. Emphasis to
guidance skills and knowledges needed by teachers and other professional workers in
field of exceptionality.

EX 638 PSYCHOLOGY OF THE GIFTED CHILD 3 s.h.

Characteristics of the bright, fast-learning child along with implications for education.

Emphasis to measurement techniques, motivational factors, and personality dynamics.

EX 639 PSYCHOLOGY OF THE MENTALLY RETARDED 3 s.h.

Characteristics of the mentally retarded are analyzed with applications for educa-
tional, vocational and personal adjustment. The various levels of mental retardation are
considered in relation to etiology, learning and behavior, development, measurement,
social factors, and interpersonal and family relations. Consideration given to changing
outlook and recent trends in the field.

EX 640 DIAGNOSTIC TECHNIOUES IN SPECIAL EDUCATION 3 s.h.

Diagnostic procedures and appropriate test materials are selected for use in assess-
ment of pupils with mental, physical, emotional, and learning disabilities. Observations
and demonstrations, reporting and intepreting results of diagnostic procedures are
integrated with remedial or developmental recommendations in individual case studies.
Prerequisites: EX 631 , EX 639.

EX 641 INTERPRETATION OF RESULTS OF

PSYCHOLOGICAL TESTS 3 s.h.

Results of psychometric tests are analyzed and interpreted. Various standardized
psychological instruments and test batteries are considered in the light of their purpose
and usage. Both individual and group test results are examined.

EX 645 COMMUNITY AND AGENCY PLANNING FOR

THE EXCEPTIONAL 3 S.h.

Selected professional, governmental and community organizations are studied for

their contributions to comprehensive planning toward educational, personal-social, and

occupational adjustments. Social, educational, economic, and cultural aspects are

analyzed.

Programs and Courses— 179
Special Education and Clinical Services

EX 664 CURRICULUM PLANNING FOR THE GIFTED/TALENTED 3 s.h.

Utilization of existing hierarchal presentations to aid with curricular decision-making
by teachers, supervisors, and administrators for the gifted 'talented, nursery school
through twelfth grade Emphasis on four major areas; social studies, mathematics and
science, language arts, and creative arts Considerations for integrating other disci-
plines and for going beyond the scope of the course will be presented Prerequisite;
EX 638 Psychology of the Gifted

EX 665 EDUCATION OF CHILDREN WITH SOCIAL AND

EMOTIONAL MALADJUSTMENTS 3 S.h.

Examines reactions of children in the schools who deviate in their emotional or social

behavior Consideration is given to children who habitually exhibit overcontrolled.

undercontrolled, or immature reactions Identification, characteristics, educational

provisions, and preventive measures are emphasized.

EX 666 EDUCATION OF CHILDREN WITH

LEARNING DISABILITIES 3 s h.

Emphasizes curriculum and remedial instruction for children with special learning
disabilities who exhibit a disorder m one or more of the basic psychological processes
involved in understanding or in using spoken or written language. These may be
manifested in disorders of listening, thinking, talking, reading, writing, spelling, or in
arithmetic.

EX 685 PRACTICUM AND INTERNSHIP 3-9 s.h.

Advanced students are offered guided practicum experiences in selected schools,
residential institutions, clinics, or agencies Internship or supervised student teaching is
planned individually. Students analyze, evaluate, and report on their experiences.

180 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

SPEECH-LANGUAGE PATHOLOGY

The Speech-Language Pathology program culminates in either a Master of
Science or a Master of Education degree. A minimum of 36 s.h. is required for
either degree. The program provides for the completion of the academic and
practicum requirements for the Certificate of Clinical Competence from the
American Speech-Language-Hearing Association. Those students who have
not completed an undergraduate major comparable to that offered by lUP in
the discipline may be provisionally admitted and, upon completion of the
deficiencies, may apply for full graduate status. Workshops are not to be
considered applicable for degree requirements. The thesis option is available
with either degree and requires approval of the adviser.

MASTER OF EDUCATION IN
SPEECH-LANGUAGE PATHOLOGY

Candidates for the Master of Education degree will choose nine s.h. in
Professional Development, a Specialization Core of six s.h. (SH 624 and SH
645), and a minimum of 21 hours of Subject Matter Concentration including SH
61 0, SH 650, SH 661 , SH 662, SH 663, and SH 681 . The coursework in the
Professional Development sequence must receive approval of the adviser.

MASTER OF SCIENCE IN

SPEECH-LANGUAGE PATHOLOGY

Candidates for the Master of Science degree will select a minimum of 24
s.h. in the Subject Matter Concentration including SH 61 0, SH 630, SH 640, SH
650, SH 661 , SH 662, SH 663, and SH 681 . They will also complete three to six
s.h. of research and register for one elective (3 s.h.) approved by the adviser.

Programs and Courses— 181
Special Education and Clinical Services

COURSE DESCRIPTIONS

SH512 CLEFT PALATE 3 s.h.

Problems associated with phenomenon of cleft lip and palate with special emphasis
in areas of speech, hearing, and language. Included In course will be human embry-
ology; physical remediation; the effects of clefts on structure and function of speech and
hearing mechanism; role of speech correctionist on the cleft palate team.

SH 604 DIAGNOSTIC METHODS 3 s.h.

Evaluation of tests and techniques of diagnosis of speech and language disorders;
interpretation of results and planning appropriate subsequent case management. Inter-
viewing techniques appropriate to case history taking. Writing of diagnostic and case-
history reports,

SH610 ARTICULATION 3 s.h.

Linguistic approach to articulatory process and analysis of misarticulation as
symptoms of language dysfunction; variables related to articulatory mastery; pro-
grammed, traditional, and sensory-motor methods of modifying articulatory behavior.

SH614 NEUROPATHOLOGIES OF SPEECH 3 S.h.

Investigation of symptoms and etiologies associated with deviant neural transmis-
sion and muscular contraction. Examination of diagnostic techniques employed in
neuromuscular conditions resulting from palsies, progressive degenerative diseases,
dysarthrias, tumors, and paralytic or paretic involvement. Emphasis on treatment
approaches.

SH616 STUTTERING 3 s.h.

Nature and causes of stuttering. Emphasis on diagnosis and management. Coun-
seling and learning theory application as two mam approaches to treatment. Consider-
ation of the person as a stutterer. Review of pertinent and recent research topics.

SH618 VOICE 3 s.h.

Scientific principles of voice production and modification with emphasis on
physiology, pathologies, or malfunctioning which produce voice defects, relationship
between disorders of voice and personality; diagnostic and therapeutic considerations
for both organic and psychogenic disorders, including the laryngectomized.

SH 624 PRINCIPLES OF SPEECH-LANGUAGE PATHOLOGY

IN THE SCHOOLS 3 s.h.

Advanced study of legal and social factors affecting service delivery in the public
schools. Models of service delivery for classroom and individual programs. Models of
supervision for staff, paraprofessionals. and trainees,

SH 630 LANGUAGE DISORDERS OF CHILDREN 3 s.h.

Anatomical, physiological, psychological, neurological and environmental factors
related to language delay or disordered language acquisition. An inventory of language
skills and means of fostenng their development or compensating for inadequacies; a
holistic vs specific approach to programs of remediation,

SH 631 SEMINAR IN LANGUAGE ACQUISITION 3 s.h.

Advanced study of the processes and sequences of normal language acquisition.
Special emphasis placed upon a comprehensive review of recent theones and research
related to cognitive-perceptual and social-pragmatic variables. Trends in language
acquisition will be studied in relationship to other developmental sequences

782 — Indiana University of Pennsylvania

SH 632 APHASIA 3 s.h.

Consideralion of language, speech and related problems resulting fronn neurological
insult. Neurological functioning and dysfunctioning will be fiighlighted. Diagnosis and
n~!anagement of persons withi aphasia, agnosias, or apraxias will be emphasized. Role of
family in rehabilitation and family counseling.

SH 635 SEfVllNAR IN COMMUNICATION 1-3sh.

Intensive study of one or more areas of speech science, speech and language
pathology, or audiology. Topics vary to meet the student's needs and interests. Course
may be repeated for credit with a change in area considered Prerequisite: Speech-
Language Pathology major, admission to degree candidacy, and adviser approval.

SH 640 DIAGNOSTIC AUDIOLOGY 3 s.h.

Identification and description of types of hearing impairment by standard audiometric
procedures including pure tone, speech, and site of lesion batteries. Testing of special
populations as well as evaluation for fitting of amplification.

SH 645 PEDIATRIC AUDIOLOGY 3 s.h.

Study of audiological procedures used from infancy through adolescence. Special
emphasis on evoked response audiometry, impedance audiometry /tympanometry, and
behavioral procedures in addition to standard audiological procedures. Interpretation of
findings on children and its effect upon medical referral, classroom placement, and
prosthetic or educational modifications.

SH 650 ADVANCED SPEECH SCIENCE 3 s.h.

Physiologic, acoustic, and perceptual characteristics of speech with special
emphasis on speech monitoring and controls. Major lab instrumentation and research
techniques in current use are described and demonstrated. Status of present knowl-
edge is summarized and discussed.*

SH 661 ADVANCED CLINICAL PRACTICUM I 2-6 s.h.

Supervised practicum experience in the University Speech and Hearing Clinic with
individuals exhibiting speech, language, and/or hearing dysfunction. Planning and
carrying on of programs of therapy plus interviewing, diagnosing, counseling, and report
writing.

SH 662 DIAGNOSTIC CLINIC 1 s.h.

Supervised practicum experience in performing in-depth diagnostic evaluations with
individuals exhibiting any type of speech, hearing, or language dysfunction. Experience
in taking case histories, conferring with parents, and report writing,

SH 663 HEARING TESTING CLINIC 1 s.h.

Supervised practicum experience in performing diagnostic audiological tests.

SH 681 ADVANCED CLINICAL PRACTICUM II 2-6 s.h.

Similar to SH 661; students assume more responsibility, and experience may be
done at approved off-campus sites.

SH 850 THESIS 3 s.h.

Programs and Courses — 183
Special Education and Clinical Services

Theater

THEATER

The Theater Department does not offer a graduate degree program.

TH 586 PRACTICUM IN PRODUCTION 1-6s.h.

An opportunity with academic credit for students to make significant contributions to
campus productions augmenting theater course work in the areas of assistant directing
or directing, stage management, technical direction, sound design, lighting, costuming,
scene design, properties and set decoration, scene building and painting and make-up
design. May be repeated for a maximum of six credits. Prerequisite: by permission.

TH 588 SUMMER THEATER WORKSHOP 3-9 s.h.

A practicum offering experience in all major aspects of production by combining
class work with participation in Theater-by-the-Grove, lUP's repertory theater.

v'V..

Directory —185

Internet Archive Audio

Featured

Top

Images

Featured

Top

Software

Featured

Top

Books

Featured

Top

Video

Featured

Top

Mobile Apps

Browser Extensions

Archive-It Subscription

Save Page Now

Full text of "Graduate catalog"

See other formats